TW201012157A - Methods and devices for requesting radio resources and/or synchronization within a radio communication system - Google Patents

Methods and devices for requesting radio resources and/or synchronization within a radio communication system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TW201012157A
TW201012157A TW098129179A TW98129179A TW201012157A TW 201012157 A TW201012157 A TW 201012157A TW 098129179 A TW098129179 A TW 098129179A TW 98129179 A TW98129179 A TW 98129179A TW 201012157 A TW201012157 A TW 201012157A
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
radio communication
communication terminal
terminal device
time
radio
Prior art date
Application number
TW098129179A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
Ananth Subramanian
xiao-ming Peng
Po Shin Francois Chin
Original Assignee
Agency Science Tech & Res
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Agency Science Tech & Res filed Critical Agency Science Tech & Res
Publication of TW201012157A publication Critical patent/TW201012157A/en

Links

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/20Control channels or signalling for resource management
    • H04W72/21Control channels or signalling for resource management in the uplink direction of a wireless link, i.e. towards the network
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • H04L5/003Arrangements for allocating sub-channels of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0446Resources in time domain, e.g. slots or frames
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/18Self-organising networks, e.g. ad-hoc networks or sensor networks

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A method for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system is provided. The method includes generating and encoding a first request message for radio resources including a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions, wherein the first request message includes an Information Element being encoded in accordance with a first communication protocol format which can be decoded by a radio communication terminal device of a first type being configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without slotted offset time/frequency portion communication and by a radio communication terminal device of a second type being configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. The method further includes, in case the radio resources requestedy by the first request message are not available, generating and encoding a second request message for radio resources including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions, wherein the second request message includes an Application specific Informaiton Element being encoded in accordance with a seoncd communication protocol format which can be decoded by a radio communication terminal device of the second type.

Description

201012157 六、發明說明·· 【發明所屬之技術領域】 本發明的實施例係關於通訊系統的領域,例如,無線 電通訊系統。舉例來說,本發明的實施例係關於請求和保 留無線電資源的方法。舉例來說,本發明的實施例係關於 無線電通訊系統内的無線電通訊終端裝置之間的同步化的 方法舉例來說,該無線電通訊系統可能係一包括複數個 特定(ad hoc)無線電通訊終端裝置的特定無線電通訊系統。 本申請案主張美國臨時專利申請案第61/〇92,467號 (2008年8月28曰提申)的權利,本文以引用的方式將其完 整内容併入。 【先前技術】 一通訊系統通常係由複數個通訊裝置所組成,其中, s亥專通訊裝置之間的通訊係由中央控制(central c〇ntr〇1ied) 或是自我組織(self-organized)。 一特定無線電通訊群通常包含複數個特定無線電通訊 通訊裝置’其中,該些裝置之間的通訊係由自我組織的。 該等複數個裝置能夠於某個範圍内相互探索,用以形成該 通訊群;而且於該通訊群内,它們不需要中央控制便能夠 相互通訊。 正交分頻多工(OFDM ’ Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing)係特定無線電通訊系統中的一種廣泛使用的 技術。OFDM係一種多載波傳送技術,其係將可用的頻譜分 成許多子載波’每一個子載波皆係被一低資料速率流調 5 201012157 變。夠達到高速資料傳送和高頻譜效率的目的。目 前為止,已經有人提出數種以0FDM為基礎的標準,例如 ECMA 標準[1]。 多頻帶OFDM技術係被用來在ECMA標準π]中傳送資 訊。在操作巾’舉例來說,複數個特定無線電通訊終端裝 置係傾向於在某個特殊頻率通道中當作一特定通訊群(信標 群(beacon group))來運作。在π]之中,在正常的平衡操作^ 當某個特殊信標群中的特定無線電通訊終端裝置被調諧至 某個特殊頻率通道時,該等裝置最後僅會使用可用的十四 個頻帶中的三個頻帶。另外,該等三個被利用的頻帶中其 中一者中的頻帶僅有三分之一的時間係被使用(假如裴置操 作在個別時間頻率碼中的話)。上述作法係導致低頻譜使用 率並產生未利用的頻帶。 參考文件[2]則提出一種藉由使用有槽偏移時間頻率碼 (TFC,Time-FrequenCy Code)來提高網路總流量的方法。 【發明内容】 於一實施例中,本發明提供一種用於在無線電通訊系 統中請求無線電資源的方法。 於實施例中’該方法包含產生與編碼包含複數個有 s 時間 /頻率部分(si〇tte(j tjme/frequency p〇rti〇n)的無線電 資源的一第一請求訊息。於一實施例中,該第一請求訊息 包含一根據可由第一類型無線電通訊終端裝置及第二類型 無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之第一通訊協定格式被編碼的 資訊要件(Information Element),其中,該第一類型的無線 201012157 ❹ 參 電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分 通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊,而該第二類型 的無線電通訊終端裝置則係被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻 率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。於一實施例 中,該方法可能進-步包含假如該第一請求訊息所請求的 無線電資源無法利用則產生與編碼包含複數個有槽偏移時 間/頻率部分的無線電資源的二請求訊息。於—實施例 中’該第二請求訊息可能包含一根據可由第二類型無 通訊終端裝置來解碼之第二通訊協定格式被編媽的特定應 用資訊要件(Application Specific Inf〇rmati〇n meme叫 〇 於實施例中,本發明提供一種用於在無線電通訊系 統中決定可用無線電資源的方法。於一實施例中,該方法 可能包含判斷包含複數個有槽偏移時率 無線電資源是否可以利用。於一實施例中,假如 的無線電資源無法利用,該方法則可能進一步包含利用該 等無線電資源的-請求訊息來判斷包含不同複數 = 移時間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是否可以利用^偏 實施例中,該請求訊息可能包含—㈣可由某種無 電通訊終端裝置來^ 碼之通§fl協定格式被編碼的特定廡田 資訊要件,其中, 屬用 成用以裎徂女"類型的無線電通訊終端t置係被配置 成用以供有槽時簡/ 部分通訊。 頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率 於一實施例中, 統中同步化至少—第 本發明提供一種用於在無線電通訊系 一無線電通訊終端裝置和一第二無線 7 201012157 電通訊終端裝置的方法。於—實 判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置是中’該方法可能包含 尹沒有改變其同步化 疋已經在一段預設時間 化傳送週期起始時 該方法可能進一步包I 5。於一實施例中, 同步化傳送週期起始 …、線電通矾終端裝置的 線電通訊終端裝置已經在—段=例尹’假如該第二無 化傳送週期起始時間,該方法可::::沒:改變其同步 線電通訊終端裝詈% 步包含將該第一無 無線電通訊終端起始時間设為該第二 於〜裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 於一實施例中,本發 統中同步化第—稽I " 用於在無線電通訊系 無線電通訊終端裝置的方法。於 和第二複數個 包含於該等第二複數… 例中,該方法可能 個…、線電通訊終端裝署φ 通訊終端裝置中眘广.4 ㈣裝置中的一無線電 端裝置令的—盔绫雷稷數個無線電通訊終 時間電相終㈣置的同步㈣料期起始 丁,日』於—實施例中,哕古 〜阳 無線電通訊終端裝置中=〇月匕匕3於該等第二複數個 ::等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的 同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該等第一複數個 ‘、、、線電通訊終端裳置中的該 個 的同步化傳送週期起…, Μ裒置之鉍決定 包含於該等第-複數二0。於—實施例中’該方法可能 通訊終端裝置中竇 無線電 第-複數個I線電通Μ 一同步化訊息,其包含和該等 …、線電通訊终端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝 201012157 置之經決定的同步化傳送调+ 得廷週期起始時間有關的資訊。 根據其它實施例,本發明接 的裝置 月徒供根據上面所述方法製成 法的實施例 還應該注意的係,本文中用以說明前述方 同樣適用於可應用的對應裝置。 【實施方式】201012157 VI. Description of the Invention: TECHNICAL FIELD Embodiments of the present invention relate to the field of communication systems, for example, radio communication systems. For example, embodiments of the present invention are directed to methods of requesting and maintaining radio resources. For example, embodiments of the present invention are directed to methods for synchronizing between radio communication terminal devices within a radio communication system, for example, the radio communication system may include a plurality of ad hoc radio communication terminal devices Specific radio communication system. The present application claims the benefit of U.S. Provisional Patent Application Serial No. 61/92,467, the entire disclosure of which is incorporated herein by reference. [Prior Art] A communication system usually consists of a plurality of communication devices, wherein the communication between the communication devices is centrally controlled or self-organized. A particular radio communication group typically includes a plurality of specific radio communication devices 'where the communication between the devices is self-organizing. The plurality of devices can explore each other within a certain range to form the communication group; and within the communication group, they can communicate with each other without central control. OFDM [Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing] is a widely used technology in a specific radio communication system. OFDM is a multi-carrier transmission technique that divides the available spectrum into a number of sub-carriers. Each sub-carrier is changed by a low data rate. Achieve high-speed data transmission and high spectral efficiency. Several 0FDM-based standards have been proposed so far, such as the ECMA standard [1]. Multi-band OFDM technology is used to transmit information in the ECMA standard π]. In the operation of the towel, for example, a plurality of specific radio communication terminal devices tend to operate as a specific communication group (beacon group) in a particular frequency channel. In π], in a normal balancing operation, when a particular radio communication terminal device in a particular beacon group is tuned to a particular frequency channel, the devices will only use the available fourteen frequency bands. The three bands. In addition, only one-third of the time bands in one of the three utilized frequency bands are used (provided that the operation is in an individual time frequency code). The above approach results in low spectrum usage and an unused frequency band. Reference [2] proposes a method for increasing the total network traffic by using a slotted time-frequency code (TFC, Time-FrequenCy Code). SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION In one embodiment, the present invention provides a method for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system. In an embodiment, the method includes generating and encoding a first request message comprising a plurality of radio resources having a s time/frequency portion (si tttme/frequency p〇rti〇n). In an embodiment The first request message includes an information element encoded according to a first protocol format that can be decoded by the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device, wherein the first type of information The wireless 201012157 ❹ parametric communication terminal device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication, and the second type of radio communication terminal device is configured In order to provide slotted time/frequency partial communication and slotted offset time/frequency partial communication. In an embodiment, the method may further include if the radio resource requested by the first request message is unavailable And a request message encoding a radio resource comprising a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions. In the embodiment, the The request message may include a specific application information element that is programmed according to a second protocol format that can be decoded by the second type of communication terminal device (Application Specific Inf〇rmati〇n meme is called in the embodiment, the present invention provides a A method for determining available radio resources in a radio communication system. In an embodiment, the method may include determining whether a radio resource having a plurality of slotted offset rates is available. In an embodiment, the radio resource is absent. Unavailable, the method may further include using the request message of the radio resources to determine whether the required radio resources including different complex = shift time/frequency portions are available. In the embodiment, the request message may include - (4) The specific 庑田Information element encoded by the §fl protocol format may be encoded by a non-electrical communication terminal device, wherein the radio communication terminal t system used for the prostitute type is configured to be used Simple/partial communication for slotted. Frequency partial communication and slotted offset time/frequency In one embodiment, the system is synchronized at least - the present invention provides a method for a radio communication terminal device and a second wireless 7 201012157 electrical communication terminal device. The communication terminal device is in the process that the method may include that Yin has not changed its synchronization. The method may further include I5 at the beginning of a predetermined timed transmission cycle. In an embodiment, the synchronization transmission cycle starts... The line communication terminal device of the line communication terminal device has been in the segment = case Yin 'if the second non-transmission cycle start time, the method can be :::: no: change its synchronization line communication terminal installation The % step includes setting the first radio-free communication terminal start time to the second-to-device synchronization transmission cycle start time. In one embodiment, the present invention is a method for synchronizing a radio communication terminal device in a radio communication system. And the second plurality is included in the second plural... In this example, the method may be..., the line communication terminal is installed in the communication terminal device, and the wireless terminal device in the device is used.绫Thunder a number of radio communication final time electrical phase end (four) set synchronization (four) material period start ding, day 』 in the example, 哕古~阳无线电通信终端装置=〇月匕匕3 in the first The second plurality of:: the synchronization start transmission period in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is set as the synchronization transmission period of the first plurality of ',,, and line communication terminal slots From the beginning, the decision of the device is included in the first-complex number two. In the embodiment, the method may be a sinus radio, a plurality of I-wires, and a synchronization message in the communication terminal device, and the radio communication terminal in the line communication terminal device is installed in 201012157. The determined synchronization transfer + the information about the start time of the get cycle. According to other embodiments, the apparatus of the present invention is also contemplated by embodiments made in accordance with the methods described above, and is used herein to illustrate that the foregoing applies equally to applicable counterparts. [Embodiment]

應該注意的係,本文雖然配合特定無線電通訊終端裝 置及特定無線電通訊系統來說明本發明不同的示範性實施 例;不過,本發明的應用㈣並不僅適用於由複數個特定 無線電通訊終端裳置所組成的特定無線電通訊系統,其亦 適用於由複數個無線電通訊裝置所組成的—般無線電通訊 系統,其中,該無線電通訊系統可能包括該等複數個無線 電通訊裝置的中央控制器。 本文中使用的頻帶(frequency band)一詞可能係指可以 用於訊號傳送的—事先定義的連續頻率範圍。在本說明的 内文中,頻帶可能經常會使用到一和其相關聯的頻帶數來 表示。 進一步s之’頻率通道(freqUenCy channei)一詞可能係 指一或多個頻帶的組合,而且此一組合同樣可用於訊號傳 送。在本文中,頻率通道可能具有或可能不具有一連續的 頻率範圍。在本說明的内文中,頻率通道可能經常會使用 到一和其相關聯的頻率通道數來表示。 除此之外’頻帶群(band gr〇up) 一詞可能係指一群頻 帶。一頻帶群可以或不可以用於訊號傳送。一頻率通道可 9 201012157 能和一頻帶群具有相同的頻帶。 又’進-步言之’時間頻率碼(TFC)—詞可能包含跳頻 樣式,其中,某些樣式係在頻帶之間跳躍而某些則保持固 定在單-頻帶中。舉例來說’ ECMA標準⑴規^ 3種類型 的TFC :其中一種被稱為時間頻率交錯,It should be noted that although various exemplary embodiments of the present invention are described herein in connection with a particular radio communication terminal device and a particular radio communication system; however, the application (4) of the present invention is not only applicable to a plurality of specific radio communication terminals. A particular radio communication system is also suitable for use in a general radio communication system comprising a plurality of radio communication devices, wherein the radio communication system may comprise a central controller of the plurality of radio communication devices. The term frequency band as used herein may refer to a pre-defined continuous frequency range that can be used for signal transmission. In the context of this description, a frequency band may often be represented by a number of bands associated with it. Further, the term 'freqUenCy channei' may refer to a combination of one or more frequency bands, and this combination is equally applicable to signal transmission. In this context, a frequency channel may or may not have a continuous frequency range. In the context of this description, frequency channels may often be represented using a number of frequency channels associated with them. In addition to this, the term band gr〇up may refer to a group of bands. A band group may or may not be used for signal transmission. A frequency channel can be 9 201012157 and can have the same frequency band as a band group. The 'in-step' frequency code (TFC)-word may include a frequency hopping pattern in which some patterns hop between frequency bands and some remain fixed in a single-frequency band. For example, the ECMA standard (1) regulates three types of TFCs: one of which is called time-frequency interleaving.

Time-Frequency Interleaving),其中被編碼的資訊係在三 個頻帶中進行交錯;其中—種被稱為雙頻帶頂或是顶2, 其中,被編碼的資訊係在兩個頻帶中進行交錯;其中一種 被稱為固定頻率交錯_,跑ed Frequency Interlelvmg), 其中,被編碼的資訊係在單-頻帶中進行交錯。在ECMA 標準⑴的規範下且如下文的用法,「時間頻率碼(tfc)」和 「跳頻樣式」等詞語和「頻率通道」—詞同義。 來說在OFDM傳送系統的ECMa標準(參考文件 ⑴)中,當-特定無線電通訊群操作在某—特殊的頻率通道 時某頻帶群中的一頻帶僅會在某個最大特定部分的 時間中被利用到。舉例來說,根據刪 用TFI,一頻帶禮各+旦丄一 13ζ· 僅會在最大二分之一的時間中被使用。進一 2 =如某一裝置在0FDM符號持續長度期間於-特 群中他装4行傳送,則該頻帶群中(而^可能其它頻帶 =中)的其它頻帶在該_M符號傳送時間期間便不會被利 偏移t本ΛΓ礎时考文件附賴出之有槽 進步^之,本發明還在各實施例中 201012157 提供以利用參考文件[3]中所揭示之增強形同步化技術為基 礎在特定無線電通訊系統内的特定無線電通訊終端裝置之 間進行同步化的方法。進一步言<,本發明係在各實施例 中提出如ECMA規格⑴中所定義之特定應用資訊要件 (ASIE)、特定應用探測f訊要件、特定應用控制訊框、以及 特定應用命令訊框中的資料欄位的袼式。Time-Frequency Interleaving), wherein the encoded information is interleaved in three frequency bands; wherein the type is called dual band top or top 2, wherein the encoded information is interleaved in two frequency bands; One is called fixed frequency interleaving, and the encoded information is interleaved in a single-band. Under the ECMA standard (1) specification and as follows, words such as "time frequency code (tfc)" and "frequency hopping pattern" are synonymous with "frequency channel". In the ECMa standard of the OFDM transmission system (Reference (1)), when a specific radio communication group operates in a certain special frequency channel, a frequency band in a certain frequency group will only be in the time of a certain maximum specific part. Use it. For example, according to the deletion of TFI, one band will be used for a maximum of one-half of the time. Further 2 = If a device transmits 4 lines in the -spec group during the duration of the 0FDM symbol, then other bands in the band group (and possibly other bands = in) are during the _M symbol transmission time The present invention is also provided in 201012157 in various embodiments to utilize the enhanced shape synchronization technique disclosed in the reference document [3]. A method of synchronizing between specific radio communication terminal devices within a particular radio communication system. Further, the present invention proposes, in various embodiments, a specific application information element (ASIE) as defined in the ECMA specification (1), a specific application probe request element, a specific application control frame, and a specific application command frame. The style of the data field.

舉例來說’圖1所示的係一包含特定無線電通訊終端 裝置A至H( 111至η8)的特定無線電通訊群1〇〇,其中, 斤有裝置A H( 111至11 8)皆運作在—特殊的頻率通道 中。為達解釋目的’圓形線101代表裝置B 112的傳送範圍, 其意謂著裝置B能夠將OFDM符號傳送給位於該圓形線ι〇ι 裡面的其匕裝置。於此圖式中’裝置B 112能夠將〇fdm 符號傳送給裝置A m、C 113、D U4、e 115、以及Η ιΐ8。 同樣地,圓形線102代表裝置c 113的傳送範圍,其意謂著 裝置C旎夠將〇FDM符號傳送給位於該圓形線1〇2裡面的 其它裝置;而圓形線103代表裝置D 114的傳送範圍,其 意謂著裝置D能夠將0FDM符號傳送給位於該圓形線ι〇3 裡面的其它裝置。舉例來說,根據現行的ecma標準[1], 當裝置A 111發送〇FDM符號給裝置B 112時,在該等無 線電通訊裝置群⑽巾的特定無線電通訊裝置c、d、e、g、 以及H(113、114、115、117、以及118)之間便不會有任何 其它資料傳送同時進行。 在0FDM傳送系統的ECMA標準[1]中,從裝置a u i 至裝置B 112的0FDM符號傳送圖解在圖2中,其中,裝 11 201012157 置a m係在頻帶群201中將〇fdm符號傳送給裝置b . 112。頻帶群2(H包含三個頻帶2ii'22i、以及23卜當使 用TFI ’破傳送的0FDM符號係根據某個跳頻樣式(如灰 色框體241至246中所示)於三個頻帶211、221、以及231For example, the system shown in Fig. 1 includes a specific radio communication group 1A of specific radio communication terminal devices A to H (111 to η8), wherein the devices AH (111 to 11 8) are operated at - In a special frequency channel. For the purpose of explanation, the circular line 101 represents the transmission range of the device B 112, which means that the device B can transmit the OFDM symbol to its subsequent device located inside the circular line ι〇ι. In the figure, the device B 112 can transmit the 〇fdm symbol to the devices A m, C 113, D U4, e 115, and ΐ ι 8 . Similarly, the circular line 102 represents the transmission range of the device c 113, which means that the device C is sufficient to transmit the 〇FDM symbol to other devices located inside the circular line 1〇2; and the circular line 103 represents the device D. The transmission range of 114 means that the device D is capable of transmitting the OFDM symbol to other devices located within the circular line ι〇3. For example, according to the current ecma standard [1], when the device A 111 transmits the 〇FDM symbol to the device B 112, the specific radio communication devices c, d, e, g, and of the radio communication device group (10) There will be no other data transfer between H (113, 114, 115, 117, and 118) at the same time. In the ECMA standard [1] of the OFDM transmission system, the 0FDM symbol transmission from the device aui to the device B 112 is illustrated in FIG. 2, wherein the device 11 201012157 is configured to transmit the 〇fdm symbol to the device b in the band group 201. 112. Band group 2 (H contains three bands 2ii'22i, and 23 when using TFI's broken transmission of 0FDM symbols according to a certain frequency hopping pattern (as shown in gray frames 241 to 246) in three frequency bands 211, 221, and 231

中進行父錯。據此,一頻帶僅會在傳送期間最大三分之一 的時間中被使用。進-步言之,當裝置A 1U正在〇FDM 符號持續長度時間期間於一特殊的頻帶中傳送資料給裝置 B 112時’該頻帶群中的其它頻帶在該〇fdm符號傳送時間 期間便不會被利用。因此,由於未被利用頻帶的關係,頻 〇 譜使用率係很低。In the middle of the father's mistake. Accordingly, a frequency band is only used for a maximum of one third of the time during transmission. In the first step, when the device A 1U is transmitting data to the device B 112 in a special frequency band during the duration of the FDM symbol duration, the other frequency bands in the band group will not be during the 〇fdm symbol transmission time. Be exploited. Therefore, the frequency spectrum usage rate is very low due to the unutilized frequency band.

L有槽偏蒋TFC 在參考文件[2]中已經提出用以在由ECMA[1]指定裝置 ,且成的網路中達成較尚總流量的方法。在[2]中提出的技術 係以有槽偏移TFC概念為基礎,其可以有效利用可供 WiMedia/ECMA[1]指定裝置使用的頻寬。下面係摘要說明 該以有槽偏移TFC為基礎的方法。 參考文件[2]提出使用有槽偏移時間頻率碼(TFc)在給 Θ 定的時間處讓一特殊的信標群有效地利用可用的頻譜(也就 是’整個頻帶群)。使用[2]中提出的偏移TFC,便可以在相 同的時間利用整個頻帶群。下面係摘要說明在[2]中提出的 方法。 假設OFDM符號如圖2中的灰色框體所示般地在三個 頻帶之間依照從(頻帶211)至(頻帶221)至(頻帶231)的某個 跳頻樣式被傳送》舉例來說’一裝置係在第一 〇FDm符號 12 201012157 時間202期間在頻帶211中傳送第一 〇FDM符號在第二 OFDM符號時間2〇3期間在頻帶221中傳送第」 —號,以及在第三OFDM符號時間2〇4期間在頻帶23i中傳 送第三OFDM符號。之後,該裝置係在第四〇峨符號時 間205期間重新從頻帶211開始發送第四〇fdm符號,並 且在接續的OFDM符號傳送中遵循從(頻帶2U)至(頻帶 至(頻帶231)的跳頻樣式。另外,參考圖2可以看出,黑色 框體261至266以及白色框體251至256代表和灰色框 24!至246相同的跳頻樣式,唯一不同的係用於傳送第一 OFDM符號的起始頻帶。此差異可以另一方式來解釋:黑色 ' 框體261至266以及白色框體251至256分別代表灰色框 體241至246所代表之有槽時間/頻率部分的有槽偏移時間/ 頻率部分。也就是,黑色框體261至266以及白色框體25i 至256分別代表灰色框體241至246所代表之跳頻樣式的 偏移或是該跳頻樣式的時間移位版本。舉例來說該等黑 _ 色框體261至266代表以灰色框體241至246所代表之跳 頻樣式為基準之跳頻樣式的時間移位版本。也就是,該等 “、、色框體26 1至266代表以灰色框體241至246所代表之 有槽時間/頻率部分為基準的有槽偏移時間/頻率部分。同樣 地’該等白色框體251至256代表以灰色框體241至246 所代表之跳頻樣式為基準之跳頻樣式的更大時間移位版 本。也就是’該等白色框體251至256代表以灰色框體241 至246所代表之有槽時間/頻率部分為基準的另一組有槽偏 移時間7頻率部分。根據參考文件[2],該特定無線電通訊裝 13 201012157 置群(圖中未顯示)中的第一特 « - ^ ^ 打叱热踝電通訊裝置可能會在 號傳送時間202期間於第-頻帶211内(參見 圖2中的灰色框體241)傳送第一 〇fd 送時間職202巾,第寸鈮在相同的傳 二頻帶221中(參見圖2中 此會在第 ^ T的白色框體251)傳送第二〇fdm "该第二頻帶221不同於該第-頻帶2U。進一 ^言之,在相同的傳送時間週期中,該特定無線電通訊裝 群的第二特定無線電通訊裝置可能會在第三頻率子範圍 中傳送第三0職符號,其中,該第三頻率子範圍不同於 該專第-與第二頻率子範圍。此參考文件[2]的實施例亦圖 解在圖2巾。在被兩個分離裝置傳送的第一 〇F歸符號與 第二OFDM符號的相同傳送時間週期2〇2 +,第三特定無 線電通訊裝置(圖中未顯示)可能會在第三頻$ 231中(參見 圖2中的黑色框體261)傳送第三〇FDM符號其中該第 三頻帶231不同於該等第一頻帶211與第二頻帶221。 因此,根據參考文件[2]可以看出,整個頻帶群可以同 時被利用。舉例來說,在圖2中,灰色框體24ι至246構 成TFC偏移0,黑色框體261至266構成TFc偏移】,而 白色框體251至256構成TFC偏移2。此處,TFc偏移〇、 TFC偏移1、以及TFC偏移2係在相同的頻率通道内(相同 的跳頻樣式)並且係可用於傳送0FDM符號的頻率通道的三 個偏移。TFC偏移1及TFC偏移2具有在相同跳躍樣式内 依照TFC偏移0來偏移的頻率樣式時間。在本文中,tfc 偏移0亦被稱為内定TFC偏移或是沒有偏移的有槽TFC。 201012157The L-slot-shifted TFC has been proposed in the reference document [2] to achieve a higher total flow rate in the network specified by the ECMA [1]. The technique proposed in [2] is based on the slotted offset TFC concept, which can effectively utilize the bandwidth available to WiMedia/ECMA [1] designated devices. The following is a summary of the method based on slotted offset TFC. Reference [2] proposes to use a slotted offset time-frequency code (TFc) to make a particular beacon group effectively utilize the available spectrum (i.e., 'entire band group) at a given time. Using the offset TFC proposed in [2], the entire band group can be utilized at the same time. The following is a summary of the method proposed in [2]. It is assumed that the OFDM symbol is transmitted between three frequency bands in accordance with a certain frequency hopping pattern from (band 211) to (band 221) to (band 231) as shown by the gray frame in FIG. 2, for example ' A device transmits a first 〇FDM symbol in frequency band 211 during a first 〇FDM symbol 12 201012157 time 202, transmitting a "0" in frequency band 221 during a second OFDM symbol time 2 〇 3, and at a third OFDM symbol The third OFDM symbol is transmitted in the frequency band 23i during time 2〇4. Thereafter, the device retransmits the fourth 〇fdm symbol from the frequency band 211 during the fourth 〇峨 symbol time 205, and follows the hop from (band 2U) to (band to (band 231) in successive OFDM symbol transmissions. In addition, referring to FIG. 2, the black frames 261 to 266 and the white frames 251 to 256 represent the same frequency hopping pattern as the gray frames 24! to 246, and the only difference is for transmitting the first OFDM symbol. The starting frequency band. This difference can be explained in another way: the black 'frames 261 to 266 and the white frames 251 to 256 represent the grooved offset of the grooved time/frequency portion represented by the gray frames 241 to 246, respectively. The time/frequency portion, that is, the black frames 261 to 266 and the white frames 25i to 256 represent the offset of the frequency hopping pattern represented by the gray frames 241 to 246, respectively, or the time shifted version of the frequency hopping pattern. For example, the black-color frames 261 to 266 represent time-shifted versions of the frequency hopping patterns based on the frequency hopping patterns represented by the gray frames 241 to 246. That is, the "," color frames 26 1 to 266 represent gray frames The grooved offset time/frequency portion represented by the slotted time/frequency portion represented by 241 to 246. Similarly, the white frames 251 to 256 represent the frequency hopping pattern represented by the gray frames 241 to 246. A larger time shifted version of the reference frequency hopping pattern. That is, the white frames 251 to 256 represent another set of slotted offsets based on the slotted time/frequency portion represented by the gray frames 241 through 246. Shift time 7 frequency part. According to the reference [2], the first special radio frequency communication device in the specific radio communication device 13 201012157 group (not shown) may be in the transmission time of the number During the period 202, the first 〇fd is sent in the first frequency band 211 (see the gray frame 241 in FIG. 2), and the first inch is in the same two-band 221 (see FIG. ^T's white frame 251) transmits a second 〇fdm " the second frequency band 221 is different from the first frequency band 2U. Further, in the same transmission time period, the second of the specific radio communication group Specific radio communication devices may be in the third frequency sub-range Transmitting a third zero job symbol, wherein the third frequency subrange is different from the special-and second frequency sub-range. The embodiment of this reference document [2] is also illustrated in Figure 2. The first transmission F return symbol and the second transmission time period of the second OFDM symbol are 2〇2 +, and the third specific radio communication device (not shown) may be in the third frequency $ 231 (see FIG. 2 The black frame 261) transmits a third 〇FDM symbol, wherein the third frequency band 231 is different from the first frequency band 211 and the second frequency band 221. Therefore, it can be seen from the reference [2] that the entire band group can be utilized at the same time. For example, in Fig. 2, the gray frames 24i to 246 constitute a TFC offset of 0, the black frames 261 to 266 constitute a TFc offset, and the white frames 251 to 256 constitute a TFC offset of 2. Here, TFc offset 〇, TFC offset 1, and TFC offset 2 are in the same frequency channel (same frequency hopping pattern) and are three offsets that can be used to transmit the frequency channel of the OFDM symbol. TFC Offset 1 and TFC Offset 2 have frequency pattern times that are offset according to TFC offset 0 within the same hopping pattern. In this context, tfc offset 0 is also referred to as a delimited TFC offset or a slotted TFC without offset. 201012157

❹ TFC偏移i具有以TFC偏移以基準之跳頻樣式的時間移 位版本,⑹TFC偏移2則具有以TFC偏移g為基準之㈣ 樣式的更大時間移位版本。料具有3個頻帶的頻率通道 來說,-TFC(偏移〇)可能最多僅有兩個偏移。在本文中, 根據ECMA標準⑴的特定無線電通訊終端裝置係指僅能夠 使用有槽時間/頻率部分來進行傳送的裝置。在本文中,可 以使用該有槽時間/頻率部分的不同偏移來進行通訊的特^ 無線電通訊裝置則係'指能夠使用有槽偏移時間/頻㈣ 進行通訊的裝置。現在,參考圖1。假如裝置A U^用 TFC偏移〇發送〇FDM符號給裝置Β ιΐ2,裝置c⑴則能 夠同步地利用TFC偏移1發送〇FDM符號給裝置d i μ。 同樣地’裝置E 115亦能夠同時利用TFC偏移2發送〇職 符號給裝置F116。所以,可以同步進行三個傳送;相較於 準(參考文件[1]),因而可利用單—頻帶群將網路總 流量提高達三倍。& 了上面提及的偏移TFC的好處之外, 另-好處係,#有三條分_RF麟的$置還能夠在傳送資 料給-裝置時利用TFC偏移Q的兩個偏移從另外兩個 處接收資料。 在[2]中提出的有槽偏移TFC施行方式中,被同步化的 所有裝置皆假設它們的第一 〇FDM符號始於最慢相鄰裝置 的信標週期起始時間(BPST,Beac〇n Peri〇d以奶τ_)處或 始於某一信標群中所有裝置的BPST的平均值處。就此方面 來說L払週期(BP,Beac〇n Peri〇d)可被定義為由—裝置所 宣告的時間週期,該裝置係於該時間週期期間根據ECMa 15 201012157 標準π]來發送或聆聽信標,而信標一詞可能係指和另外資 料週期中的時間槽保留有關的資訊。每一個超訊框 (superframe)皆係從一 Bp開始,其係延伸在一或多個連續 的媒體存取槽(MAS,Medium Access Slot)上。該BP中第一❹ TFC offset i has a time shifted version with a TFC offset referenced hopping pattern, and (6) TFC offset 2 has a larger time shifted version of the (four) pattern based on the TFC offset g. For a frequency channel with 3 frequency bands, the -TFC (offset 〇) may have a maximum of only two offsets. Herein, a specific radio communication terminal device according to the ECMA standard (1) means a device capable of transmitting only using the slotted time/frequency portion. In this context, a radio communication device that can communicate using different offsets of the slotted time/frequency portion is referred to as a device capable of communicating using slotted offset time/frequency (4). Now, refer to Figure 1. If the device A U^ sends the 〇FDM symbol to the device ΐ ι 2 with the TFC offset 装置, the device c(1) can synchronously transmit the 〇FDM symbol to the device di μ with the TFC offset 1. Similarly, the device E 115 can also simultaneously transmit the job registration symbol to the device F116 using the TFC offset 2. Therefore, three transfers can be performed simultaneously; compared to the standard (reference file [1]), the single-band group can be used to increase the total network traffic by a factor of three. & In addition to the benefits of the offset TFC mentioned above, another benefit, #有三分_RF Lin's $ can also use the two offsets of the TFC offset Q when transmitting data to the device. The other two places receive the data. In the slotted offset TFC implementation proposed in [2], all devices synchronized are assumed that their first FDM symbol starts at the beacon period start time of the slowest neighbor (BPST, Beac〇). n Peri〇d is at the milk τ_) or at the average of the BPST of all devices in a certain beacon group. In this regard, the L払 period (BP, Beac〇n Peri〇d) can be defined as the time period announced by the device during which the device transmits or listens to the message according to the ECMa 15 201012157 standard π]. The term "beacon" may refer to information relating to the retention of time slots in another data cycle. Each superframe starts from a Bp and extends over one or more consecutive Media Access Slots (MAS). The first in the BP

MAS的起點,即該超訊框的起點,便稱為信標週期起始時 間(BPST ’ Beacon Period Start Time)。就背景資訊來說在 ECMA #準⑴的規範下,訊框係被定義為被某一裝置傳送 的負料的單位,而超訊框則係用於訊框傳送的基礎時序結 構。一超訊框可能係由256個MAS所組成;而且一超訊框 可能包含一後面跟著一資料週期的BI^ 一 Bp可能包含數 個信標槽,而且一信標可於一信標槽内被傳送。一特定無 線電通訊終端裝置可能會在該資料週期的一 mas中於該 MAS之起點處開始進行其〇fdm傳送。 圖3所示的係根據ECMA標準(參考文件⑴)的超訊框 3!〇的基礎結構。根據ECMA標準⑴,超訊框係被定義為 用於協調裝置間之訊框傳送的週期性時間區F曰1,其含有一The starting point of the MAS, the starting point of the hyperframe, is called the BPST 'Beacon Period Start Time. As far as background information is concerned, under the ECMA #准(1) specification, the frame is defined as the unit of the negative material transmitted by a device, and the hyperframe is used for the basic timing structure of the frame transmission. A hyperframe may consist of 256 MASs; and a hyperframe may contain a BI followed by a data period. A Bp may contain several beacon slots, and a beacon may be in a beacon slot. Being transmitted. A particular radio communication terminal device may begin its 〇fdm transmission at the beginning of the MAS in one of the data periods. Figure 3 shows the basic structure of the superframe 3!〇 according to the ECMA standard (Reference (1)). According to the ECMA standard (1), a superframe is defined as a periodic time zone F曰1 for coordinating frame transmission between devices, which contains a

信標週期3(H,後面跟著一資料週期3〇2,其中,訊框係被 定義為被某一裝置傳送的資料的單位。-超訊框係由256 個MAS 303所組成。 根據ECMA標準⑴,包含頻帶交換時間的OFDM帶内 時間(in-band time)(位於—頻帶之中)為 312.5nS + 9.47nS=321.97nv利用有槽偏移 TFC,每—個 會Γ期為321·97η…FDM符號傳送持續長度 FDM Symbol Transmissi〇n Durati〇n)期間被傳 16 201012157 送。參考圖3,在[2]中已提出,所有OSTD 3 04係從一 MAS 的起點305處被連續排列對齊。圖3中的「S」304代表一 0STD,而第二 OSTD 304(S=2)就跟在第一 OSTD 304(S = 1) 後面。第三OSTD 304(S = 3)就跟在第二OSTD 304(S = 2)後 面,而第四OSTD 304(S=4)就跟在第三OSTD 304(S = 3)後 面,依此類推。因為一 MAS長度為256微秒,所以,在每 一個MAS内可以傳送795個OSTD,並且在MAS結束處係 餘留小額時間(如ECMA規格[1]中的假定可視為一 OFDM 符號的帶内時間)。下一個MAS的第一 OSTD係被排定始於 下一個MAS 305的起點處。為幫助精確地在每一個OSTD 處傳送OFDM符號,參考文件[3]已提出一種使用虛擬時脈 概念的同步化方法,用以在裝置之間達成時脈週期層級之 更精密的同步化效果,俾使裝置的OSTD係被同步化且不 會過度重疊而導致干擾。稍後會在本申請案中摘要說明參 考文件[3]的内容。 2.已提出的ASIE格式和其它資訊要件 在ECMA規格[1]中已經定義出和高資料速率超寬頻 (UWB)系統有關的特定應用資訊要件(ASIE)、特定應用探測 IE、特定應用控制訊框、以及特定應用命令訊框。 圖4所示的係在ECMA規格[1]中所定義的ASIE的格 式400。從圖中可以看出,該ASIE可能包括:一要件ID 欄位401 ; —長度欄位402,用以表示該ASIE之酬載的長 度;一 ASIE指定符(specifier)ID攔位403 ;以及一特定應 用資料欄位404。要件ID 401有助於區分ASIE和包含特定 17 201012157 應用探測IE的其它IE。每一個要件rn 赘仟1D (0至255)可能會與 一 IE相關聯。指定符ID 403係辨識賣方或工廠以便區分 不同的製造商/賣方。資料攔位404則留給賣方來定義。本 文中係提供該資料攔位的部分内容及格式。 圖5所示的係在ECMA規格Π 1中斛令墓^ 份所疋義的特定應用命 令訊框及控制訊框的酬載的格式5〇〇。從圖中可以看出,該 特定應用命令/控制訊框的酬載5〇〇可能包含一指定符⑴攔 位501以及一特定應用資料攔位5〇2。 圖6所示的係在ECMA規格⑴中所定義的特定應用探 IE的格式600。從圖中可以看出,格式6〇〇可能包含:Beacon period 3 (H, followed by a data period of 3〇2, where the frame is defined as the unit of data transmitted by a device. - The frame is composed of 256 MASs 303. According to ECMA standards (1) The OFDM in-band time (in the -band) including the band switching time is 312.5nS + 9.47nS=321.97nv using the slotted offset TFC, and each period is 321·97η ...FDM symbol transmission duration FDM Symbol Transmissi〇n Durati〇n) was sent 16 201012157 sent. Referring to Fig. 3, it has been proposed in [2] that all of the OSTD 3 04 are continuously aligned from the start 305 of a MAS. "S" 304 in Fig. 3 represents an 0STD, and the second OSTD 304 (S = 2) follows the first OSTD 304 (S = 1). The third OSTD 304 (S = 3) follows the second OSTD 304 (S = 2), while the fourth OSTD 304 (S = 4) follows the third OSTD 304 (S = 3), and so on. . Since a MAS is 256 microseconds long, 795 OSTDs can be transmitted in each MAS, and a small amount of time is left at the end of the MAS (as assumed in the ECMA specification [1], it can be considered as an in-band of an OFDM symbol. time). The first OSTD of the next MAS is scheduled to start at the beginning of the next MAS 305. To help accurately transmit OFDM symbols at each OSTD, reference file [3] has proposed a synchronization method using a virtual clock concept to achieve a more precise synchronization effect between clock cycles at the device level, The OSTD of the device is synchronized and does not overlap excessively, causing interference. The contents of the reference document [3] will be summarized later in this application. 2. The proposed ASIE format and other information elements have defined specific application information elements (ASIE), application-specific detection IEs, and application-specific control elements related to high data rate ultra-wideband (UWB) systems in the ECMA specification [1]. Box, and specific application command frames. Figure 4 shows the format 400 of the ASIE as defined in the ECMA specification [1]. As can be seen from the figure, the ASIE may include: a requirement ID field 401; a length field 402 indicating the length of the payload of the ASIE; an ASIE specifier ID 403; and a Specific application data field 404. The Requirement ID 401 helps distinguish between the ASIE and other IEs that contain the specific 17 201012157 Application Probing IE. Each element rn 赘仟1D (0 to 255) may be associated with an IE. The designator ID 403 identifies the seller or factory to distinguish between different manufacturers/sellers. The data block 404 is left to the seller to define. In this article, some content and format of the data block are provided. Figure 5 shows the format of the payload of the specific application command frame and control frame that is defined in the ECMA specification Π 1 . As can be seen from the figure, the payload of the specific application command/control frame may contain a designator (1) block 501 and a specific application data block 5〇2. Figure 6 shows a format 600 of a specific application IE defined in ECMA Specification (1). As can be seen from the figure, the format 6〇〇 may contain:

測 -要件m攔位6〇1 ; 一長度攔位6〇2; 一目標裝置位址欄 位603; — ASIE指定符ID欄位6〇4;以及一特定應用請求 資訊欄位605。 本發明於-實施例中提供作& ASIE、特定應用探測 IE、以及特定應用命令訊框與控制訊框之一部分的資料欄位 的格式。本發明於一實施例中提供如何利用參考文件[2]中 所介紹之有槽偏移TFC概念,保留參考文件[3]中所提出之❹ 同步化演算法,使用上面IE/訊框中的資料欄位來施行分散 式保留協定(DRP ’ Distributed Reservati〇n ⑽〇和優先 通 L 存取(PCA ’ Prioritized Channel Access)。本發明於進 一步實施例中提供—種在利用[3]之中所提出之增強型同步 化技術(配合有槽偏移TFC來使用)的不同性質信標群之間 進行信標週期合併的演算法。 2-1 的特定應用資料格式 18 201012157 圖7所tf的係根據一實施例的特定應用控制搁位· 的格式於實施例中,八⑽、特定應用探測π、特定應 用命令訊框或控制訊框之酬載中的資料搁位的第—位· 皆為特定應用控制攔位700。 ;實施例中,該特定應用控制攔位700可能包含一 或兩個位元組,位开 至位凡2 701係用來表示該特定無線 電通訊終端裝置的產品或協定版本。於一實施例中,該特 定應用控制欄位的位元3至位元7/位元15撤係被保 留。 . 圖8所7F的係、ASIE中該特定應用控制攔位7GG的-或 兩個位元組以外的資料攔位的格式800。 "圖中可以看出,根據一實施例,在「特定應用資料」 攔位404中所包含之特定應用控制棚位·以外的其餘資 枓可以分類成多種不同的攔位類型而且和軍一搁位類型有 關,所有資訊係被連續封包。於一實施例令,係在每一個 ❹#早-欄位類型有關的連續資訊集8()2的前面提供一特定 應用指定符攔位8 〇 1。 圖9⑷所示的係特定應用指定符欄位801的格式。該特 定應用指定符欄位8G1可能包含和攔位_及該類型中义跟 在其後面的要件數景 受开数ΐ或位凡組數量有關的資訊。舉例來 說,該特定應用指定符欄位8〇1 位位元組901,用以π # , 欄位資訊襴 用以表不欄位類型;以及一要件數量/位 組數量欄位902,用以表示該八⑽的資料棚位彻 類型中跟在該特定應用指定符攔位8〇1後面的要件數以 19 201012157 位元組數量。 圖9(b)所不的係一實施例中的攔位資訊欄位901的格 式於實施例中,欄位資訊攔位901中的位元4至位元7 903係被保留。於一實施例中欄位資訊攔位_中的位元 0至位元3 904係用來表示欄位類型。Measure - element m block 6 〇 1; a length block 6 〇 2; a target device address field 603; - ASIE specifier ID field 6 〇 4; and a specific application request information field 605. The present invention provides, in an embodiment, a format for a & ASIE, a specific application probe IE, and a data field for a portion of a particular application command frame and control frame. The present invention provides, in one embodiment, how to utilize the slotted offset TFC concept introduced in the reference file [2], retaining the 同步 synchronization algorithm proposed in the reference file [3], using the above IE/frame The data field is used to implement a decentralized reservation agreement (DRP 'Distributed Reservati〇n (10) and Priority A Visited Access (PCA ' Prioritized Channel Access). The present invention is provided in a further embodiment - the use of [3] An algorithm for combining beacon periods between different beacon groups of enhanced synchronization techniques (used with slot offset TFC). 2-1 Specific Application Data Format 18 201012157 Figure 7 tf The format of the specific application control shelf according to an embodiment, in the embodiment, eight (10), the specific application detection π, the specific application command frame or the first position of the data shelf in the control frame payload are The specific application controls the interceptor 700. In an embodiment, the specific application control block 700 may include one or two bytes, which are used to indicate the product of the particular radio communication terminal device. Protocol version. In an embodiment, the bit 3 to bit 7/bit 15 of the specific application control field is removed. The system of Figure 7 is the system of 7F, and the specific application controls the block 7GG in the ASIE. - or a format 800 of data stalls other than two bytes. < As can be seen in the figure, according to an embodiment, the specific application control booth included in the "Specific Application Data" block 404 is not included. The remaining assets can be classified into a variety of different types of barriers and are related to the type of military one-position. All information is continuously encapsulated. In one embodiment, a continuous information set related to each type of early-field type is used. A specific application designation bit 8 〇1 is provided in front of 8() 2. The format of the specific application specification field 801 shown in Fig. 9(4). The specific application specification field 8G1 may contain and block _ and The type of meaning in the type followed by the number of requirements is related to the number of open or the number of groups. For example, the specific application specifies the field 8 〇 1 byte 901 for π # , column Bit information is used to indicate the type of field; and a quantity/bit The quantity field 902 is used to indicate the number of requirements in the data store type of the eight (10) following the specific application designation block 8〇1 by 19 201012157 bytes. Figure 9(b) The format of the block information field 901 in an embodiment is in the embodiment, the bit 4 to the bit 7 903 in the field information block 901 are reserved. In one embodiment, the field information block _ Bit 0 to Bit 3 904 are used to indicate the field type.

「特定應用指定符」欄位801的替代格式可能僅利用 個位兀組(只有攔位資訊位元組901),其係利用欄位資訊 位兀組901中的保留位元(舉例來說,位元4至位元乃來代 表彳圖9(a)中相同的要件數量或位元組數量欄位。An alternate format for the "Specific Application Specifier" field 801 may utilize only the one-bit group (only the block information byte 901), which utilizes the field information in the reserved bits in the group 901 (for example, Bit 4 to bit represent the same number of elements or number of bytes in Figure 9(a).

圖9(C)所不的係一實施例中的欄位類型欄位904的數 值對應關係及各種攔位類型。從圖中可以看出,欄位類型 攔位904中的數值「Q」可以用來表示資訊要件的棚位類型, 搁位類型欄位9G4中的數值「1」可以用來表示控制要件的 欄位類型’攔位類型欄位9〇4中的數值「2」可以用來表示 ^令要件的攔位類型,攔位類型攔位904中的數值「3」則 可以用來表示資料要件的欄位類型,而欄位類型欄位9〇4 中的數值「4」至「15」則可能保留。 從圖8中可以看出,特定應用控制攔位係包含 ASIE的資料攔位中’其後面跟著第—特^應用指定符搁 謝且後面為(類型資訊要件的)和單一欄位類型有關的第. ^續資訊集。於—實施例中,在該asie的資料糊位中,, ^資㈣㈣被封裝在—起而所有的命令要件係被封』 起asie中欄位類型彼此的順序並沒有任何限制。_ 用ASIE要被發送的1E同樣沒有任何限制(利用ASIE要4 20 201012157 發送的IE可能係本說明中 _所提^ # 或是在ECMA規格⑴ 捉出者)。於—實施例中, m 一 在和早一欄位類型有關的每 個資訊集的前面係放置一特定應用指定符攔位謝。 =H>(a)所示的係—實施例中的特定應用控制訊框的控 制要件1001的格式。控制亜生 八徑制要件1001可能包含:具有一或 兩個位元組的控制要件資訊欄位1002,具有一個位元組的 控制要件長度攔位咖,以及—控料件㈣攔位賴。 ❹ 圖10⑻所示的係控制要件資訊攔位⑽2的格式。於 實施例中,控制要件資訊棚位1〇〇2的位元〇至位元3削5 係用來表示該控制要件類型。於一實施例中,控制要件資 訊攔位刪的位元4至位元7/位元15祕係被保留。端 視該控制要件的類型而定(其係在控制要件資訊位元組 1002中被提出)’可以推論出,長度棚们〇〇3及/或酬載攔 位1004是否遵循控制要件職中的控制要件資訊位元組 1002 〇 Φ 圖11⑷所示的係-實施例中的特定應用命令訊框的命 令要件1101的格式。命令要件11〇1可能包含·具有一或 兩個位元組的命令要件資訊棚们1〇2,具有一個位元組的 命令要件長度攔位1103,以及一命令要件酬載欄位ιι〇4。 圖n(b)所不的係命令要件資訊欄位1 102的格式。於 一實施例中,命令要件資訊攔位11〇2的位元〇至位元3 n〇5 係用來表示該命令要件類型。於一實施例中,命令要件資 訊欄位1102的位元4至位元7/位元15 1106係被保留。端 視該命令要件的類型而定(其係在命令要件資訊位元組 21 201012157 1102中被提出),可以推論出,長度欄位11G3及/或酬載欄. 位1104疋否遵#命令要件11〇1中的命令要件資訊位元組 1102 〇 圖l2(a)所不的係根據一實施例的查詢資訊欄位12〇1 的格式。於—實施例中,圖6中所示的特定應用探測IE_ 中的特定應用請求資訊欄位605可能包含-群連續排列的 查詢資訊攔位1201。 於一實施例中,查詢資訊欄位1201可能包含具有一個 位元組的查詢控制攔位12〇2。於一實施例中,查詢資訊搁❿ 位1201可能包含具有一個位元組的查詢長度欄位12〇3,用 以表示特定查詢資料12G4的長度。於—實施例中,查詢資 況攔位1 20 1可能包含一特定查詢資料1 204。 * 圖12(b)所不的係根據一實施例的查詢控制位元組 1202的格式。於_實施例中’查詢控制攔位⑽2的位元〇 至位几3 1205係用來表示查詢類型/m。於一實施例中,查 詢控制襴位12G2的位元4至位元61寫係被保留。於一實 施例中’位7 1207係用來表示特定查詢資料12〇4是否包〇 含在該查詢資訊欄位12()1之中。舉例來說,假如查詢控制 位心且1202中的位元7 i 2〇7被設為取〇,則該查詢資訊 攔=12G1的長度便為⑽位元組(不包含查詢長度位元組與 特定查詢資料)。 〜 2·2和有槽偏移TFC有關的特定應用資料的使用 在參考文件m中已經提出目前在ECMA規格⑴中所定 義之㈣部分修正及在職A規格⑴中所定義之吓以外 22 201012157 的新IE,以便適應於下文摘要說明的有槽偏移Tfc施行方 式。 DRP IE :根據參考文件[2],DRP控制攔位中目前被保 留的位元M3與bl4在DRPIE中被提議用來表示該通道的 TFC偏移,如圖13中所示。圖13(a)中的格式13〇1所示的 係修正型DRPIE。圖13(b)中的格式1302所示的係DRpiE 1301的DRP控制欄位。圖13(C)中的表格13〇3所示的係具 有該通道之TFC偏移的DRP控制欄位13〇2的位元bl3與 bl4的數值的對應關係。於此範例中可以看出,數值「〇」 表示TFC偏移0’數值「1」對應於TFC偏移1,而數值「2」 對應於TFC偏移2。 PCA可利用性IE :根據參考文件[2],PCA可利用性IE 中解釋欄位中的兩個保留位元(b2至bl)被提議用來表示該 通道的TFC偏移。如圖14中所示,假如需要該通道之額外 TFC偏移的PCA可利用性,則便會提議發送額外的pc a可 利用性IE。圖14(a)中的格式1401所示的係修正型PCA可 利用性IE。圖14(b)中的格式1402所示的係格式1401(換言 之,該PCA可利用性IE)的解釋欄位。圖14(c)中的表格1403 所示的係具有該通道之TFC偏移的解釋欄位1402的兩個保 留位元b2至b 1的數值的對應關係。於此範例中可以看 出,數值「〇」表示TFC偏移〇,數值「1」對應於TFC偏 移1,而數值「2」對應於TFC偏移2。 撤回請求IE :根據參考文件[2],撤回請求IE中的兩個 保留位元(b5至b4)被提議用來表示該通道的TFC偏移。圖 23 201012157 15(a)所不的係修正型撤回請求IE 15〇1的格式。圖i5(b)中 的格式1502更詳細地顯示撤回請求IE 1501的撤回請求控 制攔位。圖15(c)中的表格丨5〇3所示的係具有該通道之 偏移的撤回請求控制攔位1502的保留位元^至!^的數值 的對應關係。於此範例中可以看出,數值「Q」表示TFC偏 移〇 ’數值「!」對應於TFC偏移1,而數值「2」對應於 TFC偏移2。 "Figure 9(C) shows the numerical correspondence of the field type field 904 and the various types of block types in an embodiment. As can be seen from the figure, the value "Q" in the field type block 904 can be used to indicate the type of the spot of the information element, and the value "1" in the position type field 9G4 can be used to indicate the column of the control element. The value "2" in the bit type 'block type field 9〇4 can be used to indicate the block type of the element, and the value "3" in the block type block 904 can be used to indicate the column of the data element. The bit type, and the values "4" to "15" in the field type field 9〇4 may be retained. As can be seen from Figure 8, the specific application control block contains the ASIE's data block, which is followed by the first-specific application identifier and the latter (type information element) and a single field type. Section. ^ Continued information set. In the embodiment, in the information paste of the asie, the capital (four) (four) is encapsulated and all the command elements are sealed. There is no restriction on the order of the column types in the asie. _ There is no restriction on the 1E to be sent by ASIE (the IE sent by ASIE 4 20 201012157 may be in the description _ mentioned ^ or in the ECMA specification (1) catcher). In the embodiment, m a is placed in front of each of the information sets associated with the earlier one of the field types. =H> (a) is the format of the control element 1001 of the specific application control frame in the embodiment. Controlling the eight-path element 1001 may include: a control element information field 1002 having one or two bytes, a control element length bar with one byte, and a control block (four) block. ❹ The format of the control element information block (10) 2 shown in Fig. 10 (8). In the embodiment, the control element information space 1 〇〇 2 bit 〇 to the bit 3 is used to indicate the control element type. In one embodiment, the secret element 4 to bit 7/bit 15 secrets of the control element information interception are retained. Depending on the type of control element (which is proposed in the control element information byte 1002), it can be inferred that the length sheds 3 and/or the payload block 1004 follow the control requirements. Control element information byte 1002 〇 Φ Figure 11 (4) shows the format of the command element 1101 of the specific application command frame in the embodiment. The command element 11〇1 may contain a command element information shed with one or two bytes, a command block length 1103 with one byte, and a command payload field ιι〇4 . Figure n (b) is not the format of the command element information field 1 102. In one embodiment, the bit 〇 to bit 3 n 〇 5 of the command element information block 11 系 2 is used to indicate the command element type. In one embodiment, bit 4 to bit 7/bit 15 1106 of the command element information field 1102 are reserved. Depending on the type of the command element (which is proposed in the command element information byte 21 201012157 1102), it can be inferred that the length field 11G3 and / or the payload column. Bit 1104 疋 Compliance # command requirements The command element information element 1102 in 11〇1 is not in the format of the query information field 12〇1 according to an embodiment. In an embodiment, the specific application request information field 605 in the specific application probe IE_ shown in FIG. 6 may include a group of consecutively arranged query information stops 1201. In one embodiment, the query information field 1201 may include a query control block 12〇2 having a byte. In one embodiment, query information bar 1201 may include a query length field 12〇3 having a byte to indicate the length of a particular query material 12G4. In an embodiment, the query status block 1 20 1 may include a particular query material 1 204. * Figure 12(b) shows the format of the Query Control Byteset 1202 in accordance with an embodiment. In the embodiment, the bit 〇 of the query control block (10) 2 is used to represent the query type /m. In one embodiment, bit 4 through bit 61 of the query control unit 12G2 are retained. In one embodiment, 'bit 7 1207' is used to indicate whether a particular query data 12〇4 is included in the query information field 12()1. For example, if the query controls the bit center and the bit 7 i 2 〇 7 in 1202 is set to 〇, then the length of the query information block = 12G1 is (10) bytes (excluding the query length byte and Specific query data). The use of specific application data related to trough offset TFC in ~2·2 has been proposed in reference document m in the current part of (4) as defined in ECMA Specification (1) and inferior as defined in Incumbent A Specification (1) 22 201012157 The new IE is adapted to the slotted offset Tfc implementation described in the summary below. DRP IE: According to reference [2], the currently reserved bits M3 and bl4 in the DRP Control Intercept are proposed in the DRPIE to indicate the TFC offset of the channel, as shown in FIG. The modified DRPIE shown in the format 13〇1 in Fig. 13(a). The DRP control field of the DRpiE 1301 shown in the format 1302 in Fig. 13(b). The correspondence shown in Table 13〇3 in Fig. 13(C) has the correspondence relationship between the values of the bl3 and the bl4 of the DRP control field 13〇2 of the TFC offset of the channel. As can be seen in this example, the value "〇" indicates that the TFC offset 0' value "1" corresponds to the TFC offset 1, and the value "2" corresponds to the TFC offset 2. PCA Availability IE: According to reference [2], two reserved bits (b2 to bl) in the interpretation field in the PCA Availability IE are proposed to represent the TFC offset of the channel. As shown in Figure 14, if PCA availability for additional TFC offsets for that channel is required, then an additional pc a availability IE will be proposed. The modified PCA availability IE shown in the format 1401 in Fig. 14 (a). The interpretation field of the format 1401 (in other words, the PCA Availability IE) shown in the format 1402 in Fig. 14(b). Table 1403 in Fig. 14(c) shows the correspondence of the values of the two reserved bits b2 to b1 of the interpretation field 1402 of the TFC offset of the channel. As can be seen in this example, the value "〇" indicates the TFC offset 〇, the value "1" corresponds to the TFC offset 1, and the value "2" corresponds to the TFC offset 2. Withdrawal Request IE: According to reference [2], the two reserved bits (b5 to b4) in the Withdrawal Request IE are proposed to represent the TFC offset of the channel. Figure 23 201012157 15 (a) is the format of the modified withdrawal request IE 15〇1. The format 1502 in Figure i5(b) shows the withdrawal request control block of the withdrawal request IE 1501 in more detail. The table 丨5〇3 in Fig. 15(c) shows the reserved bit of the revocation request control block 1502 having the offset of the channel to! The correspondence of the values of ^. As can be seen in this example, the value "Q" indicates that the TFC offset ’ 'value "!" corresponds to the TFC offset 1, and the value "2" corresponds to the TFC offset 2. "

MAC能力IE :在[2]中提議利用ECMA標準[q中提出 的現有MAC可利用性IE中的其中一個保留位元來表示該 裝置能夠在有槽偏移TFC中進行傳送。 HY靶力IE .根據參考文件[2],其中一個保留位元組 被提議用於TFC偏移控制。如圖16中所示,在抓偏移 控制搁位中,纟中—個位元係被用來表示某-裝置能夠在 該通道的TFC偏移中進行傳送。® 16(a)所示的係修正型 PHY能力IE 16〇1的格式。圖i6(b)所示的係該㈣能力比 1601的TFC偏移控制欄位16〇2。MAC Capability IE: It is proposed in [2] to utilize one of the reserved bits in the existing MAC Availability IE proposed in the ECMA standard [q] to indicate that the device can transmit in the slotted offset TFC. HY Target Force IE. According to reference [2], one of the reserved bytes is proposed for TFC offset control. As shown in Figure 16, in the grab offset control shelf, a bit is used to indicate that a device can transmit in the TFC offset of the channel. ® 16(a) shows the format of the modified PHY capability IE 16〇1. Figure 14 (b) shows the (4) capability ratio 1601 of the TFC offset control field 16〇2.

增強型DRP可利用性IE :參考文件[2]提出一種如 1”所示的㈣,用以表示一裝置對目前超訊框中目前 題利用情形的看法(以便適應於該通道之加偏移的 用)。囷Π⑷所*的係該新提出IE,也就是,該增強型D] 可利用性IE,的格式17〇1。圖17(B)所示的係該增強型D] ^用性!E17(H的解釋攔位⑽。圖17(e)中的表格17 不的係具有該通道之TFC偏移的解釋攔位以们的位 1至位元G的數值的對應關係。於此範例中可以看出,數 24 201012157 「0」表不TFC偏移0,數值「丨」對應於TFC偏移工,而 數值「2」對應於TFC偏移2。 根據一實施例,能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中且來自 (和ASIE有關的)相同賣方的每一個裝置皆可能於其信標中 包含ASIE。於一實施例中,每一個裝置可能還在其 之中包含和其信標群中所有其它裝置有關的資訊,以判斷 所有該些裝置是否來自相同賣方且是否能夠操作在有槽偏 移TFC之中。於一實施例中,特定應用控制攔位7〇〇中的 其中一個保留位元(參見圖7)可以用來表示某一裝置的信標 群中的所有裝置是否來自相同賣方且是否能夠操作在有槽 偏移TFC之中。於一實施例中,和有槽偏移TFC之使用有 關的所有IE(包含已提出的修正型IE及新提出的增強型 DRP可利用性IE)均包含在該ASIE之中。於一實施例中, 隱式保留協商(implicit reservati〇n neg〇tiati〇n)係經由該等 ASIE來進行。圖8中顯示出如何將IE封包成ASIE的一部 分。在下文中會保持逆兼容性利用ASIE來提供藉以實施以 有槽偏移TFC為基礎之頻寬保留的方法。 保留協定fDRP、 在提出利用有槽偏移TFC和ASIE來施行DRP之前, 下文係提供根據一實施例的DRP保留政策。 於—實施例中,一裝置係一直嘗試搜尋或保留能夠於 該處利用内定偏移(内定通道沒有任何偏移,舉例來說,TFC 偏移〇)來進行傳送與接收的MAS。假如沒有足夠頻寬可以 利用’則該裝置便可能會嘗試保留利用所使用之通道的後 25 201012157 面較高偏移(舉例來說,如圖2中所示的TFC偏移1或TFc 偏移2)來進行傳送與接收的MAS。於一實施例中,一裝置 會一直保留和其所需要頻寬的最小可能(換言之,具有最小 可能編號的TFC偏移)與可利用偏移有關的MAS,而假如所 有MAS皆保留給一給定偏移,則便只有該裝置會嘗試為相 同通道中的更高偏移保留MAS。於一實施例中,除非Mas 个Ά町對比Enhanced DRP Availability IE: Reference Document [2] proposes a (4) as shown in 1" to indicate the view of a device on the current use of the current superframe (in order to adapt to the offset of the channel) The use of 囷Π(4)* is the newly proposed IE, that is, the format of the enhanced D] exploitability IE, 17〇1. Figure 17(B) shows the enhanced D] ^ Sex! E17 (Interpretation of H (10). Table 17 in Figure 17(e) is not the correspondence between the interpretation of the TFC offset of the channel and the value of their bit 1 to G. As can be seen in this example, the number 24 201012157 "0" indicates that the TFC offset is 0, the value "丨" corresponds to the TFC offset, and the value "2" corresponds to the TFC offset 2. According to an embodiment, it is operable Each device in the slotted offset TFC and from the same vendor (related to the ASIE) may include an ASIE in its beacon. In an embodiment, each device may also include and Information about all other devices in the beacon group to determine whether all of the devices are from the same vendor and are operational The slot is offset by the TFC. In one embodiment, one of the specific application control blocks 7 (see Figure 7) can be used to indicate whether all devices in the beacon group of a device are from The same vendor and whether it can operate in the slotted offset TFC. In one embodiment, all IEs associated with the use of slot offset TFC (including the proposed modified IE and the newly proposed enhanced DRP are available) The IE is included in the ASIE. In an embodiment, implicit reservation (implicit reservati〇n neg〇tiati〇n) is performed via the ASIEs. Figure 8 shows how to encapsulate IE into Part of the ASIE. In the following, the reverse compatibility will be used to provide a method for implementing bandwidth reservation based on slotted offset TFC by using ASIE. Reservation protocol fDRP, before proposing the use of slotted offset TFC and ASIE to implement DRP The following provides a DRP reservation policy in accordance with an embodiment. In an embodiment, a device is always attempting to search or reserve to utilize a default offset there (the default channel does not have any offset, for example, a TFC offset) ) to transmit and receive the MAS. If there is not enough bandwidth available, then the device may try to retain the higher offset of the last 25 201012157 surface using the channel used (for example, as shown in Figure 2) The TFC offset 1 or the TFc offset 2) is used to transmit and receive the MAS. In one embodiment, a device will always retain the minimum possible bandwidth and (in other words, the TFC offset with the smallest possible number). ) MAS associated with available offsets, and if all MASs are reserved for a given offset, then only the device will attempt to reserve MAS for higher offsets in the same channel. In an embodiment, unless there is a comparison between Mas and Machimachi

已經針對配合内定偏移的使用被保留 内定偏移更高的偏移的使用來協商任何MASAny MAS has been negotiated for use with a fixed offset that is reserved for a higher offset offset

於一實施例中,一裝置會在其信標中發送一 AWE。於 一實施例中,和有槽偏移TFC之使用有關的所有ie(包含已 提出的修正型IE及本發明所提出的新IE)均包含在該 之中於實施例中,隱式保留協商係在能夠操作在有槽 偏移TFC之中且來自相同賣方的裝置之間經由綱來進 行。於-實施例中,假如針對利用内定偏移的购進行保 留協商,則除了纖之外,還會發送如ε〇μα 文細)中所提㈣DRPIE。於—實施例中In one embodiment, a device will send an AWE in its beacon. In an embodiment, all the IEs associated with the use of the slot offset TFC (including the proposed modified IE and the new IE proposed by the present invention) are included in the embodiment, implicit reservation negotiation This is done via a device between devices that are capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC and from the same vendor. In the embodiment, if the reservation negotiation is performed for the purchase using the default offset, the DRPIE mentioned in the ε〇μα text is transmitted in addition to the fiber. In the embodiment

ECMA規格[丨]中所提出的相 t和 在有槽偏"FC之中的裝置只要其夠操二 夠操作在有槽偏移TFc之中的另j相鄰裤爱35方且忐 :=;=::=:的任⑼ r-DRP^MAS#^;;7;:::rr 實施例中’為達此目的,能夠操之中。於- 裝置會針對其每—個相 #偏移TFC之中的 鄰裝置保存或儲存前面六個(或是大 26 201012157 於或小於六的任何其它固定數值,通常為任意數)超訊框之 BPST數值的歷史資料。在上文中假設能夠利用有槽偏移 TFC且來自相同#方的每_個|置若遵循在職a規格⑴ 中所提出的同步化演算法的話其便會在每一個超訊框中將 其则T移動-非零數值(奈秒)。在上文中還假設假如一能 夠利用有槽偏移TFC的裂置係其信標群中最慢裝置(已經在 6個超訊框中沒有移動其BPST)的相鄰裝置,則該裝置將會 ❹利用在m之中提出的同步化技術來與該最慢裝置同步化。 在下文中,「職A[1]指定裝置」及「根據此隐⑴規格 的裝置」等詞語皆表示根據參考文件⑴所建構的裝置,其 可此不具有任何額外特點,例如有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通 訊能力。於一實施例中,能夠操作在有槽偏移時間/頻率部 分通訊之中的裝置亦可能且古会土 J』觚具有參考文件[1]中所規定的特 點。 於f施例中,隱式協商係藉由在信標訊框中傳送該 Φ修正型DRPIEl3〇1(如® 13(a)中所示)作為該細的-部 t來進行。於—實施例中,如在之中提及的支援有槽 移TFC且來自相同賣方的裝置便會解析來自相鄰裝置的 所有ASIE中目標/擁有者裝置位址攔位匹配該裝置的位址The phase t and the device in the slotted bias "FC proposed in the ECMA specification [丨] are only enough to operate in the grooved offset TFc. =;=::=: Any(9) r-DRP^MAS#^;;7;:::rr In the embodiment, 'for this purpose, it can be operated. The device will save or store the first six (or any other fixed value, usually any number of 26 201012157 or less than six) for each of its neighbors in the TFC offset TFC. Historical data of BPST values. It is assumed in the above that it is possible to use the slotted offset TFC and each of the __s from the same #方, if it follows the synchronization algorithm proposed in the in-service specification (1), it will be in each superframe. T move - non-zero value (nanoseconds). It is also assumed above that if a splicing with slotted offset TFC is used as the slowest device in its beacon group (the BPST has not moved its BPST in 6 hyperframes), the device will The synchronization technique proposed in m is used to synchronize with the slowest device. In the following, the words "the job A [1] designation device" and the "device according to the implicit (1) specification" all indicate the device constructed according to the reference document (1), which may have no additional features, such as slot offset time. / Frequency part communication capability. In one embodiment, a device that is capable of operating in a slotted offset/frequency portion communication is also possible and has the features specified in reference [1]. In the f-example, the implicit negotiation is performed by transmitting the Φ-corrected DRPIEl3〇1 (as shown in ® 13(a)) as the thin-part t in the beacon frame. In the embodiment, the device supporting the slotted TFC and the same vendor as mentioned therein parses the target/owner device address block in all ASIEs from the neighboring device to match the address of the device.

或該裝置已經為其啟動多播保留的多播位址的修正型DRP *於《實施例* ’其餘的保留協商程序皆* ECMA規格 ㈣㈣㈣’不同的係,使用ASIE中的修正型DRP IE取代DRP IE。於一杳竑如ώOr the modified DRP of the multicast address reserved for the multicast reservation for the device * in the "Examples *" remaining reservation negotiation procedures are all * ECMA specifications (four) (four) (four) 'different departments, using the modified DRP IE in ASIE DRP IE. Yu Yiru

、 '’能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC 之中且來自(和ASIE有關的)相同賣方的裝置皆會依賴於用 27 201012157 於DRP協商/保留的asie及槽可利用性公佈。於—實施例 中,假如MAS保留的協商和内定偏移有關,則除了經由 ASIE來進行隱式協商之外,還會同步利用ecma規格[i] 中所提出的程序來進行隱式協商。 於一實施例中,在其ASIE中發送一修正型DRp IE作 為其信標訊框的一部分的裝置(擁有者或目標)同樣會在下 面的條件下於其信標訊框中發送DRp IE(和ASIE分開)。對 於利用内定偏移(沒有偏移,也就是,TFC偏移〇)來試圖或 建立或影響保留(内定偏移的保留的處置方式和根據ECMA © 規格[1]的ECMA指定裝置所試圖進行或協商的保留雷同) 的裝置的ASIE之中所包含的每一個修正型drp ιέ來說, 均會在其信標訊框中以和ASIE分開的方式發送一對應的 DRPIE(其為該修正型DRpiE的副本,除了 DRpiE中的保 留位元之外)。 鑒於上述,根據一實施例,利用DRp IE的内定TFC偏 移的衝突解決方式可能和ECMA規格[丨]中所提出者相同。 假如裝置能夠利用上面的衝突解決協定來判定其保留,則 〇 該裝置便可繼績發送該修正型DRPIE作為其ASIE的一部 分並且發送一用以判定保留的分離的DRPIE。於一實施例 中,假如該裝置無法利用上面的衝突解決協定來判定其保 留,則該裝置便會在下一個超訊框令停止發送該修正型DRP IE作為ASIE的一部分及和有衝突的MAS位元映圖有關的 分開的drPIE,或是從利用八81£與DRpiE的協商中移除 有衝突的MAS。 28 201012157 於一實施例中,假如一能夠操作在有槽偏移TFc之中 且來自(和ASIE有關的)相同賣方的裝置發現到在内定偏移 中沒有足夠頻寬可以使用,則該裝置便可能會嘗試利用次 -個較高偏移來保留槽。假如利用内定偏移已經保留被探 尋的所有MAS,則除非該裝置目前已經利用内定偏移保留 MAS ’否則,該裝置便可能不會在其信標中以和該asie分 開的方式發送和該等被探尋的MAS有關的任何DRpiE。於Devices that are capable of operating in the slotted offset TFC and from the same vendor (related to ASIE) will rely on the asie and slot availability announcements negotiated/reserved with DRP on 27 201012157. In the embodiment, if the negotiation of the MAS reservation is related to the default offset, in addition to the implicit negotiation via the ASIE, the procedure proposed in the ecma specification [i] is synchronously used for implicit negotiation. In an embodiment, the device (owner or target) that sends a modified DRp IE as part of its beacon frame in its ASIE will also send the DRp IE in its beacon frame under the following conditions ( Separate from ASIE). For attempting to establish or influence retention with a default offset (no offset, ie, TFC offset 〇) (the default offset is handled by the ECMA-specific device [1] or by the ECMA designation device Each modified drp ιέ included in the ASIE of the device of the negotiated reservation will send a corresponding DRPIE in its beacon frame separately from the ASIE (which is the modified DRpiE) Copy, except for reserved bits in DRpiE). In view of the above, according to an embodiment, the conflict resolution method using the default TFC offset of the DRp IE may be the same as that proposed in the ECMA specification [丨]. If the device is able to determine its reservation using the conflict resolution protocol above, then the device can continue to transmit the modified DRPIE as part of its ASIE and send a separate DRPIE to determine the reservation. In one embodiment, if the device is unable to determine the reservation using the conflict resolution protocol above, the device will stop transmitting the modified DRP IE as part of the ASIE and the conflicting MAS bit in the next hyperframe. The separate drPIE associated with the metamap, or the conflicting MAS is removed from the negotiation with the DRpiE. 28 201012157 In an embodiment, if a device capable of operating in the slot offset TFc and from the same vendor (related to the ASIE) finds that there is insufficient bandwidth available in the internal offset, then the device You may try to use a second-higher offset to preserve the slot. If all of the MASs being sought have been retained with the default offset, then the device may not transmit in its beacon in a separate manner from the asie unless the device has now retained the MAS 'with a default offset. Any DRpiE related to the MAS being searched. to

此情況中,根據一實施例,對正在針對高於内定偏移的偏 移來協商上面MAS的裝置來說’假如該|置目前並未利用 内定偏移保留該些MAS,只要在其信標中發送該修正型 讀IE作為其ASIE的-部分便已^夠。在不失—般性的 情況下’當目標裝置與擁有者裝置㈣進行協商時, 可以假設它們兩者皆能夠操作在有槽偏移TFc之中且來自 相同的賣方。所以,ECMA[1]指定裝置雖然看*見更 的保留協商,但是’内定偏移的保留協商卻係利用DRp正 和先前提出的修正型DRP IE兩者來實行,從而使得 ECMA[1]指定裝置對其一目了然。在上文中,「看不見」一 詞暗喻著ECMA[1]指定裝置不需要解析與解碼所有鳩e。 於一實施例中’假如擁有者或目#在前一個(或 mMaxLostBeacons)超訊框之中沒有收到任何DRp用以判定 該擁有者與目標已經同意配合高於㈣偏移的偏移來使用 的任何MAS的保留,則該擁有者及/或目標便可能會分別喪 失已獲得同意的保留(其係利用較高的偏移),並且會在下一 個超訊框t停止於ASIE中發輕何修正型贿,而且 29 201012157 相關的MAS可能*會在目前或下—個超訊框中被使用。該- 擁有者及目標可能接著會嘗試針對此等可利用的mas以内 定偏移來重新協商保留(DrPie與ASIE同樣會被分開發送) 或者可能會制内定偏移協商由使用中的MAS所組成的子 集,用以配合更高偏移來使用(DRp IE與asie不會被分開 發送)。 換言之,於一實施例中,假如被探索要進行保留(利用 較高偏移)的MAS會構成-由内定偏移已使用的mas所組 成的子集,對該擁有者及目標來說,利用ASIE來限定它們❹ 的協商便已足夠’不必利用任何DRp IE。於一實施例中, 假如利用内定偏移原先未被保留的MAS利用内定偏移被探 索要進行保留,則嘗試或協商單獨針對該些mas進行行/ 列保留的擁有者及目標便皆會發送DRp IE。於此情況中, 在被發送的耐IE^ MAS位元映圖中,並不會列出在此 保留協商期間已因内定偏移而處於使用中@ mas。於—實 施例中’和上面行/列保留有關的衝突可以E c M A規格(參考 文件Π])中的衝突解決協定所定義的方式來處置。 〇 再者,於一實施例中’假如ECMA[1]指定裝置保留— MAS ’則該MAS便不會被利用任何更高偏移或岐偏 任何其它裝置使用。於一實施例中,利用更高的偏移僅 保留被來自相同賣方之能夠操作在有槽偏_ tfc之中 置保留用以配合内定偏移來使用的MAS。 於實施例中,旎夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中的裴 可能會在其ASIE之中發送修正型撤回請求㈣為信襟= 30 201012157 框的一部分。於一實施例中,能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之 中的裝置不會於其位於ASIE之外的信標中發送正在被高於 内定偏移之偏移使用的MAS的撤回請求。於一實施例中, 被發送作為該ASIE的一部分的修正型撤回請求IE可能係 針對任何偏移。於一實施例中,假如該修正型撤回請求係 針對使用内定偏移的一組MAS(其包含至少一 MAS),則一 額外的撤回請求也會針對使用内定偏移的此等MAS在位於 ASIE之外的信標中被送出。於一實施例中,假如任何裝置 撤回被内定偏移保留的MAS,則利用較高偏移來保留該些 MAS的所有裝置便同樣會失去該些MAS。於一實施例中, 假如某一裝置或是能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中的任何其 它裝置利用内定偏移保留某一 MAS,則便可以允許該裝置 利用高於内定偏移的偏移繼續保留該MAS。 於一實施例中,DRP可利用性會依照下面方式被公佈。 希望公佈其對可利用的MAS的看法的裝置會在其ASIE(參 見圖8)之中發送增強型DRP可利用性1701(參見圖17)。於 一實施例中,假如需要公佈一通道中三個偏移的可利用 性,則便可能會有三個增強型DRP可利用性IE在ASIE之 中被發送。再者,該裝置可能還會在其信標之中發送ECMA 規格(參考文件[1 ])中所定義的DRP可利用性。於一實施例 中,利用任何偏移被任何裝置保留的MAS(在作為ASIE之 一部分的修正型DRP IE中的保留狀態會被設為1)或是被 ECMA[1]指定裝置保留的MAS均不會於在信標中被發送的 DRP可利用性IE(和ASIE分開)之中被公佈為可以利用。這 31 201012157In this case, according to an embodiment, for a device that is negotiating the above MAS for an offset above a default offset, 'if the |set does not currently retain the MASs with a default offset, as long as it is in its beacon It is sufficient to send the modified read IE as part of its ASIE. Without loss of generality, when the target device negotiates with the owner device (4), it can be assumed that both of them can operate in the slotted offset TFc and come from the same vendor. Therefore, the ECMA[1] designation device sees a more reserved negotiation, but the reservation negotiation of the default offset is implemented by both the DRp positive and the previously proposed modified DRP IE, so that the ECMA[1] designation device It is clear at a glance. In the above, the word "invisible" implies that the ECMA [1] designation device does not need to parse and decode all 鸠e. In an embodiment, 'if the owner or the destination # does not receive any DRp in the previous (or mMaxLostBeacons) hyperframe to determine that the owner and the target have agreed to cooperate with the offset above the (four) offset. Any reservation of MAS, the owner and/or target may lose the reserved reservation (which uses a higher offset), and will stop at the next superframe t in the ASIE Modified bribes, and 29 201012157 related MAS may * be used in the current or next - super box. The owner and the target may then attempt to renegotiate the reservation with a default offset for such available mas (DrPie and ASIE will also be sent separately) or may make a default offset negotiation consisting of the MAS in use. The subset is used to match the higher offset (DRp IE and asie will not be sent separately). In other words, in an embodiment, if the MAS that is explored to be retained (using a higher offset) will constitute a subset of the mas that have been used by the default offset, for the owner and the target, The negotiation of ASIE to define them is sufficient 'do not have to use any DRp IE. In an embodiment, if the MAS that is not reserved by the default offset is explored to be reserved by using the default offset, then the owner and the target that respectively perform row/column reservation for the mas are sent or negotiated. DRp IE. In this case, in the transmitted IE^ MAS bit map, it is not listed that @ mas is in use due to the default offset during this reservation negotiation. The conflicts associated with the above row/column reservation in the embodiment may be handled in the manner defined by the conflict resolution agreement in the Ec M A specification (reference file). Further, in an embodiment, the MAS will not be used by any other device if any ECMA [1] specifies that the device retains - MAS '. In one embodiment, the higher offset is used to retain only the MAS that is used by the same vendor to operate in the slotted offset _tfc for use with the default offset. In an embodiment, 裴 that is operating in the slotted offset TFC may send a modified revocation request (4) among its ASIEs as part of the frame of the letter 30 30 201012157. In one embodiment, a device capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC will not send a revocation request for a MAS being used by an offset above a default offset in its beacon outside the ASIE. In an embodiment, the modified withdrawal request IE sent as part of the ASIE may be for any offset. In an embodiment, if the modified revocation request is for a set of MASs that use a default offset (which includes at least one MAS), then an additional revocation request will also be for the MAS at the ASIE using the default offset. Beyond beacons are sent out. In one embodiment, if any device withdraws the MAS reserved by the default offset, then all devices that retain the MAS with a higher offset will also lose the MAS. In one embodiment, if a device or any other device capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC retains a certain MAS with a default offset, then the device can be allowed to utilize an offset above the default offset. Continue to keep the MAS. In one embodiment, DRP availability is published in the following manner. Devices wishing to publish their views on the available MAS will send enhanced DRP availability 1701 in their ASIE (see Figure 8) (see Figure 17). In one embodiment, if the availability of three offsets in a channel needs to be published, then three enhanced DRP availability IEs may be sent in the ASIE. Furthermore, the device may also send DRP availability as defined in the ECMA specification (reference file [1]) among its beacons. In an embodiment, the MAS reserved by any device with any offset (the retention state in the modified DRP IE as part of the ASIE will be set to 1) or the MAS reserved by the ECMA[1] designated device It is not published as available in the DRP Availability IE (separate from ASIE) that is sent in the beacon. This 31 201012157

係要讓任何卿ΑΠ]指定褒置知道膽的觀 利用性。 ’ J 換5之,能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中且來自相同# 方的裝置可能會遵守在ECMA⑴規格之中所提出之和内定 偏移的DRP有關的規則並且利用asie使用一隱藏的程序 (ECMA[1]指定裝置看不見)來協商比内定偏移更高 的 MAS。 於一實施例中,假如信標群中的所有裝置皆能夠在有 槽::TFC之中進行傳送而且假設它們利用⑶之中的同步❹ 化廣算法保持同步’則每一個裝置的虛擬時脈便會同步於 最慢相鄰裝置的物理時脈。 、 圖18(a)所示的係一擴大型信標群18〇〇的範例其係由 裝置A1至A5 1851至1855以及B1至B3 1856至1858所 組成。在本文中’ m的擴大型信標群係指所有其相 鄰裝置的信標群的合併結果。某一裝置的信標群則係指由 所有其相鄰裝置所組成的集合。假設裝置A1至A5係來自 相同的賣方且能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中。假設裝置Q 為ECMA[1]指定裝置。於一實施例中,饭如裝置a〗 至A5或B1至B3中任一者係最慢的裝置,且假如裝置ai 至A5的虛擬時脈可藉由本發明中提出的同步化演算法同步 於該最慢裝置而裝置以至B3則可藉由ECMA[1]規格中提 出的同步化演算法同步於該最慢裝置,那麼裝置八丨至A5 至1855便可以使用有槽偏移TFC。雖然所有的裝置 至A5 1 85 1至1 85 5可依照時脈週期位準進行同步化;不 32 201012157 過,裝置B1至B3 1856至1 858卻可能不會依照此等位準 同步於其它裝置。所以,於一實施例中,當任何該等裝置 A1至A5 18M至1855嘗試保留和—队河八⑴指定裝置(舉 例來說,B1至B3 1856至1858)的保留MAS共享邊界的 MAS時,該裝置(A1至A5 1851至18555中的任何一者)便 不會使用和一 ECMAH]指定裝置的保留MAS共享邊界的 MAS來進行資料傳送(以便允許於其保留内存在護衛時間) 或者不會於此等MAS的起點或終點處(於此處會共享上面 的邊界)使用少數固定數量的OSTD,因為該ECMA[1]指定 裝置可能並不會保持精確的MAS邊界。於一實施例中,該 固定數量可能係事先決定的。 於一實施例中,MAS的隱式保留可以利用特定應用控 制訊框/命令訊框中的控制要件/命令要件在能夠操作在有 槽偏移TFC之令且來自相同賣方的裝置之間來實行。本說 明中所提出的修正型IE以及本說明中所建議的增強型DRp 可利用性IE可以配合特定應用控制訊框/命令訊框來使 用。-旦保留結果建立之後,便會經由信標來隱式判定保 留結果。已可以遵循先前所提㈣DRp保留政策用以進行 顯式協商(expncit negotiati〇n)。於一實施例中,在完成顯式 協商之後用於在ASIE之中發送修正型DRp ie且在asie 之外發送DRP IE的規則均和上面針對隱式協商所提出的規 則雷同。 上面所提出之方法的替代作法係,假如某一裝置的擴 大型信標群中的所有裝置皆能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之甲 33 201012157 且來自(和ASIE有關的)相同賣方,則該裝置便 ^ >> Μ利用先 刚已解釋之以ASIE為基礎的DRP協商及有槽偏移tfc來 運作。假如該裝置的擴大型信標群中的其中— _裝置係並 非操作在有槽偏移TFC之中或是並非來自相同賣方的裝 置’則該裝置便可以使用ecma[i]規格中所定盖以 〜我的正常 DRP。上面關於該裝置的擴大型信標群中的所有裝置是否來 自相同賣方的資訊可以利用先前提出的特定應用控制欄位 700(參見圖7)來傳播。It is necessary to let any of the designated devices know the use of the gallbladder. 'J for 5, a device that can operate in a slotted offset TFC and from the same # side may follow the rules related to the DRP proposed by the ECMA(1) specification and use the default offset and use a hidden The program (ECMA [1] specifies that the device is not visible) to negotiate a MAS that is higher than the default offset. In one embodiment, if all devices in the beacon group are capable of transmitting in slotted :: TFC and assuming they are synchronized using the synchronization algorithm in (3), then the virtual clock of each device It will be synchronized to the physical clock of the slowest neighbor. An example of an enlarged beacon group 18A shown in Fig. 18(a) is composed of devices A1 to A5 1851 to 1855 and B1 to B3 1856 to 1858. In this context, the expanded beacon group of 'm' refers to the combined result of the beacon groups of all its neighboring devices. A beacon group of a device refers to a collection of all its neighbors. It is assumed that the devices A1 to A5 are from the same vendor and are capable of operating in the slotted offset TFC. It is assumed that device Q is a device designated by ECMA [1]. In one embodiment, the rice is as slow as any of the devices a to A5 or B1 to B3, and if the virtual clocks of the devices ai to A5 can be synchronized by the synchronization algorithm proposed in the present invention The slowest device and the device up to B3 can be synchronized to the slowest device by the synchronization algorithm proposed in the ECMA [1] specification, and the slotted offset TFC can be used by the device gossip to A5 to 1855. Although all devices to A5 1 85 1 to 1 85 5 can be synchronized according to the clock cycle level; not 32 201012157, devices B1 to B3 1856 to 1 858 may not be synchronized to other devices according to these levels. . Therefore, in an embodiment, when any of the devices A1 to A5 18M to 1855 attempt to reserve a MAS that reserves the boundary of the MAS shared device (for example, B1 to B3 1856 to 1858), The device (any one of A1 to A5 1851 to 18555) does not use the MAS that shares the boundary with the reserved MAS of an ECMAH] device for data transfer (so that it is allowed to retain memory in guard time) or not A small number of fixed numbers of OSTDs are used at the beginning or end of the MAS (where the upper boundary is shared) because the ECMA[1] specifies that the device may not maintain an accurate MAS boundary. In an embodiment, the fixed number may be determined in advance. In an embodiment, the implicit reservation of the MAS can be implemented by using a control element/command element of the specific application control frame/command frame between devices capable of operating in the slotted offset TFC and from the same vendor. . The Modified IE proposed in this specification and the Enhanced DRp Availability IE suggested in this description can be used with a specific application control frame/command frame. Once the retention result is established, the retention result is implicitly determined via the beacon. It has been possible to follow the previously mentioned (iv) DRp retention policy for explicit negotiation (expncit negotiati〇n). In one embodiment, the rules for transmitting the modified DRp ie in the ASIE and the DRP IE outside the asie after the explicit negotiation is completed are identical to the rules proposed above for the implicit negotiation. An alternative to the method proposed above, if all devices in the extended beacon group of a device are capable of operating on the slotted offset TFC A 33 201012157 and from the same seller (related to ASIE), then The device will operate with the ASIE-based DRP negotiation and the slotted offset tfc as explained earlier. If the device in the extended beacon group of the device is not operating in a slotted offset TFC or is not from the same vendor's device, then the device can use the cover specified in the ecma[i] specification. ~ My normal DRP. Whether or not all of the devices in the extended beacon group of the device from the same vendor can be propagated using the previously proposed specific application control field 700 (see Figure 7).

圖18(b)所示的係根據一實施例用於在無線電通訊系統 中請求無線電資源的方法。於一實施例中,該方法可能包 含步驟1801 1以產生與編瑪包含複數個有槽時間/頻率= 刀的無線電資源的U求訊息。於—實施例中,該第 一請求訊息可能包含—根據可由第—類型無線電通訊終端 裝置及第二類型無、線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之第—通訊協 f格❹編碼的資訊要件,纟中,該第-類型的無線電通 凡、、端裝置會被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊 而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊,而該第:類型的無 線電通訊終端裝置則會被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部 分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。於—實施例中,該 :法可能進一步包含步驟刪,假如該第一請求訊息所請 赵的無線電資源無法利用’該方法便會產生與編碼包含複 自有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的無線電資源的一第二請求訊 ;實施例中’該第二請求訊息可能包含一根據可由 類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之第二通訊協定格式 34 201012157 被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。於一實施例中,該無線電通 訊系統係—特定無線電通訊系統,而該第一類型的無線電 通訊終端裝置與該第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置則均為 特定無線電通訊終端裝置。Figure 18 (b) shows a method for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system in accordance with an embodiment. In one embodiment, the method may include step 1801 1 to generate a U-message message with a radio resource containing a plurality of slotted time/frequency = knives. In an embodiment, the first request message may include an information element encoded according to a first communication protocol that can be decoded by the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of non-wireless communication terminal device, The first type of radio, the end device, is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication, and the first type of radio communication The terminal device is then configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In the embodiment, the method may further include the step of deleting, if the radio resource of the first request message is not available, the method may generate a radio with the offset time/frequency portion including the complex slot offset. A second request message of the resource; in the embodiment, the second request message may include a specific application information element encoded according to a second protocol format 34 201012157 that can be decoded by the type of radio communication terminal device. In one embodiment, the radio communication system is a specific radio communication system, and the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device are both specific radio communication terminal devices.

在本文中,舉例來說,包含複數個有槽時間/頻率部分 的無線電資源可能係一跳頻樣式(僅有TFC,沒有有槽偏移 TFC)於實施例中,該跳頻樣式在時間中可能不會排列 對齊(或同步於)任何0STD或MAS邊界的起點。在本文中, 有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊可能係指可以使用有槽偏移 TFC(TFC偏移〇及/或TFC的更高偏移,例如TFC偏移ι 與TFC偏移2)的通訊。舉例來說,在參考文件⑺中所提出 的裝置便可以使用有槽時間/頻率部分及有槽偏移時間, 率部分兩者來進行通訊,從而提高網路總流量。在本文辛, 於一實施例中,假如在某一能夠使用有槽偏移時間/頻率部 分通訊的裝置在其能夠依照時脈週期位準進行同步化的鄰 近區域中有至少一其它裝置,則該裝置可能會一直將其内 定偏移(偏移0)視為和有槽時間/頻率部分相同。換言之,即 使係由能夠使用有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊的裝置進行保 留用以保留有槽時間/頻率部分,只要在該裝置能夠依昭時 脈週期位準進行同步化的鄰近區域中有至少一其它裝置、, 該裝置可能仍舊會使用TFC偏移_定偏移),猶如該TFC 偏移〇係此等保留MAS期間的有槽時間/頻率部分。益法使 用有槽偏#抓的任㈣置料能會將被另-裝置所使用 的啊偏移G僅視為-有料間/頻率部分通訊。 35 201012157 在本文中,於一實施例中,用於在特定無線電通訊系-統中請求無、線電資源、的方法可能包含產生與編碼無線電資 源的-第-請求訊息。於-實施例中,該等無線電資源可 能包含複數個有槽時間/頻率部分。舉例來說,針對圖2中 所示的TFC偏移〇來說,該等有槽偏移時間/頻率部分係由 灰色框體261至266來表示。舉例來說,該第一訊息可能 會發送用以保留TFC偏移0(沒有任何偏移的有槽τρ^,換 言之,内定TFC偏移)的無線電資源。於一實施例中,該第 一請求訊息可包含一資訊要件。舉例來說,該第一請求訊 〇 息可能會在一信標槽期間被發送。該資訊要件可能會根據 第一通訊協定格式(舉例來說,在ECMAD]標準中所提出的 資訊要件的格式)被編碼。舉例來說,該資訊要件可以被下 面兩種裝置解碼:根據ECMA[1]標準的特定無線電通訊終 細裝置(第一類型裝置),其可能僅使用有槽時間/頻率部 分;以及能夠使用有槽偏移時間/頻率部分(也就是,任何的 TFC偏移,舉例來說,TFC偏移〇、TFC偏移1、以及TFC 偏移2,參見圖2)的特定無線電通訊終端裝置(第二類型裝 ❹ 置.)。舉例來說’該方法可能進一步包含假如該第一請求訊 息所請求的TFC偏移〇無法利用則產生與編碼無線電資源 的一第二請求訊息’舉例來說,更高的TFC偏移。舉例來 說’該第二請求訊息可能會在一信標槽期間被發送。於一 實施例中,該第二請求訊息可能包含一特定應用資訊要件 (ASIE)。舉例來說,該ASIE可能具有如圖8中所示的格式。 於一實施例中,該ASIE可能會根據第二通訊協定格式(舉 36 201012157 例來說,如圖8中所示的格式)被編碼,其可被第二類型的 特定無線電通訊終端裝置解碼。 ;實施例中’該#時間/頻率部分包括時間頻率碼 (TFC)。TFC的圖例可以參見圖2。 ❹ φ 於—實施例中,該第一請求訊息包含-用以請求一媒 2取槽(MAS)的資訊要件,該媒體存取槽⑽as)包含和内 偏移時間/頻率部分㈣偏移q則的複數個有槽 _頻:部分。舉例來說,每—個MM可能包含 。每一個OSTD皆可銥斟確认 + 了月b對應於一時間部分,例如,圖 2中所不的時間部分2〇2至2〇7中的任一者。進一圖 其還會根據TFC偏蒋〇兔灰 & ° 八m 偏移0為母-個時間部分指派-頻率邛 刀。舉例來說,根據TFC偏移 率邦八“ 揭移0為時間部分202指派的頻 刀係由頻帶211所表示者。士 ^ „ /jts ^ 也就疋,根據TFC偏移〇, ⑽間/頻率部分係由對應於該 多〇 241來表示。 1刀2U2的灰色框體 於一實施例中,該方法係由_ 置來實行。 特疋無線電通訊終端裝 於一實施例中,該方法可能 送該第進—步包含下面步驟:傳 /第一睛求訊息給另一特定盔 傳 —牿仝纪站+ …、深電通訊終端裝置,診足 特疋無線電通訊終端裝置位於和哼 μ另 裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群之中。“疋…、線電通訊終端 線電特定無線電通訊群可能係一特定-^•逋》Μ5軚群。舉例來說,在 弋無 的所有裝詈可问特定無線電通訊群內 裝置可以共享相同的信標週期起始時間。内 37 201012157 於一實施例中,該方法可能進一步包含步驟i 8〇2 :假 -如該第一清求訊息所明求的無線電資源可以利用則保留該 等被請求的無線電資源。舉例來說’保留該等被請求的無 線電資源可藉由於信標週期期間發送用以宣告保留某一特 定MAS的資訊要件來達成。 於一實施例中,該方法可能進一步包含步驟18〇4:假 如該第一請求訊息所請求的無線電資源無法利用則產生、 編碼、以及傳送一資源保留訊息給另一特定無線電通訊終 端裝置’該另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置位於和該特定無 _ 線電通訊終端裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群之中。舉例來 說,當内疋TFC偏移無法利用’則可以保留更高的tfc偏 移(TFC偏移1或TFC偏移2)。此保留可藉由在信標週期期 間發送參考圖8所提出的ASIE用以請求及/或宣告為更高 的TFC偏移保留某一 MAS的使用來達成。就此方面來說, 只有當某一能夠使用有槽偏移TFC的裝置已經保留某一資 源以配合TFC偏移〇來使用時,該資源方能被保留以配合 更高TFC偏移(TFC偏移1或TFC偏移2)來使用。 〇 於一實施例中,該資源保留訊息可能包含一會根據第 一通訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。舉例來說, 該格式可能如圖8中所示。 圖18(c)所示的係根據一實施例用於在無線電通訊系統 決疋可用的無線電資源的方法。於一實施例中,該方法可 能包含步驟1810 :判斷包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分 的需要的無線電資源是否可以利用。於一實施例中,該方 38 201012157 法可能進—步包含步驟i8i2:假如該等需要的無線電資源 無法利用,利用該等無線電資源的一請求訊息來判斷包含 同複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是 】可乂利用,其中,該請求訊息包含一要根據可由某—類 ^ '東電通汛終知裝置來解碼之通訊協定格式被編碼的特In this context, for example, a radio resource containing a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions may be a hopping pattern (TFC only, no slot offset TFC). In an embodiment, the hopping pattern is in time. The starting point of any 0STD or MAS boundary may not be aligned (or synchronized). In this context, slotted offset time/frequency portion communication may refer to the use of slotted offset TFC (TFC offset 〇 and / or higher offset of TFC, such as TFC offset ι and TFC offset 2) communication. For example, the device proposed in reference (7) can use both the slotted time/frequency portion and the slotted offset time and rate portion to communicate, thereby increasing the total network traffic. In this embodiment, if, in an embodiment, a device capable of communicating using the slotted offset time/frequency portion has at least one other device in its vicinity capable of synchronizing according to the clock cycle level, then The device may always treat its default offset (offset 0) as the same as the slotted time/frequency portion. In other words, even if it is reserved by a device capable of communicating using the slotted offset time/frequency portion to retain the slotted time/frequency portion, as long as the device is capable of synchronizing in the vicinity of the clock cycle level At least one other device, the device may still use TFC offset_set offset, as if the TFC offset is the slotted time/frequency portion of the reserved MAS. The use of the slotted partial #4 picking can use the offset G used by the other device as only the inter-material/frequency part communication. 35 201012157 In this document, in one embodiment, a method for requesting no-line resources in a particular radio system may include generating a -first request message with a coded radio resource. In an embodiment, the radio resources may include a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions. For example, for the TFC offset 所示 shown in Fig. 2, the slotted offset time/frequency portions are represented by gray frames 261 to 266. For example, the first message may be sent to reserve a radio resource with a TFC offset of 0 (the slot τρ^ without any offset, in other words, the default TFC offset). In an embodiment, the first request message may include an information element. For example, the first request message may be sent during a beacon slot. The information element may be encoded according to the format of the information element proposed in the first protocol format (for example, in the ECMAD) standard. For example, the information element can be decoded by two devices: a specific radio communication terminal device (first type device) according to the ECMA [1] standard, which may only use the slotted time/frequency portion; Slot offset time/frequency portion (ie, any TFC offset, for example, TFC offset 〇, TFC offset 1, and TFC offset 2, see Figure 2) for a particular radio communication terminal device (second Type mounting.). For example, the method may further include generating a second request message with the encoded radio resource, e.g., a higher TFC offset, if the TFC offset requested by the first request message is unavailable. For example, the second request message may be sent during a beacon slot. In an embodiment, the second request message may include a specific application information element (ASIE). For example, the ASIE may have a format as shown in FIG. In one embodiment, the ASIE may be encoded according to a second protocol format (for example, in the format shown in Figure 8 2010), which may be decoded by a particular type of radio communication terminal device of the second type. In the embodiment, the #time/frequency portion includes a time frequency code (TFC). The legend for the TFC can be seen in Figure 2. φ φ In the embodiment, the first request message includes - an information element for requesting a media 2 slot (MAS), the media access slot (10) as) includes an offset time/frequency portion (four) offset q Then a plurality of slots have _frequency: part. For example, every MM may contain . Each OSTD can confirm that + month b corresponds to a time portion, for example, any of the time portions 2〇2 to 2〇7 in Fig. 2. Further, it will assign a frequency-cutter according to the TFC partial 〇 灰 ash & ° 8 m offset 0 for the mother-time part. For example, according to the TFC offset rate, the frequency knives assigned by the time segment 202 are represented by the frequency band 211. 士^ „ /jts ^ 疋, according to the TFC offset 〇, (10) / The frequency portion is represented by corresponding to the multi-turn 241. A gray frame of 1 knife 2U2 In one embodiment, the method is implemented by _. The special radio communication terminal is installed in an embodiment, and the method may send the first step including the following steps: transmitting/first-seeking information to another specific helmet--the same-station station+..., the deep communication terminal The device, the radio communication terminal device is located in the same specific radio communication group as the device. “疋..., line communication terminal line specific radio communication group may be a specific-^•逋”Μ5軚 group. For example, all devices installed in the radio communication group can share the same Beacon period start time. Within 37 201012157 In an embodiment, the method may further comprise the step i 8〇2: false - if the radio resource as claimed by the first request message is available, the requested one is retained Radio resources. For example, 'reserving such requested radio resources may be achieved by transmitting an information element during the beacon period to announce the reservation of a particular MAS. In an embodiment, the method may further include steps 18〇4: generating, encoding, and transmitting a resource reservation message to another specific radio communication terminal device if the radio resource requested by the first request message is unavailable, and the other specific radio communication terminal device is located at the specific _ The line communication terminal device is in the same specific radio communication group. For example, when the internal TFC offset cannot be utilized, then To preserve a higher tfc offset (TFC offset 1 or TFC offset 2). This reservation can be requested and/or declared as a higher TFC by transmitting the ASIE proposed with reference to FIG. 8 during the beacon period. The offset is preserved by the use of a certain MAS. In this respect, the resource can only be reserved if a device capable of using the slotted offset TFC has reserved a resource to use with the TFC offset. Used in conjunction with a higher TFC offset (TFC offset 1 or TFC offset 2). In one embodiment, the resource reservation message may contain a specific application information element that will be encoded according to the first protocol format. For example, the format may be as shown in Figure 8. Figure 18(c) illustrates a method for determining available radio resources in a radio communication system in accordance with an embodiment. In an embodiment, the method Included may be a step 1810 of determining whether a required radio resource comprising a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions is available. In an embodiment, the party 38 201012157 may further include step i8i2: if such required Radio resources Unavailable, using a request message of the radio resources to determine that a radio resource containing the same plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions is available, wherein the request message includes a ^ 'Dongtongtong's final known device to decode the protocol format encoded by the special

疋應用資訊要件,該類型無線電通訊終端裝置會被配置成 I以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊和有槽偏移時間/頻率部 分通訊。於-實施例中,該無線電通訊系統係—特定無線 :通訊系統’而該具有被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部 分通訊和有槽㉟料間/頻率部分通訊之類型心線電通訊 終端裝置則係一特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 換言之,舉例來說,該方法可能包含下面步驟:判斷 具有一特殊偏移的TFC是否可以利用。也就是,—裝置會 先試圖保留具有—特殊偏移# TFC。於-實施例中,該方 法可能進-步包含下面步驟:假如該具有特殊偏移的需、 的TFC無法利用則判斷更高的TFC偏移是否可以利用。节 判斷作業可藉由該等無線電資源料求訊息來進行。舉^ 來說,料求訊息可能會在—信標槽㈣被發送。舉例來 說,該請求訊息可能包含一特定應用資訊要件(asi幻其可 根據某一通訊協定格式(例如,圖8中所提出的A幻E的格 式)被編碼。舉例來說,該ASIE可被某—類型的特定無線 電通訊終端裝置解碼,該類型特定無線電通訊終端裝置會疋 Application information elements, this type of radio communication terminal device will be configured to provide slotted time/frequency partial communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In an embodiment, the radio communication system is a specific wireless: communication system and the type of heartline communication is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted 35 inter-frequency/frequency portion communication The terminal device is a specific radio communication terminal device. In other words, for example, the method may include the step of determining if a TFC having a particular offset is available. That is, the device will first attempt to reserve the TFP with a special offset # TFC. In an embodiment, the method may further comprise the step of determining if a higher TFC offset is available if the TFC with the special offset is not available. The judging operation can be performed by requesting information from the radio resources. For ^, the message may be sent in the beacon slot (four). For example, the request message may contain a specific application information element (which may be encoded according to a communication protocol format (for example, the format of A Magic E proposed in Figure 8). For example, the ASIE may be Decoded by a certain type of specific radio communication terminal device, the type of specific radio communication terminal device will

被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊和有槽偏移 /頻率部分通訊β ’ B 39 201012157 於實施例中,判斷需要的I線Φ咨% θ π 包括刹m β > …、踝電身源是否可以利用 匕括利用該等無線電資源的請求 f ^ θ ^ Λ心來判斷需要的無線電 頁源疋否可以利用,其中,該 其會根播宜一、s』力— 訊心包括一資訊要件, 甘* 逋訊協定格式可被 系一類型的無線電通訊終端裝 狄她壯“ 衷置解碼’該類型無線電通訊 終4裝置會被配置成用以僅提供 τ 7 抆供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而 不心供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。於—實施例中,續且 有被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供: ❿ 槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊之類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係 一特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 於一實施例中,該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間 碼。 於-實施例中’用於判斷包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻 率部分的需要的無線電資源是否可以利用的請求訊息包含 一用以請求包括複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分之媒體存取 槽的特定應用資訊要件。該ASIE的格式圖解在圖8中。 於一實施例中,該方法可由一特定無線電通訊終端裝❹ 置來實行。 < 於一實施例中,該方法可能進一步包含下面步驟:傳 送該請求訊息給另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另—特 疋無線電通訊終端裝置位於和該特定無線電通訊終端聚置 相同的特定無線電通訊群之中。 於一實施例中’該特定無線電通訊群可能係一特定無 線電通訊信標群。 40 201012157 如兮貫施例中,該方法可能進一步包含步驟⑻卜假 的:二:息:請求之包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分 、^ ”、、電資源可以利用,便保留該等需要的無線電資 源(要注意的#,盔沐桢田古秘 戈幻热線電貝 無法使用有槽偏移TFC的任何裝置可能會 將被H置使料TFC偏移〇僅視為有槽時間/頻率部分 通訊)°舉例來說’假如該内定TFC偏移有可用的MM,則 藉由於信標週期期間發送用以宣告保留該内^肌偏移之 Ο 該等MAS的資訊要件便可以保留該内定偏移的 MAS。 於一實施例中,該方法可能進__步包含步冑i8i3:假 如包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的該等需要的無線電 資源無法利用,便產生、編碼、以及傳送—資源保留訊息 給另-特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另一特定無線電通訊 終端裝置位於和該特定無線電通訊終端裝置相同的特定無 線電通訊群之中。舉例來說,假如某一裝置發現該内定tfc ❹偏移沒有任何可利用的MAS,則該裝置便可能會請求保留 -更高TFC偏移的MAS。該裝置會發送”求訊息給和可 以使用有槽偏移TFC進行通訊的裝置相同類型的另一裝 置。該裝置可以藉由一資源保留訊息來進_步保留該更高 TFC偏移的MAS。 於一實施例中,該資源保留訊息包含—特定應用資訊 要件,其會根據第二通訊協定格式被編碼。舉例來說,該 第二通訊協定格式可能係如圖8中所示的格式。 圖18(d)所示的係一實施例中用於在無線電通訊系統中 41 201012157 請求無線電資源的無線電通訊終端裝置183〇。於一實施例 中’該無線電通訊終端裝置183〇包括一第 和一第一編竭器丨832,它們會被配置成用以甚斗淑 匕1 ] I被配置成用以產生與編碼包 〇 ❹ =複數個有槽時間/頻率部分的無線電資源的第一請求訊 心。於-實施例中’該第一請求訊息包含一根據可由第一 類型無線電通訊終端裝置及第二類型無線電通訊終端裝置 來解碼之第一通訊協定格式被編碼的資訊要件,其中,該 第一類型的無線電通訊終端裝置會被配置成用以僅提供有 槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通 訊而該第一類型的無線電通訊終端裝置則會被配置成用 以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分 通λ。於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置^請可能進 步包3帛一產生g 1833和一第二編碼器1834,它們會 被配置成用以在該第-請求訊息所請求的無線電資源無法 利用時產生與編碼包含複數個有槽偏移時…頻率部分的無 線電資源的第二請求訊息。於一實施例中,該第二請求訊 息包含一根據可由第二類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之 第二通訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。於—實施 例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置咖係—用於在—特定益線 電通訊系統之中請求無線電資源的特定無線電通訊終端裝 置’其中’該第一類型的無線電通訊終端裝置與該第二類 型的無線電通訊終端裝置皆為特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 於-實施例中,該等時間/頻率部分可㉟包含時間 碼。 42 201012157 於一實施例_,該第一請求訊息包 複數個有槽時間/頻率部分之媒俨在敌μ 用印求包括 宏古一 媒體存取槽的資訊要件,其内 疋有槽時間/頻率部分偏移或τ 丹a /頻率部分。 ㈣戈TFC偏移〇會被視為有槽時間 實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置ι謂可能進— 步匕3 —第一傳送器1835,其 丹I被配置成用以傳送該第— =訊…給另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另 鲁 '線電通訊終端裝置位於和該特定無線電通訊終端裝置相同 的特定無線電通訊群之中。 ;實施例中該特定無線電通訊群係—特定無線 通訊信標群。 於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裳置i謂可能進— 步包含一保留電路1836,其會被配置成用以在該第一請求 讯息所請求的無線電資源可以利用時保留該等被請求的無 線電資源。It is configured to provide slotted time/frequency partial communication and slotted offset/frequency partial communication β 'B 39 201012157. In an embodiment, the determined I line Φ % % θ π includes the brake m β > ..., Whether the source of the electric power can use the request f ^ θ ^ to use the radio resources to determine whether the required radio page source can be used, wherein it will be able to use the power, the signal Including an information element, the Ganxun protocol format can be installed by a type of radio communication terminal. The "radio communication terminal 4 device" will be configured to provide only τ 7 抆 slotted The time/frequency portion communication is not intended for slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In the embodiment, it is continually configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing: ❿ slot offset A radio communication terminal device of the type of time/frequency portion communication is a specific radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the time/frequency portions may include a time code. In the embodiment, 'for judging inclusion The request message for whether the plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions of the required radio resources are available includes a specific application information element for requesting a media access slot including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions. The format is illustrated in Figure 8. In one embodiment, the method can be implemented by a particular radio communication terminal device. < In one embodiment, the method can further include the step of transmitting the request message to another a particular radio communication terminal device located in the same specific radio communication group as the particular radio communication terminal. In one embodiment, the particular radio communication group may be a specific radio Communication Beacon Group. 40 201012157 In the case of the application, the method may further include the step (8): the second: the interest: the request includes a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency parts, ^", and the electrical resources may Use, you will retain the radio resources you need (pay attention to #, 头盔沐桢田古秘戈幻热线电贝无Any device that uses a slot offset TFC may shift the H TFC offset to only the slotted time/frequency portion of the communication.) For example, 'If the default TFC offset has MM available, then The MAS of the default offset can be retained by the information element sent by the MAS during the beacon period to announce the retention of the internal muscle shift. In an embodiment, the method may include step i8i3: generating, encoding, and transmitting - resource reservation if the required radio resources including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions are unavailable The message is sent to another specific radio communication terminal device which is located in the same specific radio communication group as the particular radio communication terminal device. For example, if a device finds that the default tfc ❹ offset does not have any available MAS, then the device may request to reserve a MAS with a higher TFC offset. The device will send a "message to another device of the same type as the device that can communicate using the slotted offset TFC. The device can reserve the MAS with the higher TFC offset by a resource reservation message. In one embodiment, the resource reservation message includes a specific application information element that is encoded according to a second protocol format. For example, the second protocol format may be in the format shown in FIG. 18(d) shows a radio communication terminal device 183 for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system 41 201012157. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 183 includes a first and a first First executor 丨 832, which will be configured to use the first request message to generate a radio resource with a coded packet = a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions In the embodiment, the first request message includes a first protocol format that can be decoded according to the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device. An encoded information element, wherein the first type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication and the first type of The radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion pass λ. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device may be progressively packaged. Generating g 1833 and a second encoder 1834, which are configured to generate radio resources corresponding to the frequency portion when encoding the plurality of slotted offsets when the radio resource requested by the first request message is unavailable a second request message. In an embodiment, the second request message includes a specific application information element encoded according to a second protocol format that can be decoded by the second type of radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the Radio communication terminal device - a specific radio communication terminal for requesting radio resources in a specific line communication system The first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device are both specific radio communication terminal devices. In an embodiment, the time/frequency portions 35 may include a time code. 201012157 In an embodiment, the first request message includes a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions of the media, and the information element including the macro-one media access slot is printed in the enemy, and the slot time/frequency portion is included therein. Offset or τ 丹 a / frequency part. (d) 戈TFC offset 〇 will be regarded as slotted time in the embodiment, the radio communication terminal device ι means possible - step 匕 3 - first transmitter 1835, its Dan I It is configured to transmit the first message to another specific radio communication terminal device located in the same specific radio communication group as the specific radio communication terminal device. In the embodiment, the specific radio communication group - a specific wireless communication beacon group. In one embodiment, the radio communication terminal is set to include a reservation circuit 1836 that is configured to retain the requested radio resource when the first request message is available. Radio resources.

於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置1830可能進一 步包3帛二產生器1837、一第三編碼器mg、以及一第 二傳送器1839,它們會被配置成用以在該第一請求訊息所 請求的無線電資源無法利用時產生、編碼、以及傳送一資 源保留訊息給另-特定無線電通訊終端裝i,該另一特定 ‘…線電通訊終端裝置位於和該無線電通訊終端裝置1 相 同的無線電通訊群之中。 於一實施例中,第一產生器1831、第二產生器1833、 以及第二產生盗丨837可能係相同的產生器。於一實施例 43 201012157 中’第-編碼器购、第二編碼器1834、以及第三編碼器 刪可能係相同的編碼器。於—實施財,第—傳送器顧 以及第二傳送器1839可能係相同的傳送器。 於一實施例中,該資源保留訊息包含一會根據第二通 訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。 圖18⑷所示的係在—實施例中用於判斷_無線電通訊 系統中的可利用無線電資源的無線電通訊終端裝置侧。 於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置i請可能包含一第 -判斷電路184卜用以判斷包含複數個有槽時間/頻率部分 的需要的無線電資源是否可以利用。於一實施例中,該無 線電通訊終端裝置1840可能進-步包含-第二判斷電路 1 842其會破配置成用以在該等需要的無線電資源無法利 用時利用該等無線電資源的一請求訊息來判斷包含複數個 有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是否可以利 用’其中,該請求訊息包含一要根據可由某種類型無線電 通訊終端裝置來解碼之通訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資 訊要件’其中’該類型的無線電通訊終端裝置會被配置成 用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部 分通訊。於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置184〇係一 用於判斷-特定無線電通訊系統中的可利用無線電資源的 特定無線電通訊終端裝置’其中,該具有被配置成用以提 供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊 類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係一特定無線電通訊=端^ 置。 44 201012157 於一實施例中’該第一判斷電路丨841與該第二判斷電 路1 842可能係相同的判斷電路。 於一實施例中,該第一判斷電路1841會被配置成用以 利用該等無線電資源的一請求訊息來判斷需要的無線電資 源是否可以利用,其中,該請求訊息包含一要根據可由某 種類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之通訊協定格式被編碼 的資訊要件’其中,該類型的無線電通訊終端裝置會被配 ❹ ❹ 置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊,而不會提供有槽 偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。於—實施例中,該具有被配置成 用Μ僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間 頻率部分通訊之類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係一特定益線 電通訊終端裝置。 " 碼。於一實施例中,該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間/頻率 率邱t一實施例中,用於判斷包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻 率邛分的需要的無線電資源是 —用,ν咬七4 α 疋洛'Γ以利用的請求訊息包含 用U包括複數個有槽偏 槽的特錢用資訊要件。 科^之媒體存取 於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端 步包含-第-傳送器1843,其會被 G可錢一 斷包含複數個有槽偏移時間 用以將該用以判 疋否可以利料請求訊騎送 I、線電資源 裝置,該另一特定無線電通訊終端線電通訊終端 電通訊終端裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群之 ^亥特定無線 45 201012157 於一實施例中,該特定無線電通訊群可能係一特定無 線電通訊信標群。 於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置184〇可能進一 步包含一保留電路1 844,其會被配置成用以在該用以判斷 包含複數個有槽時間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是否玎 以利用的請求訊息所請求的無線電資源可以利用時保留該 等需要的無線電資源。 於一實施例中,該無線電通訊終端裝置丨84〇可能進一 步包含一產生器1845、一編碼器1846、以及一第二傳送器 ® 1847,它們會被配置成用以在該等需要的無線電資源無法 利用時產生、編碼、以及傳送一資源保留訊息給另一特定 無線電通訊終端裝置,該另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置位 於和該特定無線電通訊終端裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群 之中。 於一實施例中,第一傳送器1843以及第二傳送器1847 可能係相同的傳送器。 於一實施例中,該資源保留訊息包含一會根據第二通 m 訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。 通道存版(pr/u 優先化通道存取(PCA)在ECMA[1]標準之中係被用來 為一用於傳送的裝置提供對媒體的差異化分散式内容存 取。 於一實施例中,既有PCA計數回退(back off)模組與協 定(如WiMedia/ECMA[l]規格的規定)的三種獨立與平行施 46 201012157 订方式可以平行地使用,以便利用pCA來使用有槽偏移 TFC。 於實施例中,會針對通道中的每一個TFC偏移提供 十數回退α十數器(有二個獨立模組,每一個皆和工] 規格中的PCA所使用者雷同;參見圖丨9)。當某一裝置有封 包要發送且感測到該通道中的所有TFc偏移皆忙碌時,該 裝置便會召喚和ECMA[1]規格中的pCA所使用者雷同的計 φ 數回退機制。只要一 TFC偏移仍在使用中或是忙碌中,那 麼該TFC偏移的計數回退計數器便會被凍結;而當該通道 的該TFC偏移被感測到為閒置時,那麼該計數回退計數器 便會被遞減。當該等三個計數回退計數器中任一者到達零 夺便會利用對應於該到達零之計數回退計數器的TFC偏 移來傳送該封包。所以,當對應該通道中三個TFC偏移的 計數回退計數器中其中一者到達零時,該封包便會立刻被 傳送要注意的係,相較於僅使用單一内定通道(沒有任何 ❹ TFC偏移)的情況,封包在存取該等TFC偏移中其中一者時 的延遲會較小。視情況,每一個TFC偏移皆能夠適應於在 ECMA[1]標準令所規定的多種存取類目(AccessIn an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 1830 may further include a second generator 1837, a third encoder mg, and a second transmitter 1839, which are configured to be used in the first request message. When the requested radio resource is unavailable, a resource reservation message is generated, encoded, and transmitted to another specific radio communication terminal, and the other specific '...line communication terminal device is located in the same radio as the radio communication terminal device 1 Among the communication groups. In an embodiment, the first generator 1831, the second generator 1833, and the second spawning 837 may be the same generator. In an embodiment 43 201012157, the 'first encoder, the second encoder 1834, and the third encoder may be the same encoder. In the implementation, the first transmitter and the second transmitter 1839 may be the same transmitter. In one embodiment, the resource reservation message includes a specific application information element that is encoded according to the second communication protocol format. The radio communication terminal device side for judging the available radio resources in the radio communication system is shown in Fig. 18 (4). In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device i may include a first-decision circuit 184 for determining whether the required radio resources including the plurality of slotted time/frequency portions are available. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 1840 may further include - the second judging circuit 1 842 may be configured to utilize a request message for the radio resources when the required radio resources are unavailable. Determining whether a desired radio resource including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions is available. wherein the request message includes a specific application to be encoded according to a protocol format that can be decoded by a type of radio communication terminal device. The information element 'where' the type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In one embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 184 is a specific radio communication terminal device for determining available radio resources in a particular radio communication system, wherein the device is configured to provide slotted time/ The frequency communication part and the slotted time/frequency part of the communication type of the radio communication terminal device are a specific radio communication = terminal. 44 201012157 In an embodiment, the first determining circuit 841 and the second determining circuit 1 842 may be the same determining circuit. In an embodiment, the first determining circuit 1841 is configured to use a request message of the radio resources to determine whether a required radio resource is available, wherein the request message includes a certain type according to a certain type. The communication protocol format to be decoded by the radio communication terminal device to encode the information element', wherein the type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted Offset time/frequency part communication. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device having a type configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slot offset time frequency portion communication is a specific benefit line communication terminal device. " code. In an embodiment, the time/frequency portions may include a time/frequency ratio. In an embodiment, the radio resource for determining the number of slotted offset/frequency splits is used. The request message for biting seven 4 α 疋 Γ ' Γ 利用 包含 包含 包含 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求 请求Media access in an embodiment, the radio communication terminal step includes a -th transmitter 1843, which will be included by G to include a plurality of slotted offset times for determining whether to determine The requesting information can be sent to the I, the line resource device, the other specific radio communication terminal, the line communication terminal, the same specific radio communication group, the specific radio group 45 201012157, in an embodiment, the specific A radio communication group may be a specific radio communication beacon group. In one embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 184 may further include a reservation circuit 1 844 that is configured to determine whether the radio resource including the plurality of slotted time/frequency portions is needed. The radio resources requested by the utilized request message can be utilized to retain the required radio resources. In one embodiment, the radio communication terminal device 丨84〇 may further include a generator 1845, an encoder 1846, and a second transmitter® 1847 that are configured to be used in the required radio resources. When not available, a resource reservation message is generated, encoded, and transmitted to another particular radio communication terminal device that is located in the same particular radio communication group as the particular radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the first transmitter 1843 and the second transmitter 1847 may be the same transmitter. In one embodiment, the resource reservation message includes a specific application information element that is encoded according to the second communication protocol format. Channel Preservation (pr/u Prioritized Channel Access (PCA) is used in the ECMA [1] standard to provide differentiated decentralized content access to media for a device for transmission. In the PCA counting back off module and the agreement (such as the WiMedia/ECMA [l] specification) three independent and parallel application 46 201012157 binding method can be used in parallel, in order to use pCA to use slotted Offset TFC. In the embodiment, ten reciprocal alpha decators are provided for each TFC offset in the channel (there are two independent modules, each of which works in the same way). See Figure 9). When a device has a packet to send and senses that all TFc offsets in the channel are busy, the device will summon the same as the pCA user in the ECMA [1] specification. Counting the φ number back-off mechanism. As long as a TFC offset is still in use or busy, the count back-off counter of the TFC offset is frozen; and when the TFC offset of the channel is sensed as When idle, then the count back counter will be decremented. When these three counts Any one of the back-off counters arriving at zero will transmit the packet with a TFC offset corresponding to the count back-off counter that reaches zero. Therefore, when counting the three TFC offsets in the channel, the count back-off counter When one of them reaches zero, the packet will be transmitted immediately. Compared to the case where only a single internal channel (without any ❹ TFC offset) is used, the packet accesses one of the TFC offsets. The delay will be smaller. Depending on the situation, each TFC offset can be adapted to multiple access categories specified in the ECMA [1] standard order (Access).

Category, AC)。每一個TFC偏移不同的存取類目可能會有不同的仲裁 訊框間間隔(Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing,AIFS)和最大 計數回退計數值。 應該注意的係,該裝置可能會針對每一種AC的每一個 TFC偏移配備一計數器時脈,而且該裝置可能會使用計數 器時脈首先到達零的TFC偏移來開始傳送一 AC的〇FDm 47 201012157 符號。此實施例亦圖解在圖19中,其中,該裝置針對該通 道的每一個TFC偏移(TFC偏移〇、TFC偏移!、以及TFC 偏移2)配備一計數器時脈。從圖19中可以看出,在「中度 忙碌(Medium busy)」狀態後面,在套用一計數器時脈之前 會有一段仲裁訊框間間隔(AIFS)週期。該通道的每一個TFC 偏移都會有一對應的計數器時脈。在圖19的圖例中,tfc 偏移2的計數器時脈率先到達零。因此,該裝置會選擇tfc 偏移2來傳送第一緩衝封包中的_ 〇FDM符號。還可以看 出,對應於TFC偏移1的計數器時脈第二個到達零。因此, 該裝置可以使用TFC偏移!來傳送下一個緩衝封包的 OFDM符號。此實施例的效果係,資料封包在存取該通道(任 一個TFC偏移)時的延遲會較小。Category, AC). Each access class with a different TFC offset may have different Arbitration Inter-Frame Spacing (AIFS) and maximum count backoff count values. It should be noted that the device may be equipped with a counter clock for each TFC offset of each AC, and the device may start transmitting an AC 〇FDm 47 using the counter clock first to reach a zero TFC offset. 201012157 symbol. This embodiment is also illustrated in Figure 19, wherein the apparatus is equipped with a counter clock for each TFC offset (TFC offset 〇, TFC offset !, and TFC offset 2) of the channel. As can be seen from Figure 19, after the "Medium Busy" state, there will be an Arbitration Interframe Interval (AIFS) period before the application of a counter clock. Each TFC offset of the channel will have a corresponding counter clock. In the legend of Fig. 19, the counter clock rate of tfc offset 2 reaches zero first. Therefore, the device will select tfc offset 2 to transmit the _ 〇 FDM symbol in the first buffered packet. It can also be seen that the counter clock corresponding to the TFC offset 1 reaches zero second. Therefore, the device can use TFC offset! To transmit the OFDM symbol of the next buffered packet. The effect of this embodiment is that the delay of the data packet when accessing the channel (any TFC offset) will be small.

於一實施例中,能夠利用有槽偏移TFC來進行傳送的 裝置會在其趟£之中發送修正型pCA可利用性巧作為信 標的-部分。根據-實施例,可能會在該細的其中一修 正型PCA可利用性1£之中公佈某一褒置利用—給定偏移可 用於PCA的槽。多個修正型pCA可利用性可能會被併 入用以在和多冑TFC偏移有關的槽之中公佈裝置的可利用 性。舉例來說,假如已經為偏移"DRp保留_特殊的槽, 那麼,便可以在和ASIE中另外兩個偏移有關的兩個修正型 PCA可利職以中該裝置針對該㈣槽的可利用性。 於-實施财,該裝置還會發送> ecma⑴規格中) =的PCA可利用性1£。僅有未利用TFC的以偏 有任何偏移)為DRP保留且未被此财⑴指定裝置保留< 48 201012157 槽會在PCA可利用性IE之中被公佈為可供PCA利用。藉 由和先前提出的DRP有關的協定,某—槽只要在内定偏移 處沒有先被某一裝置佔用,那麼,該槽便不會在高於該内 定偏移的偏移處被該裝置佔用。於—實施例中,僅有被較In one embodiment, a device capable of transmitting using a slotted offset TFC will send a modified pCA availability as part of the beacon. According to the embodiment, it is possible to announce a certain utilization in the fine one of the corrected PCA availability 1 - a given offset can be used for the slot of the PCA. Multiple modified pCA availability may be incorporated to disclose device availability among slots associated with multiple TFC offsets. For example, if the _special slot has been reserved for the offset "DRp, then the two modified PCAs associated with the other two offsets in the ASIE can work for the device to target the (four) slot. Availability. In the implementation of the money, the device will also send the PCA availability of £1 in the > ecma(1) specification. Only the unused TFCs are biased for DRP and are not reserved by this financial (1) device. < 48 201012157 The slot will be published in the PCA Availability IE for use by the PCA. By virtue of the previously proposed DRP-related agreement, a slot is not occupied by a device at the internal offset, and the slot is not occupied by the device at an offset above the internal offset. . In the embodiment, only the comparison is

低TFC偏移佔用的MAS才可能會在偏移高於零的某一特殊 TFC偏移中被認為具有Pca可利用性。於一實施例中,假 如該裝置的擴大型信標群中的所有裝置皆能夠操作在有槽 偏移TFC之中且來自(和ASIE有關的)相同賣方,則,該^ 置便可以利用先前解釋的增強型PCa來運作。即使某—裝 置的擴大型信標群中的其中一個裝置為非操作在有槽偏移 TFC之中且非來自相同賣方的裝置,該裝置仍會使用 ECMA[1]規格中所定義的正常pcA。上面關於該|置的擴 大型信標群中的所有裝置是否來自相同賣方的資訊可以利 用先前提出的特定應用控制欄位7〇〇(參見圖乃來傳播。 回授有關的特定應用資蚪的用诠 根據目前的WiMedia標準,鏈路回授IE含有關於對一 或多個來源裝置的接收裝置所建議之資料速率及傳送功率 位準的建議改變的資訊。一裝置可能在其信標中包含—鏈 1回授IE,用以在一與特定相鄰裝置相連的鏈路上提供回 授。一接收裝置可以使用該鏈路回授正來建議要讓來源^ 置使用的最佳資料速率,舉例來說,以便提高總流量及/或 降低訊框錯誤率◊該鏈路回授IE中的資料速率會被解釋為 在某—可接受的1K框錯誤率了 ’該來源裝置針對此條疾 鏈路應該使用的最大資料速率。該來源裝置未必要遵守該 49 201012157 建議。-接收裝置可能會藉由於其信標之中併入一鏈路回 授汨來建議要讓來源裝置使用的傳送功率位準變更。一接 從鏈路回授正的袭置未必要改變其傳送功率位準。該接收 裝置可以使用訊號雜訊比、已接收的訊號強度、訊框錯誤 率、或是其它參數來決定要建議給來源裝置的傳送功率。 根據ECMA[1]標#,鍵路回授IE會在每一個超訊框中 被發送-次。不過’通道的同調時間可能會遠小於一超訊 框的持續長度(其為65.536ms;)。A MAS occupied by a low TFC offset may be considered to have Pca availability in a particular TFC offset with an offset above zero. In one embodiment, if all devices in the extended beacon group of the device are capable of operating in the slotted offset TFC and are from the same vendor (related to the ASIE), then the device can utilize the previous Explain the enhanced PCa to operate. Even if one of the extended beacon groups of a certain device is a device that is not operating in a slotted offset TFC and is not from the same vendor, the device will still use the normal pcA as defined in the ECMA [1] specification. . The above information about whether all devices in the extended beacon group from the same seller can use the previously proposed specific application control field 7〇〇 (see Figure to propagate. Recall relevant application-specific resources) According to the current WiMedia standard, the link feedback IE contains information about suggested changes to the data rate and transmission power level suggested by the receiving device of one or more source devices. A device may include in its beacon. - Chain 1 feedback IE for providing feedback on a link to a particular neighbor. A receiving device can use the link to recommend the best data rate for the source to use. In order to increase the total traffic and / or reduce the frame error rate, the data rate in the link feedback IE will be interpreted as an acceptable - 1K box error rate 'The source device for this chain of events The maximum data rate that the road should use. The source device does not have to comply with the recommendation of 2010 201012157. - The receiving device may suggest to have the source by incorporating a link back-up in its beacon. The transmission power level used is changed. It is not necessary to change the transmission power level after receiving the positive feedback from the link. The receiving device can use the signal noise ratio, the received signal strength, the frame error rate, Or other parameters to determine the transmit power to be recommended to the source device. According to ECMA[1]#, the key feedback IE will be sent in each superframe - times. However, the channel's coherence time may be far Less than the duration of a hyperframe (which is 65.536ms;).

參考文件[4]提出使用裝置的命令/控制訊框的新型鍵 路回授策略。參考文件[4]所提出的策略適應於低通道同調 時間(小於-個超訊框持續長度,也就是,65.536ms)且直中 一部分還可用於在傳送器侧進行功率與速率控制。Reference file [4] proposes a new key feedback strategy using the command/control frame of the device. The strategy proposed in reference [4] is adapted to the low channel coherence time (less than - the duration of the hyperframe, that is, 65.536 ms) and the straight part can also be used for power and rate control on the transmitter side.

參考文件[4]提供一種決定資料傳送特徵的方法,其 中’資料會在至少-超訊框中被傳送,其巾,每—個超訊 框皆會被配置成用以傳送複數個訊框,該方法包含:於該 超訊框中發送複數個資料傳送特徵請求訊息給―接收器, 用以向該接收器請求資料傳送特徵資訊,μ,該等資料 傳送特徵請求訊息為命令訊息/控制訊息,·響應於該等資料 、、、特徵吻求efl心於該超訊框中接收複數個資料傳送特徵 響應Λ息,其包含來自該接收器的資料傳送特徵資訊,其 ^ 該等資料傳送特徵響應訊息為命令訊息/控制H從 •亥資料傳送特徵資訊中決定至少一資料傳送特徵。 ’為決定至少一 "S或是至少每 換言之,根據參考文件[4]的一實施例 資料傳送特徵’ 一裝置Α可能會每隔 50 201012157 隔「X」p便在-超訊框内發送一資料傳送特徵請求訊息 給另一裝置B。因為-超訊框的持續長度為約65咖,所以, 裝置A的傳送器可以在-超訊框内發送複數個資料傳送特 徵請求訊息給裝置B的接收器。根據參考文件[4],裝置b 的接收器可能會藉由發送-資料傳送特徵響應訊息給裝置 A以答覆每-個資料傳送特徵請求訊息,彡中,肖:資料傳送 特徵響應訊息包含至少-資料傳送特徵。裝置A可以該資 鲁料傳送特徵響應訊息為基礎來決定該至少一資料傳送特 徵:根據參考文件[4]’該資料傳送特徵請求訊息與該資料 傳送特徵響應訊息均係命令/控制訊框。 根據參考文件[4]的一實施例,裝置a所發送的資料傳 送特徵請求訊息可能還包含資料傳送資訊或是至少一資料 傳送特徵。裝置A與裝置B兩者可能會以至少一資料傳送 特徵請求訊息及/或至少一資料傳送特徵響應訊息為基礎來 決定至少一資料傳送特徵。該資料傳送特徵可能係指和資 e 料傳送的傳送速率或傳送功率有關的資訊,但是並不僅限 於此。該資料傳送特徵可能還包含:鏈路品質指示符(Link Quality Indicator,LQI)或是訊號雜訊比(Signal t〇 N〇iseReference [4] provides a method for determining data transfer characteristics, wherein 'data will be transmitted in at least the hyperframe, and each towel frame will be configured to transmit a plurality of frames. The method includes: transmitting, in the super-frame, a plurality of data transmission feature request messages to a receiver, to request data transmission feature information from the receiver, and the data transmission feature request message is a command message/control message Receiving a plurality of data transmission characteristic response messages in the super-frame, in response to the data, and the feature, the data transmission feature information from the receiver, and the data transmission characteristics The response message is that the command message/control H determines at least one data transfer feature from the data transmission feature information. 'To determine at least one "S or at least in other words, according to an embodiment of the reference document [4] data transfer feature 'a device may be sent every 50 201012157 "X" p in the - super box A data transfer feature request message is sent to another device B. Since the duration of the hyperframe is about 65 babies, the transmitter of device A can send a plurality of data transmission feature request messages to the receiver of device B in the -frame. According to the reference [4], the receiver of device b may send a message-received feature response message to device A to reply to each data transfer feature request message, in which: the data transfer feature response message contains at least - Data transfer feature. The device A may determine the at least one data transmission feature based on the information transmission response message: the data transmission feature request message and the data transmission feature response message are both command/control frames according to the reference file [4]. According to an embodiment of the reference [4], the data transfer feature request message transmitted by the device a may further comprise data transfer information or at least one data transfer feature. Both device A and device B may determine at least one data transfer feature based on at least one data transfer feature request message and/or at least one data transfer feature response message. This data transfer feature may refer to information about the transfer rate or transmit power delivered by the material, but is not limited to this. The data transfer feature may also include: Link Quality Indicator (LQI) or Signal Tone Ratio (Signal t〇 N〇ise)

Ration’ SNR)、正確收到封包的數量、遺失封包的數量、所 收到之有訊框檢查序列(Frame Check Sequence,FCS)錯誤 (沒有任何標頭檢查序列或HCS錯誤)的封包的數量、被傳 送到命令訊框之預定接收者的封包的數量、以及以微秒數 或毫秒數來計算的測量視窗大小。 根據參考文件[4]中的一實施例,該等命令訊息/控制訊 51 201012157 息為命令/控制訊框。根據ECMA[ 1 ]標準,命令/控制訊框係 用於在一通訊裝置群内的通訊裝置之間發送命令資訊/控制 資訊》 根據參考文件[4]中的一實施例,一裝置會在超訊框之 中傳送二或多個訊框(或是多個由二或多個訊框組成的訊框 集)’而且在該裝置傳送每一個由二或多個訊框組成的訊框 集之前(舉例來說,在起點處)’該裝置會先發送至少一資料 傳送特徵請求訊息。換言之,該裝置會為該裝置於該超訊 框中所傳送的每一個訊框集傳送一特徵請求訊息,俾使在 〇 該裝置傳送一特徵請求訊息之後,該裝置會接收一特徵響 應訊息,接著,該裝置會傳送該等個別的訊框集。 根據參考文件[4]的一實施例,該資料傳送特徵請求訊 息會週期性地被發送。根據參考文件[4]的一實施例,一資 料傳送特徵請求訊息會在每一個預設的週期性時間區間期 間被發送至少一次。根據參考文件[4]的一實施例,該傳送 器與該接收器為根據ECMA[1]規格的通訊裝置。根據一實 施例’該傳送器與該接收器為根據IEEE 802.15.3b規格的 © 通訊裝置。 根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,該等資 料傳送特徵請求訊息為媒體存取控制層訊息。根據和參考 文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,該等資料傳送特徵響應 訊息為媒體存取控制層訊息。 根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,資料傳 送可能包含傳送複數個資料封包,而該資料傳送特徵資訊 52 201012157 可旎包含·被接收器正確收到的資料封包的數量或是遺失 的資料封包的數量或是所收到之有FCS錯誤(且沒有任何 HCS錯誤)的資料封包的數量或是接收器在―測量視窗時間 週期中所傳送的資料封包的數量。根據和參考文件[4]之實 施例相符的一實施例,該資料傳送特徵資訊也包含和測量 視窗時間週期有關的資訊。 根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,資料傳 # 送係透過一介於一傳送器與該接收器之間的通訊鏈路來實 施,而該資料傳送特徵資訊為通訊鏈路回授資訊或鏈路品 質資訊。根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例該 資料傳送特徵資訊包含關於該接收器處和該資料傳送有關 的訊號雜訊比的資訊。根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的 一實施例,該資料傳送特徵響應訊息包含用於設定該資料 傳送之傳送功率位準的資訊。根據和參考文件之實施例 相符的實施例’該資料傳送特徵響應訊息包含用於設定 _ 該資料傳送之傳送資料速率的資訊。根據參考文件[4]的一 實施例’ 一資料傳送特徵請求訊息會以非週期性的方式被 發送根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,該等 資料傳送特徵響應訊息包含用於設定該資料傳送之資料速 率的資訊。 根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,該資料 專送特徵資訊包含:關於建議資料速率的資訊、關於建議 專送功率位準變更的資訊、關於被錯誤收到之封包數量的 訊、關於遺失的封包數量的資訊、關於被傳送至命令訊 53 201012157 框之接收者的封包數量的資訊、關於測量視窗的資訊、關 於被正確收到之封包數量的資訊、以及關於通訊鏈路之 SNR/LQI的資訊。Ration' SNR), the number of correctly received packets, the number of lost packets, the number of packets received by the Frame Check Sequence (FCS) error (without any header check sequence or HCS error), The number of packets transmitted to the intended recipient of the command frame, and the size of the measurement window calculated in microseconds or milliseconds. According to an embodiment in the reference [4], the command message/control message 51 201012157 is a command/control frame. According to the ECMA [1] standard, a command/control frame is used to transmit command information/control information between communication devices within a communication device group. According to an embodiment in the reference file [4], a device may be super Two or more frames (or a plurality of frames consisting of two or more frames) are transmitted in the frame, and before the device transmits each frame set consisting of two or more frames (For example, at the starting point) 'The device will first send at least one data transfer feature request message. In other words, the device transmits a feature request message for each frame set transmitted by the device in the frame, so that after the device transmits a feature request message, the device receives a feature response message. The device then transmits the individual sets of frames. According to an embodiment of the reference [4], the material transfer feature request message is periodically transmitted. According to an embodiment of the reference [4], a data transfer feature request message is transmitted at least once during each of the preset periodic time intervals. According to an embodiment of the reference [4], the transmitter and the receiver are communication devices according to the ECMA [1] specification. According to an embodiment, the transmitter and the receiver are © communication devices according to the IEEE 802.15.3b specification. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference [4], the data transfer feature request message is a media access control layer message. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference [4], the data transfer feature response message is a media access control layer message. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference [4], the data transfer may comprise transmitting a plurality of data packets, and the data transfer feature information 52 201012157 may include the number of data packets correctly received by the receiver or Is the number of lost data packets or the number of data packets received with FCS errors (and no HCS errors) or the number of data packets transmitted by the receiver during the measurement window time period. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of reference [4], the data transfer feature information also contains information relating to the measurement window time period. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference [4], the data transmission is carried out through a communication link between the transmitter and the receiver, and the data transmission characteristic information is a communication link. Feedback information or link quality information. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference document [4], the data transmission characteristic information contains information about a signal to noise ratio associated with the data transmission at the receiver. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference [4], the data transfer characteristic response message contains information for setting the transmission power level of the data transmission. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference document, the data transfer characteristic response message contains information for setting the transmission data rate of the data transmission. According to an embodiment of the reference [4], a data transfer feature request message is transmitted in an aperiodic manner according to an embodiment consistent with an embodiment of the reference file [4], the data transfer feature response message comprising Information used to set the data rate for this data transfer. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference document [4], the data delivery feature information includes: information about the recommended data rate, information about the recommended power level change, and the number of packets received by the error. Information, information on the number of lost packets, information on the number of packets sent to recipients of the Command Box, 201012157, information on measurement windows, information on the number of packets received correctly, and on the communication chain Information on the SNR/LQI of the road.

根據和參考文件[4]之實施例相符的一實施例,該傳送 器會以每隔「X」VS的方式或是以在每個「X」中至少 一次的方式或是以非週期性的方式或是在訊框傳送的起點 處傳送一命令/控制訊框或是一資料傳送特徵請求訊息;而 該接收器則會在收到一命令/控制訊框或是一請求訊息時, 在固定的時間週期之後’舉例來說,其可能為短訊框間間 隔(Short InterFrame Spacing,SIFS),回應一命令 /控制訊框 或是一資料傳送特徵響應訊息。According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of reference [4], the transmitter will be in every "X" VS manner or at least once in each "X" or aperiodic. The method either transmits a command/control frame or a data transmission feature request message at the beginning of the frame transmission; and the receiver is fixed when receiving a command/control frame or a request message. After the time period, for example, it may be Short InterFrame Spacing (SIFS), responding to a command/control frame or a data transfer feature response message.

參考文件[4]解釋數種不同的實施例(命令/控制訊框 能的訊框酬載格式)’在本說明各實施例的各式各樣施行 式中亦可能會提供該等實施例。根據和參考文件[4]之實 例相符的一實施例,該傳送器可能每隔「χ」V吖或是以 每個「x」p中至少一個的方式)及/或在訊框交易的起點 或是以非週期性的方式包含-命令/控制訊框;而該接收 則會在收到-命令/控制訊框時,在固定的時間週期之後 舉例來說,其可能為短訊框間間隔(sifs),回應—命令^ 制訊框。由請求資料傳送特徵的傳送器所發送的命令/控, ==鏈路回授請求訊框。由該接收器響應於鏈路㈣ 框。。王所發送的命令/控制訊框則稱為「鏈路回授答覆言 示範性實施例顯 根據和參考文件⑷之實施例相符的 54 201012157 不在圖22⑷至⑷,該等圖式顯示命令/控制訊框酬載格式。 該傳送器所發送的命令7控制訊框(鏈路回授請求訊 框,換言之’資料傳送特徵請求訊息)和該接收器響應於該 鏈路回授請求訊框所發送的命令/㈣赌(鏈路回授叉覆 訊框,換言之,資料傳送特徵響應訊息)可能具有如圖2咖 _的訊框2210中所示的相同格式。 命令/控制訊框則可能包含—鏈路回授控制位元組 m (octet)2201。除了鏈路回授控制位元組220丨之外,命令/控 制訊框2210可能還在該命令/控制訊框221〇中包含一或兩 個位兀組2202,用以表示被正確收到的封包的數量。除了 鍵路回授控制位元組2201之外,命令/控制訊框221〇可能 還在該命令/控制訊框221〇中包含一或兩個位元組Μ”, 用以表不遺失的封包的數量。除了鏈路回授控制位元組 2201之外,命令/控制訊框221〇可能還在該命令/控制訊框 2210中包含兩個位元組22〇4,用以表示所收到之有fcs錯 參誤且沒有任何HCS錯誤的封包的數量。除了鏈路回授控制 位兀組2201之外,命令/控制訊框221〇可能還在該命令/ 控制訊框2210中包含兩個位元組22〇5,用以表示被傳送到 命v訊框之預疋接收者的封包的數量。除了鏈路回授控制 位兀組2201之外,命令/控制訊框221〇可能還在該命令/ 控制訊框2210中包含一或兩個位元組22〇6,用以表示以微 秒數或毫秒數來計算的測量視窗大小。除了鏈路回授控制 位το組2201之外,命令/控制訊框221〇可能還在該命令/ 控制訊框2210中包含一個位元組22〇7,用以表示[以或 55 201012157 SNR。 _ 鏈路回授控制位元組22〇1可能具有如圖22(b)中的 2220所示的格式。鏈路回授控制位元組2201的位元2至位 兀7 2208可能會被保留。位元i 22〇9可以用來表示該命令 /控制訊框2210中於該鏈路回授控制位元組22〇1後面是否 還併入其它位元組,例如位元組22〇2及/或位元組及/ 或位兀組2204及/或位元組22〇5及/或位元組22〇6及/或位 一、、位元〇 22 1 1可以用來表示該命令/控制訊框22 1 〇 究竟係傳送器所發送的鏈路回授請求訊框(資料傳送特徵請❹ 求讯息)或是接收器所發送的鏈路回授答覆訊框(資料傳送 特徵響應訊息)。位元〇 221丨可被設為〇,用以表示該命令/ 控制訊框係鏈路回授請求訊框。位元〇 2211可被設為工, 用以表示該命令/控制訊框係鏈路回授答覆訊框。 鏈路回授控制位元組22〇1可能具有如圖22(c)中的 2230所示的格式。鏈路回授控制位元組2201的位元3至位 兀7 2212可能會被保留。位元2 2213可以用來表示該命令 /控制訊框2210中於該鏈路回授控制位元組22〇丨後面是否 ❿ 還併入其匕位元組’例如位元組2 2 0 2及/或位元組2 2 0 3及/ 或位元組2204及/或位元組22〇5及/或位元組22〇6。位元1 2214可以用來表示位元組22〇7是否被併入該命令/控制訊 框2210之中。位元〇 2215可以用來表示該命令/控制訊框 究竟係鏈路回授請求訊框(資料傳送特徵請求訊息)或是鏈 路回授答覆訊框(資料傳送特徵響應訊息)。位元〇 2215可 被设為〇 ’用以表示該命令/控制訊框係鏈路回授請求訊框。 56 201012157 位元0 2215可被設為丨’用以表示該命令/控制訊框係鍵路 回授。覆訊框。鏈路回授控制位元組22gi的位元3至位元 7 2212中的一部分或全部可以個 起)表不該命令/控 制訊框22 10中於該鏈路回授控吿丨― 口衩控制位組22〇1後面是否併 入位元組2202、位元組2203、位元細, 組2204、位元組2205、 以及位元組2206中的其中一者。在太 有在本文中,於一實施例中, 可能會保留位元b2 2213。Several different embodiments (command/control frame capable frame payload format) are explained in reference [4]. These embodiments may also be provided in the various embodiments of the various embodiments of the present description. According to an embodiment consistent with the example of reference [4], the transmitter may be "每隔" or "at least one of each "x"p) and/or at the beginning of the frame transaction. Or include - command/control frame in a non-periodic manner; and the reception will be after the fixed time period, for example, after a fixed time period, which may be an inter-frame interval (sifs), response - command ^ controller box. The command/control sent by the transmitter requesting the data transfer feature, == link feedback request frame. The receiver responds to the link (four) box. . The command/control frame sent by the king is referred to as "link feedback". The exemplary embodiment is based on the reference to the embodiment of the reference file (4). 54 201012157 is not in Figures 22(4) to (4), which show commands/controls. Frame payload format. The command 7 control frame sent by the transmitter (link feedback request frame, in other words 'data transmission feature request message) and the receiver sent in response to the link feedback request frame The command/(4) bet (link reply fork frame, in other words, the data transfer feature response message) may have the same format as shown in frame 2210 of Figure 2. The command/control frame may contain - The link feedback control tuple m (octet) 2201. In addition to the link feedback control byte 220, the command/control frame 2210 may also include one or two in the command/control frame 221 The unit group 2202 is used to indicate the number of packets that are correctly received. In addition to the key feedback control byte 2201, the command/control frame 221 may still be in the command/control frame 221 Contains one or two bytes Μ" for Not the number of lost packets. In addition to the link feedback control byte 2201, the command/control frame 221 may also include two bytes 22〇4 in the command/control frame 2210 to indicate that the received fcs is received. The number of packets that were mistakenly incorrect and did not have any HCS errors. In addition to the link feedback control bit group 2201, the command/control frame 221 may also include two bytes 22〇5 in the command/control frame 2210 to indicate that it is transmitted to the command message. The number of packets expected by the receiver. In addition to the link feedback control bit group 2201, the command/control frame 221 may also include one or two bytes 22〇6 in the command/control frame 2210 for indicating the number of microseconds. Or the measurement window size calculated in milliseconds. In addition to the link feedback control bit το group 2201, the command/control frame 221 may also include a byte 22 〇 7 in the command/control frame 2210 to indicate [to or 55 201012157 SNR. The link feedback control byte 22〇1 may have a format as shown by 2220 in Fig. 22(b). Bits 2 through 兀7 2208 of the link feedback control byte 2201 may be reserved. Bits i 22 〇 9 can be used to indicate whether the command/control frame 2210 is followed by other bytes, such as bytes 22 〇 2 and /, after the link feedback control bit group 22 〇 1 . Or a byte and/or a bit group 2204 and/or a bit group 22〇5 and/or a byte group 22〇6 and/or a bit one, a bit number 22 1 1 may be used to indicate the command/control The frame 22 1 is the link feedback request frame sent by the transmitter (the data transmission feature request message) or the link back to the reply frame (data transmission feature response message) sent by the receiver. Bit 〇 221 丨 can be set to 〇 to indicate the command/control frame link feedback request frame. Bit 〇 2211 can be set to indicate that the command/control frame link back to the reply frame. The link feedback control byte 22〇1 may have a format as shown by 2230 in Fig. 22(c). Bits 3 through 兀7 2212 of the link feedback control byte 2201 may be reserved. Bit 2 2213 can be used to indicate whether the command/control frame 2210 is followed by the link feedback control bit group 22, and is also incorporated into its byte ', such as byte 2 2 0 2 and / or a byte 2 2 0 3 and / or a byte 2204 and / or a byte 22 〇 5 and / or a byte 22 〇 6. Bit 1 2214 can be used to indicate whether byte 22 〇 7 is incorporated into command/control frame 2210. Bit 〇 2215 can be used to indicate whether the command/control frame is a link feedback request frame (data transfer feature request message) or a link back answer frame (data transfer feature response message). Bit 〇 2215 can be set to ’ ' to indicate the command/control frame link feedback request frame. 56 201012157 Bit 0 2215 can be set to 丨' to indicate the command/control frame key feedback. Answer box. A part or all of the bit 3 to the bit 7 2212 of the link feedback control bit group 22gi can be set up to indicate that the command/control frame 22 10 is in the link feedback control port. Whether the control bit group 22〇1 is followed by one of the byte group 2202, the byte group 2203, the bit detail, the group 2204, the byte 2205, and the byte 2206. In this context, in one embodiment, bit b2 2213 may be preserved.

該傳送器可能每隔「X」微秒岑县 」做P现疋以非週期性的方式包 3 一命令/控制訊框(如格式221〇中 „ 1所不的酬載);而該接收 器則會在收到-命令/控制訊框時,在^的時間週期之 後^舉例來說,SIFS(或是更晚的時間;傳送器節點同樣能 夠提供回授至接收器節點),答覆—命令/控制訊框。 在本發明的-實施财,參考文件[4]所提出的命令/控 制訊=的酬載可以分別利用圖1G或U中提出的格式,經 由特定應用命令/控制訊框被發送。舉例來說,在參考文件 [4]二提出的酬载可以被併人如圖10與11中所示的特定應 用叩令/控制訊框的命令/控制要件酬載位元組11〇4/〗〇〇4之 中命令/控制要件類型11〇5/1〇〇5可能會分別被設定為介 〇 食 1 + Ba 竭的數值(鏈路回授命令/控制要件一定要使用 疋數值)。換言之,該命令/控制要件類型1 1 05/1005可能 曰被叹為—對應於一鏈路回授命令/控制要件的預設數值。 ; 例中,假如一接收器接收一對應於一键路回授合 令/控吿丨丨 π «Γ — 件的特定應用命令/控制訊框且該裝置判斷該特 疋應用命令/控制要件係一來自該鏈路回授控制位元組(舉 57 201012157 例來說,如圖22中所示的位元組2201)的鏈路回授請求訊 息,該接收器便可能會在SIFS之後,答覆一具有個別鏈路 回授命令/控制要件(鏈路回授響應訊息)的對應特定應用命 令/控制訊框。 圖20(a)所示的係根據一實施例可以被併入一特定應用 命令/控制訊框之中的鏈路回授命令/控制酬載。 於一實施例中,一傳送器所發送的特定應用命令/控制 訊框(鏈路回授請求訊框,即,資料傳送特徵請求訊息)的命 令/控制酬載可能會具有如圖20(a)中所示的格式2〇〇1。於 © 一實施例中,接收器響應於該鏈路回授請求訊框所發送的 特定應用命令/控制訊框(鏈路回授答覆訊框,即,資料傳送 特徵響應訊息)的命令/控制酬載可能會具有如格式2001中 所示的格式,但是沒有位元組2011。在本文中當該等特 定應用命令/控制訊框係由請求接收器答覆包含該被請求鏈 路回授資訊的特定應用命令/控制訊框的裝置所發送時或者 當該特定應用命令/控制訊框係由包含該傳送器所請求之鏈 路回授f訊的接收器所發送時,該特定應用命令/控制訊框© 亦被稱為特定應用鏈路回授命令/控制訊框。 於一實施例中,命令/控制酬載2001可能包含一鏈路回 授控制攔位2010。 於一實施例中,除了鏈路回授控制攔位2〇1〇之外,一 傳送器所傳送的命令/控制酬載·丨可能還在該命令/控制 酬載2001中包含二或多個位元組2〇n,用以表示應該回應 由I傳送器所傳送之此命令/控制訊框的接收器的裝置位 58 201012157 址。於一實施例中,在清單2001中提及的該等接收器的裝 置位址的順序可能係它們必須回應一響應鏈路回授命令訊 框的順序。裝置清單攔位2〇丨丨並不需要被併入定址至單一 接收器(單播位址)之被傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框 之中。饭如該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框係被發送至多個 接收器或是一個以上接收器的話(多播位址),那麼該裝置清 單攔位2011便可被併入一被傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令 訊框之中。 於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制欄位20 1〇可能會具有如 圖20(b)中2002所示的格式。 於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制欄位2〇1〇的位元12至 位元15 2020可能會被保留。 於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制攔位2〇1〇的位元8至位 元11可以當作資料速率攔位2021,用以表示該特定應用 鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器建議給該特定應用鏈路回授命 φ 令訊框的接收器的資料速率。資料速率攔位2021可以如 ECMA[1]規格中所提出般地被編碼。 於一實施例中,位元4至位元7可以當作傳送功率位 準變更攔位2022,用以表示該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框 的發送器建議給該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的傳送功率 位準。該傳送功率位準變更攔位2022的編碼方式如ecMA[1] 規格中所提出般。 於一實施例中,位元3可以當作裝置清單欄位併入位 疋2023,用以表示裝置清單攔位2〇u是否被併入該酬載 59 201012157 2001之中。於一實施例中,假如該鏈路回授命令訊框將鏈 路回授請求位元設為一被發送至一多播位址,該裝置清單 攔位併入位元2023便會被設為一。該裝置清單攔位20 1 1 可藉由將鏈路回授請求位元設為一而被該鏈路回授命令訊 框的發送器併入且其會被發送至一多播位址。或者,位元3 2023亦可被保留。 於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制欄位20 10的位元2可以 當作鏈路資訊欄位請求位元2024,假如發送器響應於該被 傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框正在請求鏈路資訊欄位 2012要被併入任何特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框之中,則, 將其鏈路回授請求位元2026設為一的特定應用鏈路回授命 令訊框的發送器便可能會將鏈路資訊欄位請求位元2024設 為一。假如鏈路資訊欄位2012被併入該被傳送的特定應用 鏈路回授命令訊框之中,則,將其鏈路回授請求位元〇 2026 設為零的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框2001的發送器便可能 會將鏈路資訊欄位請求位元2024設為一。於所有其它情況 中,該鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器皆可能會將鏈路資訊欄 位請求位元2 2024設為零。The transmitter may do P-instantly every 3 "seconds", and then a non-periodic method of 3 command/control frames (such as the format 221 „ 1 not), and the reception The device will receive the -command/control frame after the time period of ^^, for example, SIFS (or later; the transmitter node can also provide feedback to the receiver node), reply - Command/Control Frame. In the present invention, the payload of the command/control message proposed in reference [4] can be used in the format proposed in FIG. 1G or U, respectively, via a specific application command/control frame. Is sent. For example, the payload described in reference [4] 2 can be used by the specific application command/control frame command/control element payload bit group 11 as shown in FIGS. 10 and 11. 〇4/〗 〇〇4 Command/control element type 11〇5/1〇〇5 may be set to the value of 〇1 + Ba (link feedback command/control element must be used 疋) Value). In other words, the command/control element type 1 1 05/1005 may be stunned - corresponding to a link The default value of the command/control element is returned. In the example, if a receiver receives a specific application command/control frame corresponding to a push-to-back command/control Γ« The device determines that the feature application command/control element is a link feedback request message from the link feedback control bit group (for example, in the case of 2010 2010, the byte 2201 shown in FIG. 22). The receiver may reply to a specific application command/control frame having an individual link feedback command/control element (link feedback response message) after SIFS. Figure 20(a) is based on An embodiment may be incorporated into a link feedback command/control payload in a particular application command/control frame. In one embodiment, a particular application command/control frame (link) transmitted by a transmitter The command/control payload of the feedback request frame, ie, the data transfer feature request message, may have the format 2〇〇1 as shown in FIG. 20(a). In an embodiment, the receiver responds to The specific application command/control sent by the link feedback request frame The command/control payload of the frame (link back to reply frame, ie, data transfer feature response message) may have the format as shown in format 2001, but without the byte 2011. In this document, when The specific application command/control frame is sent by the requesting receiver to the device that responds to the specific application command/control frame containing the requested link feedback information or when the specific application command/control frame is included in the transmission The specific application command/control frame © is also referred to as a specific application link feedback command/control frame when the link requested by the device is sent back to the receiver of the message. In an embodiment, the command / Control Payload 2001 may include a Link Feedback Control Block 2010. In an embodiment, in addition to the link feedback control block 2〇1, the command/control payload transmitted by a transmitter may also include two or more in the command/control payload 2001. The byte 2〇n is used to indicate the device bit 58 201012157 address of the receiver that should respond to the command/control frame transmitted by the I transmitter. In one embodiment, the order of the device addresses of the receivers mentioned in Listing 2001 may be in the order in which they must respond to a response link feedback command frame. The device list block 2 does not need to be incorporated into the transmitted specific application link feedback command frame addressed to a single receiver (unicast address). If the specific application link feedback command frame is sent to multiple receivers or more than one receiver (multicast address), then the device list block 2011 can be incorporated into a transmitted specific The application link is sent back to the command frame. In an embodiment, the link feedback control field 20 1 may have a format as shown in 2002 in Figure 20(b). In an embodiment, bit 12 to bit 15 2020 of the link feedback control field 2〇1〇 may be reserved. In an embodiment, bit 8 to bit 11 of the link feedback control block 2〇1〇 can be regarded as a data rate block 2021 for indicating the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame. It is recommended to return the data rate of the receiver of the φ command frame to the specific application link. The data rate intercept 2021 can be encoded as proposed in the ECMA [1] specification. In an embodiment, the bit 4 to the bit 7 can be regarded as a transmit power level change block 2022 for indicating that the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame proposes to the specific application link feedback. The transmit power level of the command frame. The transmission power level change block 2022 is encoded as described in the ecMA [1] specification. In one embodiment, bit 3 can be incorporated into device list field 位 2023 to indicate whether device list block 2〇u is incorporated into the payload 59 201012157 2001. In an embodiment, if the link feedback command frame sets the link feedback request bit to be sent to a multicast address, the device list merge bit 2023 is set. One. The device list block 20 1 1 can be incorporated by the sender of the link feedback command frame by setting the link feedback request bit to one and it will be sent to a multicast address. Alternatively, bit 3 2023 may also be reserved. In an embodiment, the bit 2 of the link feedback control field 20 10 can be regarded as the link information field request bit 2024, if the sender responds to the transmitted specific application link feedback command frame. Requesting the link information field 2012 to be incorporated into any particular application link feedback command frame, then setting its link feedback request bit 2026 to a specific application link feedback command frame The sender may set the link information field request bit 2024 to one. If the link information field 2012 is incorporated into the transmitted specific application link feedback command frame, then the specific application link feedback command with its link feedback request bit 〇 2026 set to zero. The transmitter of frame 2001 may set the link information field request bit 2024 to one. In all other cases, the sender of the link feedback command frame may set the link information field request bit 2 2024 to zero.

於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制欄位2010的位元1可以 當作LQI請求位元2025,假如發送器響應於該被傳送的鏈 路回授命令訊框正在請求LQI欄位要被併入一鏈路回授命 令訊框之中,則,該鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器便會將LQI 請求位元2025設為一。於一實施例中,響應於一被接收之 鏈路回授命令訊框而被傳送的鏈路回授命令訊框中的LQI 201012157 請求位元2025可能會被視為保留。 於一實施例中,鏈路回授控制攔位2〇1〇的位元〇可以 當作鏈路回授請求位元2〇26,假如發送器響應於該被傳送 的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框正在請求一特定應用鏈路回 授命令訊框’則,該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器 便可能會將鏈路回授請求位元2〇26設為一。該鏈路回授請 求位元0 2026在響應於一特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框被傳 送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框之中可能會被設為零。 於一實施例中’除了鏈路回授控制欄位2〇1〇之外命 令/控制酬載2001可能還在該特定應用命令/控制訊框中包 含兩個位元組當作LQI欄位2〇13,用以表示LQI或snr。 ❹ .LQI攔位20 1 3為介於該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的 發送器與該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的目的地之間的鏈 路的鏈路品質指示符(LQI),其係由該特定應用鏈路回授命 令訊框的發送器所測量。於—實施例中,假如鏈路回授請 求位7L 2026被設為一,該LQI欄位2〇13可能不會被併入 作為該被傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的一部分。 於一實施例中,該特定應用命令/控制訊框可能在酬載 編中包含-鏈路資訊攔位2G12。假如發送器響應於該被 傳送的敎應用鍵路回授命令訊框而請求要將該鏈路資訊 攔位2012併入一特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框之中,鍵路資 s 1位4·求位元2G24便會被該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框 的發送器設為一。於一實施例中,響應於一被接收的特定 應用鏈路回授命令訊框而被傳送的特定應請路回授命令 61 201012157 訊框之中的鏈路資訊攔位請求位元2〇24可以被保留。於一- 實施例中’假如該特定應用鍵路回授命令訊框中的鍵路回 授凊求位7L 2026被設為一,該等位元組2〇12則可能不會 被併入在被傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框之中。 於一實施例中,鏈路資訊欄位2012可能會具有如圖 20(c)中所示的格式2〇〇3。於一實施例中,鏈路資訊欄位2〇12 包含接收者訊框遺失計數攔位2〇3〇,用以表示由特定應用 鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器所決定之已經遺失的訊框的數 量。 ❹ 於一實施例中,該鏈路資訊欄位2〇12包含接收者訊框 錯誤計數欄位2031,用以表示該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊 框的發送器從該鏈路回授命令訊框的目的地處所收到之有 FCS錯誤但是沒有HCS錯誤的訊框的總數量。 於一實施例中,該鏈路資訊攔位2012包含接收者訊框 计數攔位2032,用以表示該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的 發送器從該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的目的地處正確收 到的訊框的總數量。 〇 於—實施例中,該鏈路資訊攔位2012包含來源訊框計 數攔位2033,用以表示由該鏈路回授命令訊框的發送器傳 送至(包含再傳送在内)該特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框的目 的地處的訊框的總數量。 於一實施例中,該鏈路資訊欄位2012包含測量視窗大 小搁位2034 ’用以表示進行測量期間的時間數額,其係以 微秒為單位》 62 201012157 根據一實施例,將一鏈路回授命令訊框中的鏈路回授 請求位元設為一,該鏈路資訊攔位便可能不會被併入該鏈 路回授命令訊框之中。 圖21 (a)所示的係根據一實施例的鏈路資訊欄位2〇12 的替代格式。In an embodiment, bit 1 of the link feedback control field 2010 can be regarded as the LQI request bit 2025, if the sender is requesting the LQI field to be requested in response to the transmitted link feedback command frame. When incorporated into a link feedback command frame, the sender of the link feedback command frame sets the LQI request bit 2025 to one. In one embodiment, the LQI 201012157 request bit 2025 in the link feedback command frame transmitted in response to a received link feedback command frame may be considered reserved. In an embodiment, the bit feedback of the link feedback control block 2〇1〇 can be regarded as the link feedback request bit 2〇26, if the sender responds to the transmitted specific application link feedback. If the command frame is requesting a specific application link feedback command frame, then the sender of the specific application link feedback command frame may set the link feedback request bit 2〇26 to one. The link feedback request bit 0 2026 may be set to zero in a particular application link feedback command frame that is transmitted in response to a particular application link feedback command frame. In an embodiment, the command/control payload 2001 may contain two bytes in the specific application command/control frame as the LQI field 2 in addition to the link feedback control field 2〇1〇. 〇13, used to represent LQI or snr. ❹ .LQI intercept 20 1 3 is a link quality indicator of the link between the sender of the specific application link feedback command frame and the destination of the specific application link feedback command frame ( LQI), which is measured by the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame. In the embodiment, if the link feedback request bit 7L 2026 is set to one, the LQI field 2〇13 may not be incorporated as part of the transmitted specific application link feedback command frame. In an embodiment, the specific application command/control frame may include a link information intercept 2G12 in the payload. If the sender requests to link the link information block 2012 into a specific application link feedback command frame in response to the transmitted 敎 application key feedback command frame, the key s1 bit 4. The location 2G24 will be set to one by the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame. In an embodiment, the link information intercept request bit 2〇24 in the specific request routing command 61 201012157 is transmitted in response to a received specific application link feedback command frame. Can be retained. In the first embodiment, 'if the key feedback request position 7L 2026 of the specific application key feedback command frame is set to one, the bytes 2〇12 may not be merged into The specific application link that is transmitted is returned to the command frame. In an embodiment, the link information field 2012 may have the format 2〇〇3 as shown in Figure 20(c). In an embodiment, the link information field 2〇12 includes a receiver frame loss count block 2〇3〇, which is used to indicate that the sender of the command frame is returned by the specific application link. The number of frames. In an embodiment, the link information field 2〇12 includes a receiver frame error count field 2031, and is used to indicate that the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame returns a command from the link. The total number of frames received by the destination of the frame with FCS errors but no HCS errors. In an embodiment, the link information block 2012 includes a receiver frame count block 2032 for indicating that the transmitter of the specific application link feedback command frame returns a command message from the specific application link. The total number of frames received correctly at the destination of the box. In the embodiment, the link information block 2012 includes a source frame count block 2033 for indicating that the sender of the link feedback command frame transmits (including retransmission) the specific application. The total number of frames at the destination of the link feedback command frame. In an embodiment, the link information field 2012 includes a measurement window size shelf 2034' to indicate the amount of time during which the measurement is taken, in microseconds. 62 201012157 According to an embodiment, a link is used. The link feedback request bit in the feedback command frame is set to one, and the link information interception may not be incorporated into the link feedback command frame. Figure 21 (a) shows an alternative format for the link information field 2 〇 12 according to an embodiment.

籲 從圖中可以看出,該鏈路資訊攔位2012可能包含一位 元組作為接收者訊框遺失率欄位2101,用以表示接收者訊 框遺失計數和接收者訊框計數間的比例的十進位數值。於 一實施例中,該鏈路資訊欄位2〇12可能進一步包含一位元 組作為接收者訊框錯誤率攔位21〇2,用以表示接收者訊框 錯誤》十數和接收者訊框計數間的比例的十進位數值。於一 實施例中,該鏈路資訊攔位2012可能進一步包括2個位元 組作為測量視窗大小欄位21〇3,用以表示進行測量期間的 時間數額,其係以微秒為單位。 圖21(b)所示的係根據一實施例的裝置清單攔位2〇ιι 的格式。 2011可能包含一或複 位址欄位2 11 〇皆表示 於一實施例中’該裝置清單欄位 數個裝置位址爛位2110,每一個裝置 為裝置係該發送器希望從該處接收 裝置之中的其中一者。 一裝置的位址,其中, 一鏈路回授命令訊框的 一接收被定址到一單播位讪f„ 恂址(早一接收器)且其鏈路回 授請求位元2026被設為一的特宗 将疋應用鏈路回授命令訊框 2001的裝置可能會在收到該接收 收的特疋應用鏈路回授命令 訊框之後的SIFS或是任何固定样門、思4 疋時間週期之後回應一特定應 63 201012157 用鏈路回授命令訊框。該裝置可能會在該裝置響應於一已 接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框而傳送的特定應用鏈路 回授命令訊框200 1之中包含所建議的傳送功率位準改變 2022及資料速率2021。假如一已接收的特定應用鏈路回授 命令訊框中的LQI攔位請求位元2025被設為一,該裝置便 可能會在該裝置響應於該已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令 訊框而傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框2001之中包含 LQI欄位2013。假如一已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊 框中的鏈路資訊欄位請求位元2024被設為一,該裝置便可 能會在該裝置響應於該已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊 框而傳送的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框2001之中包含鏈路 資訊欄位2012。 於一實施例中,在收到被發送至一多播位址(多個接收 器)的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框時,假如該接收器裝置判 斷其本身的位址(其裝置位址)在該已接收的鏈路回授命令 訊框的裝置清單之中,該裝置便可能會回應一鏈路回授命 令訊框。該裝置可能會在下面給定的延遲之後傳送一鏈路 回授命令訊框:As can be seen from the figure, the link information block 2012 may contain a tuple as the receiver frame loss rate field 2101, which is used to indicate the ratio between the receiver frame loss count and the receiver frame count. Decimal value. In an embodiment, the link information field 2〇12 may further include a tuple as the receiver frame error rate block 21〇2, which is used to indicate the receiver frame error “ten number and receiver information”. The decimal value of the ratio between the box counts. In one embodiment, the link information block 2012 may further include 2 bytes as the measurement window size field 21〇3 to indicate the amount of time during which the measurement is taken, in microseconds. Figure 21 (b) shows the format of the device list block 2 〇 ιι according to an embodiment. 2011 may include one or reset address field 2 11 〇 are all shown in an embodiment, 'the device list column number of device address rotten bits 2110, each device is the device is the transmitter wants to receive the device from there One of them. An address of a device, wherein a reception of a link feedback command frame is addressed to a unicast address 早f„ ( address (early one receiver) and its link feedback request bit 2026 is set The device of the application link feedback command frame 2001 may receive the SIFS after the receiving application link feedback command frame or any fixed sample, think time After the period, a specific response should be reported. The 2010-11157 link back command message may be sent by the device in response to a received specific application link feedback command frame. Block 200 1 includes the proposed transmit power level change 2022 and data rate 2021. If the LQI intercept request bit 2025 of a received specific application link feedback command frame is set to one, the device The LQI field 2013 may be included in the specific application link feedback command frame 2001 transmitted by the device in response to the received specific application link feedback command frame. If a specific application chain has been received Road feedback command frame The link information field request bit 2024 is set to one, and the device may return a command frame 2001 for the specific application link transmitted by the device in response to the received specific application link feedback command frame. The link information field 2012 is included. In an embodiment, when receiving a specific application link feedback command frame sent to a multicast address (multiple receivers), if the receiver device Determining that its own address (its device address) is in the list of devices of the received link feedback command frame, the device may respond to a link feedback command frame. The device may be in A link feedback command frame is transmitted after the delay given below:

Time_to_send_Response =Time_to_send_Response =

pSIFS+pSlotTime + (Position_in Device List)x(Link feedback command_frame_duration)+pSIFSpSIFS+pSlotTime + (Position_in Device List)x(Link feedback command_frame_duration)+pSIFS

Time—to_send_Response係從該鏈路回授命令訊框之接 收結束處開始算起。Position_in Device List_in_Link feedback command frame的可能數值落在範圍[0,N-1](含) 201012157 之中。PSIFS和pSlotTime皆如ECMA⑴規格中所提出者。 接收1§裝置可能會回應一具有酬載2〇〇1的響應特定應 用鏈路回授命令訊框。該裝置可能會在該裝置響應於 接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框而傳送的鏈路回授命令 訊框2001之中包含所建議的傳送功率位準改變2〇22及資 料速率2021。假如一已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框 中的LQI欄位請求位元2025被設為一,該裝置便可能會在 該裝置響應於該已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框而傳 送的響應特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框2〇〇1之中包含LQI攔 位2013。假如一已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框中的 鏈路資訊欄位請求位元2024被設為一,該裝置便可能會在 該裝置響應於該已接收的特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框而傳 送的響應特定應用鏈路回授命令訊框之中包含鏈路資訊欄 位 2012 。Time_to_send_Response is counted from the end of the reception of the link feedback command frame. The possible values of Position_in Device List_in_Link feedback command frame fall within the range [0, N-1] (inclusive) 201012157. Both PSIFS and pSlotTime are as proposed in the ECMA (1) specification. The Receive 1 § device may respond to a Response Specific Application Link Feedback Command frame with a payload of 2〇〇1. The device may include the suggested transmit power level change 2 & 22 and the data rate 2021 in the link feedback command frame 2001 transmitted by the device in response to the received specific application link feedback command frame. If the received LQI field request bit 2025 of the specific application link feedback command frame is set to one, the device may respond to the received specific application link feedback command. The LQI Intercept 2013 is included in the Response Specific Application Link Feedback Command Frame 2〇〇 transmitted in the box. If the received link information field request bit 2024 of the specific application link feedback command frame is set to one, the device may be in response to the received specific application link feedback. The response-specific application link feedback command frame transmitted by the command frame includes the link information field 2012.

UnJjJt-致 I.E(CHA>j:NEL CONSENSUS IE)有關 定應用弩料的用途 參考文件[5]提供一種用於操作一超寬頻無線電通訊襞 置的方法。其所提供的方法包含產生一通道改變協商訊 息’其包含和該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置期望變成的至少— 頻率通道有關的資訊。其所提供的方法進一步包含傳迸— 通道改變協商訊息給該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置已經在目前 的頻率通道中與其具有一已建立之通訊連接的至少一其它 超寬頻無線電通訊裝置。 進—步根據參考文件[5],該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置可 65 201012157 能會從該至少一其它超寬頻無線電通訊裝置處接收通道改 變協商訊息,其中’該通道改變協商訊息包含和該其它超 寬頻無線電通訊裝置期望變成的至少一頻率通道有關的資 訊。該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置可能會判斷該超寬頻無線電 通訊裝置是否能夠改變至該通道改變協商訊息中所包含的 該至少一頻率通道;並且可能會產生另一通道改變協商訊 息,其包含和該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置期望變成的至少一 頻率通道有關的資訊。接著,該超寬頻無線電通訊裝置可 能會將該另一通道改變協商訊息傳送給該其它超寬頻無線 〇 電通訊裝置。 根據參考文件[5]的一實施例,該通道一致(CC, CHANNEL CONSENSUS)資訊要件(IE,Informati〇n Elemerit) 會被當作通道改變協商訊息。 為讓每一個通訊裝置在其能夠或是希望變成的頻率通 道上提供資訊,該通訊裝置可能會在其信標中(舉例來說, 在下一個超訊框中)併入一通道一致(CC)資訊要件。 接著,該信標群内希望將它們操作移至新的未使用頻 ® 率通道的所有通訊裝置便可以使用該通道一致(cc)資訊要 件來移至一共同未使用的頻率通道。在本文中,該通道一 致(CC)資訊要件會被一通訊裝置用來提供需要的資訊(在該 通訊裝置能夠變成之可利用的未使用頻率通道選項上)給該 仏標群中的相鄰通訊裝置,俾使可以針對要變成的未使用 頻率通道達成一致性決定。 舉例來說,根據和參考文件[5]之實施例相符的一實施 66 201012157 例,該等通道一致(cc)資訊要件可能會在該等cc IE中包 3 長度攔位,用以儲存被儲存在該通道一致(cc)資訊要 件中的資訊的長度(以位元組來計算)。舉例來說,該等通道 一致(CC)資訊要件可能包含一通道—致(cc)控制攔位,用 以儲存控制資訊。舉例來說,該等通道一致(cc)資訊要件 可能包含一裝置位址欄位,用以儲存正在進行信標傳送的 通訊裝置的位址。舉例來說,該等通道一致(cc)資訊要件 Φ 可能包含複數個通道數欄位,用以儲存該通訊系統中所有 頻率通道的狀態。舉例來說,該等通道一致(cc)資訊要件 可能包含一頻帶可利用性欄位,用以儲存和頻率頻帶的可 利用性有關的資訊。 根據和參考文件[5]之實施例相符的一實施例一旦一 通訊裝置偵測到A於能量臨界位準的干擾訊號能量位準 時,舉例來說,該通訊裝置可能會從下一個超訊框開始在 每一個超訊框中(在傳送其第一個通道一致(cc)資訊要件之 Ο 後的預設數量的超訊框之中)於其信標傳送中併入一通道一 致(CC)資訊要件。 被傳送的通道-致(cc)資訊要件可能包含關於該通訊 裝置能夠或是希望切換成的頻率通道的資訊。進一步言 之’被傳送的通道-致(cc)資訊要件可能還包含傳送該; 標的通訊裝置係該通道-致(cc)資訊要件之原始装置或^ 始裝置的資訊。 於-實施财,作為該通道—致(cc)資訊要件之原始 (或起始裝置)的通訊裝置會(在傳送其第一個通道一致 67 201012157 (CC)資„fl要件之後)等待預設數量的超訊框,以便在決定要 切換成的頻率通道之前從其相冑的通訊裝置處#收所有的 響應通iL致(CC)資訊要件。經決定之要切換成的頻率通 道可以稍後在該通訊裝置(其為該通道一致(cc)資訊要件的 原始裝置(或起始裝置))所傳送的通道改變資訊訊要件中看 見。 根據和參考文件[5]之實施例相符的一實施例僅有作 為該通道一致(CC)資訊要件之原始裝置(或起始裝置)的通 訊裝置會(在傳送其第一個通道一致(cc)資訊要件之後)會 @ 決定要切換成的頻率通道。除此之外,在參考文件[5]的一 實施例中,作為該通道一致(cc)資訊要件之原始裝置(或起 始裝置)的通訊裝置在決定要切換成的頻率通道時僅會考慮 來自任何相鄰通訊裝置之最後收到的通道一致(cc)資訊要 件中的資訊。 在接收一通道一致(CC)資訊要件時,舉例來說,作為 該通道一致(CC)資訊要件之原始裝置(或起始裝置)的通訊 裝置會在下一個超訊框中傳送一響應通道一致(cc)資訊要 © 件。舉例來說,被傳送的響應通道一致(CC)資訊要件包含 關於該通訊裝置能夠或是希望切換成的頻率通道的資訊以 及並非係該通道一致(CC)資訊要件之原始裝置的資訊。 傳送一響應通道一致(cc)資訊要件的通訊裝置(也就 是’其包含傳送該信標的通訊裝置並非係該通道一致(cc) 資訊要件之原始裝置或起始裝置的資訊)在從一相鄰裝置處 最後收到的通道一致(CC)資訊要件中並不包含的任何頻率 68 201012157 通道(或是頻帶)中可能不會包含資訊。 假如一通訊裝置在其先傳送一通道改變資訊要件之後 接收一通道一致(cc)資訊要件,該通訊裝置可能僅會傳送 其響應通道一致(cc)資訊要件,其包含如在其通道改變資 訊要件中所包含之關於其要切換成的頻率通道(或是頻帶) 的資訊。或者,一在其先傳送一通道改變資訊要件之後接 收一通道一致(cc)資訊要件的通訊裝置在通道改變之前可 參 此不會回應任何通道一致資訊要件。 根據一實施例,如參考文件[5]所提出般針對Ecma[1] 才曰定裝置所使用的通道一致IE可以利用根據各種實施例在 圖9中所提出的格式被發送作為ASIE的一部分。舉例來 說,該通道一致IE可以被併入該ASIE中對應於資訊要件 的特定應用辨識符欄位的後面。在[5]之中可以找到使用通 道一致IE的規則;而且即使經由ASIE來發送通道一致ie, 該些規則仍然適用。舉例來說,併入該通道一致1£作為 ❹ ASIE的一部分可以用來在使用較高TFc偏移的裝置之間進 行通訊。 ϋ 型信標(AJJLEN BEACON),作 圖23⑴所示的係—實施例中用於在—無線電通訊系統 、同步化至n無線t通訊終端裝置和—第二無線電 通訊終端裝置的方法。於—實施例中,該方法可能包含步 驟⑽,於該處會判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置是否已 經在一段預設時間中沒有改 鬥从“"士 ’變其问步化傳送週期起始時 …-…該方法進—步包含步驟2302,於該處 69 201012157 會決定該第二無線電 時間。於一實施例中 處,假如該第二無線 中沒有改變其同步化 線電通訊終端裴置的 無線電通訊終端裝置 施例中’該第一無線 終端裝置皆為一特定 終端裝置。 通訊終端裝置的同步 j少化傳送週期起始 ’該方法進-步包含㈣23〇3,於該 電通訊終端襄置已經在—段預設時間 傳送週期起始時間,便會將該第-無 同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該第二 的同步化傳送週期起始時間。於一實 電通訊終端裝置與該第二無線電通訊 無線電通訊系統中的特定無線電通訊UnJjJt-I.E. (CHA>j:NEL CONSENSUS IE) Use of the application data Reference [5] provides a method for operating an ultra-wideband radio communication device. The method provided includes generating a channel change negotiation message' which contains information relating to at least the frequency channel that the ultra-wideband radio communication device desires to become. The method provided further includes transmitting a channel change negotiation message to the ultra-wideband radio communication device having at least one other ultra-wideband radio communication device with an established communication connection in the current frequency channel. According to the reference [5], the ultra-wideband radio communication device 65 201012157 can receive a channel change negotiation message from the at least one other ultra-wideband radio communication device, wherein 'the channel change negotiation message contains the other super The broadband radio communication device is expected to become at least one frequency channel related information. The ultra-wideband radio communication device may determine whether the ultra-wideband radio communication device can change to the at least one frequency channel included in the channel change negotiation message; and another channel change negotiation message may be generated, which includes and The broadband radio communication device is expected to become at least one frequency channel related information. The ultra-wideband radio communication device may then transmit the other channel change negotiation message to the other ultra-wideband wireless communication device. According to an embodiment of the reference [5], the channel conformance (CC, CHANNEL CONSENSUS) information element (IE, Informati〇n Elemerit) is used as a channel change negotiation message. In order for each communication device to provide information on a frequency channel that it can or hopes to become, the communication device may incorporate a channel consistent (CC) in its beacon (for example, in the next hyperframe). Information requirements. Next, all communication devices within the beacon group that wish to move their operations to the new unused frequency channel can use the channel consistent (cc) information element to move to a common unused frequency channel. In this context, the channel consistent (CC) information element is used by a communication device to provide the required information (on the unused frequency channel options that the communication device can become available) to adjacent to the target group. The communication device can make a consistency decision for the unused frequency channel to be changed. For example, according to an implementation 66 201012157 example consistent with the embodiment of the reference document [5], the channel-consistent (cc) information elements may be stored in the cc IE 3 length block for storage and storage. The length of the information in the channel consistent (cc) information element (calculated in bytes). For example, such channel consistent (CC) information elements may include a channel-based (cc) control block for storing control information. For example, the channel consistent (cc) information element may include a device address field for storing the address of the communication device that is transmitting the beacon. For example, the channel consistent (cc) information element Φ may contain a plurality of channel number fields for storing the status of all frequency channels in the communication system. For example, the channel consistent (cc) information elements may include a band availability field for storing information related to the availability of the frequency band. According to an embodiment consistent with the embodiment of the reference document [5], once a communication device detects the interference signal energy level of A at the energy critical level, for example, the communication device may be from the next hyperframe Begins in each of the hyperframes (in the preset number of hyperframes after transmitting the first channel consistent (cc) information element) to incorporate a channel consistent (CC) in its beacon transmission Information requirements. The transmitted channel-to-ccc (cc) information element may contain information about the frequency channel that the communication device can or would like to switch to. Further, the transmitted channel-to-ccc (cc) information element may further include transmitting the information; the target communication device is the information of the original device or the device of the channel-based (cc) information element. In the implementation of the currency, the original (or initial device) communication device that serves as the channel (cc) information element will wait for the preset after transmitting its first channel consistent 67 201012157 (CC) The number of hyperframes so that all the responses are received from their respective communication devices before deciding which frequency channel to switch to. The frequency channel that is determined to be switched can be later. Seen in the channel change information element transmitted by the communication device (which is the original device (or initiator device) of the channel consistent (cc) information element. According to an implementation consistent with the embodiment of reference document [5] For example, only the communication device that is the original device (or the initiating device) of the channel's consistent (CC) information element will (after transmitting its first channel consistent (cc) information element) @determine the frequency channel to be switched to. In addition, in an embodiment of the reference [5], the communication device of the original device (or the initiating device) that is the channel (cc) information element of the channel only determines when the frequency channel to be switched is determined. Consider the information in the channel consistent (cc) information element received from the last channel of any adjacent communication device. When receiving a channel consistent (CC) information element, for example, as the original of the channel consistent (CC) information element The communication device of the device (or the initiating device) transmits a response channel consistent (cc) information request in the next hyperframe. For example, the transmitted response channel consistent (CC) information element contains information about the communication device. Information that can or should be switched to a frequency channel and information that is not the original device of the channel's consistent (CC) information element. A communication device that transmits a response channel consistent (cc) information element (ie, it contains the message) The target communication device is not the original device or the initial device information of the channel consistent (cc) information element. Any frequency not included in the channel consistent (CC) information element finally received from an adjacent device 68 201012157 Information may not be included in the channel (or band). A communication device receives after it first transmits a channel change information element. Channel consistent (cc) information element, the communication device may only transmit its response channel consistent (cc) information element, which contains the frequency channel (or frequency band) as it is to be switched in as its channel change information element Alternatively, a communication device that receives a channel-consistent (cc) information element after it first transmits a channel change information element may not respond to any channel-consistent information element before the channel change. According to an embodiment, The channel-consistent IE used by the Ecma[1] device as set forth in reference [5] can be transmitted as part of the ASIE using the format proposed in Figure 9 in accordance with various embodiments. For example, The Channel Consistent IE can be incorporated into the ASIE that follows the specific application identifier field corresponding to the information element. The rules for using channel-consistent IEs can be found in [5]; and even if channel-consistent IE is sent via ASIE, these rules still apply. For example, incorporating the channel as a part of ❹ ASIE can be used to communicate between devices using higher TFc offsets. The J-type beacon (AJJLEN BEACON) is a system shown in Fig. 23 (1) for the method of the radio communication system, the synchronization to the n wireless t communication terminal device, and the second radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the method may include the step (10), where it is determined whether the second radio communication terminal device has not changed from a ""士" to its step-by-step transmission cycle. Initially, the method further includes a step 2302, where the second radio time is determined at 69 201012157. In an embodiment, if the second wireless does not change its synchronized line communication terminal裴In the embodiment of the radio communication terminal device, the first wireless terminal device is a specific terminal device. The synchronization of the communication terminal device reduces the start of the transmission cycle. The method further includes (4) 23〇3 in the communication. The terminal device has set the start time of the first non-synchronized transmission cycle to be the start time of the second synchronization transmission cycle. Specific radio communication between the device and the second radio communication radio communication system

換言之’舉例來說’參考如圖18⑷中所示的特定無線 電通訊系統1800。假設裝置B1至B3 1856至1858為_In other words, 'for example' reference is made to the particular radio communication system 1800 as shown in Figure 18(4). Suppose that devices B1 to B3 1856 to 1858 are _

ECMA[1]標準的特定無線電通訊終端裝置,其中,裝置μ 至B3 1856至1858可能僅會使用有槽時間/頻率部分來進行 通訊;但可能不使用有槽偏移TFC來進行通訊。假設裝置 A 1至A5 1 85 1至1 855係來自相同賣方並且係可利用有槽偏 移TFC(如圖2中所示的TFC偏移〇、TFC偏移卜以及TFc 偏移2)來進行通訊的特定無線電通訊終端裝置。於裴置幻 至A5 1851至1855以及装置B1至B3 1856至1858位於襄 置A1 1851的相同擴大型信標群内而裝置A3至A5 1853至 1855以及裝置B1 1856位於裝置A1的信標群之中的情況 中,所有裝置A1至A5 1851至1855以及裝置B1至B3 1856 至1 8 5 8皆必須彼此同步以達通訊目的,舉例來說,用於保 留無線電資源。舉例來說,於一實施例中,假如最慢的裝 置係通訊裝置B1至B3 1856至1858中其中一者,則,通 70 201012157 訊裝置A1至A5 1851至1855中其中一者便會先與該最慢 裝置同步化。進一步言之,其它通訊裝置A2至A5 1852至 1 855接著便會同步於通訊裝置A1 1851。於一實施例中, 該方法係關於一特定無線電通訊系統(舉例來說,如圖1 8(a) 中所示的通訊系統1800)中的第一特定無線電通訊終端裝 置(圖18(a)中所示的通訊裝置A1至A5 1851至1855中的任 一者)和第二特定無線電通訊終端裝置(圖l8(a)中所示的通A specific radio communication terminal device of the ECMA [1] standard, in which devices μ to B3 1856 to 1858 may only use the slotted time/frequency portion for communication; however, slotted offset TFC may not be used for communication. It is assumed that the devices A 1 to A5 1 85 1 to 1 855 are from the same vendor and can be performed using the slotted offset TFC (such as the TFC offset 〇, TFC offset 卜, and TFc offset 2 shown in FIG. 2). Specific radio communication terminal device for communication. In the same expanded beacon group of the device A1 1851 and the devices A3 to A5 1853 to 1855 and the device B1 1856 are located in the beacon group of the device A1, the devices are set to be in the same extended beacon group of the device A1 1851 and the device B1 to B3 1856 to 1858. In the case of the case, all devices A1 to A5 1851 to 1855 and devices B1 to B3 1856 to 1 8 5 8 must be synchronized with each other for communication purposes, for example, to reserve radio resources. For example, in one embodiment, if the slowest device is one of the communication devices B1 to B3 1856 to 1858, then one of the devices 701, 12157, A1 to A5 1851 to 1855 will be first The slowest device is synchronized. Further, the other communication devices A2 to A5 1852 to 1855 are then synchronized to the communication device A1 1851. In one embodiment, the method is directed to a first particular radio communication terminal device in a particular radio communication system (e.g., communication system 1800 as shown in FIG. 18(a)) (FIG. 18(a) Any one of the communication devices A1 to A5 1851 to 1855 shown) and the second specific radio communication terminal device (the one shown in FIG. 18(a)

訊裝置A1至A5 1851至1855或通訊裝置Bi至B3 185 6至 1 858中的任一者)的同步化。舉例來說,特定無線電通訊終 端裝置A1 1851可能會判斷特定無線電通訊終端裝置B1 1856是否已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變Bi ι856的同步 化傳送週期起始時間。對一特定通訊系統來說,該通訊系 統内的裝置彼此同步係一般性的規則。正常而言,舉例來 說,裝置都會同步於該系統(信標群)中最慢的裝置。根據 ECMA[1]標準且根據各實施例,在進行同步化時,舉例來 說,較快的裝置會在每一個超訊框處調整其信標週期起始 時間(BPST),以便讓它的BPST對齊最慢裝置的BpsT。因口 此,一般來說,在每一個超訊框中沒有改變其的 ECMA[1]指定裝置便係該通訊群之中的最慢裝置,並且就是 其它通訊裝置應該要同步的裝置。在參考目i8(a)的範例 中,裝置幻1851會判斷裝置B1 1856是否有在一段預設時 間(舉例來說,數個超訊框)中改變其同步化傳送週期起 間(舉例來說,BPST),俾使裝置A丨丨85丨可心道裝置B】 1856是否為A1 1851的至少該信標群中的最慢通訊裝置(請 71 201012157 注意,假如A1 1851的信標群中的最慢裝置為a5 1855且假 如A5 1855在一段預設時間數額中沒有移動其BpST,幻 便能夠利用[3]中所提出的程序依照時脈週期位準同步於 A5 1855)。於一實施例中,裝置A1 1851可能會決定m μ% 的同步化傳送週期起始時間。舉例來說,利用參考文件[3]Synchronization of the devices A1 to A5 1851 to 1855 or the communication devices Bi to B3 185 6 to 1 858). For example, a particular radio communication terminal device A1 1851 may determine whether a particular radio communication terminal device B1 1856 has not changed the synchronization transmission cycle start time of Bi 856 for a predetermined period of time. For a particular communication system, the devices within the communication system are synchronized with each other in a general rule. Normally, for example, the device will be synchronized to the slowest device in the system (beacon group). According to the ECMA [1] standard and according to various embodiments, when synchronizing, for example, a faster device will adjust its beacon period start time (BPST) at each hyperframe to make it BPST aligns the BpsT of the slowest device. Because of this, in general, the ECMA[1] designated device that does not change in each of the hyperframes is the slowest device in the communication group, and is the device that other communication devices should synchronize. In the example of reference i8(a), the device illusion 1851 determines whether the device B1 1856 has changed its synchronized transmission cycle for a predetermined period of time (for example, several hyperframes) (for example, , BPST), the device A丨丨85丨 can be the heart device B] 1856 is the slowest communication device in the beacon group of A1 1851 (please 71 201012157 Note, if the A1 1851 beacon group The slowest device is a5 1855 and if A5 1855 does not move its BpST for a preset amount of time, the Phantom can be synchronized to A5 1855 according to the clock cycle level using the procedure proposed in [3]. In one embodiment, device A1 1851 may determine a synchronization start period of m μ%. For example, using the reference file [3]

所提供的方法(本申請案中梢後同樣會摘要說明),裝置A 1851便可以判斷裝置B1 1856是否慢於裝置M 185卜於迫The method provided (which will be summarized later in the application), the device A 1851 can determine whether the device B1 1856 is slower than the device M 185.

範例中,假設裝置A1 1851發現裝置B1 1856慢於裝置AIn the example, assume that device A1 1851 finds that device B1 1856 is slower than device A.

1851(而且裝置B1 1856係裝置A1 185i之信標群中的最憎 者),这代表裝置A1 1851必須調整其同步化傳送週期起起 時間以便同步於裝置B1 1856。於_實施例中假如裝置 =1856已經在—段預設時間中沒有改變其同步化傳送週 期起始時間,裝置Ai 1851便會將裝 送週期起始時間_置=56二的同步化傳 時H w 的同步化傳送週期起始 守間’從而同步於裝置Bi 1856。1851 (and device B1 1856 is the last of the beacon groups of device A1 185i), which means that device A1 1851 must adjust its synchronization transfer cycle start time to synchronize to device B1 1856. In the embodiment, if the device=1856 has not changed its synchronization transmission cycle start time in the preset time, the device Ai 1851 will synchronize the transmission cycle start time _set=56. The synchronization transfer period of H w initiates the keeper 'and thus synchronizes to device Bi 1856.

盈線=實施例中,步驟2搬可能進—步包括決定該第」 會決^⑽端裝置的時脈週期。舉例來說,裝置A〗185 、疋裝置B1 1856的時脈週期。 無線==置Γ 2303可能進—步包括假如該第: 步化傳在一段預設時間中沒有改變… 特定無=時間’便將一虛擬時脈(其可能係該[ 電通訊終端裝置的一暫存器)設為該第二特定以 斷出置端”的時脈。舉例來說,假如震置Α1185” 1856已經在預設數量的超訊檀中沒有改變多 72 201012157 BPST,裝置A11851便可能會將一虛擬時脈(其可 存器)設為裝置B1 1856的時脈,以便同步於裝置^ 一暫 於-實施例中,該同步化傳送週期起始 :: 期起始時間(BPST)。 ’” L ‘週 ㈣例中,㈣二無㈣通訊終端裝置 型的特定錢電通訊終·置,以魏 _ 魯 有槽時間/頻率部分通訊,而沒有有槽偏移時間供 訊。舉例來說’該第二特定無線電通訊終端裝置B : 係-根據觀A[im準的特定無線電通料端 可能僅會使用沒有偏移的有槽時間/頻率部分來進〜 且 而無法使用有槽偏移TFC(TFC偏移〇、TFC 仃訊, TFC偏移2)來進行通訊。 1、以及 於一實施例中,該第一無線電通訊終端 型的特定無線電通崎端裝置,其會 一類 :=頻率部分通訊以及有槽偏移時_率部分通= ° 舉例來說,參考和® 18⑷有關的範例,裝置A =咖至⑽為第二類型㈣定無線電通訊終端裝置, 二=:定TFC(TFC偏移。)以及較高的有槽偏移 tfc(tfc偏移丨m TFC偏移2)兩者㈣行通訊 (TFC;^實施例中,該等時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼 於-實施例中,判斷該第二無線電通訊終 已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變其疋 間包括剁丁化得迗週期起始時 斷第一無線電通訊終端裝置是否已經在預設數 73 201012157 量的訊框及超訊框的至少其中一者中沒有改變其同步化傳 送週期起始時間。舉例來說,參考圖,裝置A1 1851 可能會判斷裝置B1 1856是否已經在預設數量的超訊框 中,舉例來說’在前面六個超訊框中,改變其同步化傳送 週期起始時間(舉例來說,BPST)。 於一實施例中’該方法係由一特定無線電通訊終端裝 置來實行。 ^ J 1 1昵埂一步包含步驟2304,用 以判斷該第一特定無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期 起始時間是否已經被設為該第二特定無線電通訊終端裝置 的同步化傳送週期起始時間。舉例來說,參考圖_,裝 ^11851可能會判斷裝置Almi是否已經調整其㈣; 2對齊裝置B1 1856的BPST°其它裝置AU Α5 1852 主1855則可以從裝晋Αΐ 暑石口 褒置A1 1851的BPST處判斷裝置A1 1851 否已經調整^的则丁以對齊裝置mi856。 ❹ 如該^ — ^財,該方法可能進—步包含步驟2305’假 時間已經被設為該第二特定同步化傳送週期起始 傳送週期起护時門^ 通訊終端裝置的同步化 的同步化傳送遇期起始時間設=第定無=訊終端裝置 =置的同步化傳送週期起始時間;二無:電通訊* 參考圖叫),假如裝置Α 、。之,舉例來說, 將幻1851的同步化傳送 •斷出裝置Α1 1851已經 設為裝置Β"856 $同步化始時間(舉例來說,BPST) ,裝置 Α5 74 201012157 1855便可能接著會採取步驟用以同步於裝置a"⑸的 BPST,舉例來說,利用參考文件[4]中所提出的方法本申 請案中猶後同樣會揭示。同樣地,所有其它裝S A3至A4 1 853至1854亦可在它們判斷裝置A1 1851已經同步於裝置 U56之後同步於|置幻1851。於—實施例中僅當該 信標群中有-已經在特殊數量的先前超訊框中沒有移動其 BPST的最慢裝置時,μ]之巾 J中的方法才會在母一個超訊框中 e ❹ 繼續被某一裝置使用。 於一實施例中,該第二盔妗帝 第一無線電通讯終端裝置係和該第 一無線電通訊終端裝置相同類枣 N類1的無線電通訊終端裝置。 換&之,舉例來說,參考g 可圃18(a)’裝置A1 1851以及A1 1851 之、標群中的所有其它裝署 匕裴置Α3至Α5 1853至1855均传相 同類型的特定無線電通吒炊 ^ _糸才 %逋訊終端Μ,它們可以利用有槽偏 移TFC來進行通訊。 _ 圖23(b)所示的係用以在一 1 社‘、、、線電通訊系統中同步於一 第二無線電通訊終端裝置(圖中未顯示)的第-無線電通訊 終端裝置23 10。於—實施— 一 ° ^ „1π ^ ^ 咕 該第無線電通訊終端裝 置2310包括一第—判斷電 ^ ^ , , 峪2311 ’其會破配置成用以判斷 該第一無線電通訊終端裝置是 .^ ^ ^ 疋令已乡工在—段預設時間中沒 有改變其同步化傳送週期起 μ胡愁始時間。於—實 -無線電通訊終端裝置盥 歹』T该弟 特定無線電通訊終端奘¥ ^ 、嗬装m保 、蜎裝置,而該無線電通 定無線電通訊系統。 H既則係特 於一實施例中,該第一無 ,,、1電通訊終端裝置23 10可能 75 201012157 進一步包含一第二判斷電路2312,其會被配置成用以決定 該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間^ 例中,第二判斷電路2312會進-步被配置成;以 決疋該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈週期。 於一實施例中,該帛一無線電通訊終端n3i〇可食匕 進-步包含一同步化電路2313,其會被配置成用以在該: 二無線電通訊終端裴置已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變i 同步化傳送週期起始時間時將該第一無線電通訊终端裝置 ❹ =)的同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該第二無線電通訊終 知裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間。於—實施 步化電路2313會進一步被配置 ”同 级端奘署戢用以在該第二無線電通訊 、、端裝置已經在-段預設時間中 期起始時料將-虛擬時脈(其可能料化傳送週 端裝置的—暫存ϋΜ為—無線電通訊終 脈。 、線電通訊終端裝置的時 於一實施例中,該同步化傳 ❹ 期起始時間。 疋巧期起始時間為信標週 型的益線I:例中’該第二無線電通訊終端裝置為第-類 1的無線電通訊終端裝置,巧弟類 時間/頻率部分通訊,而沒有有二皮配置成用以僅提供有槽 於-實施例中,該第— 時間/頻率部分通訊。 二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置線=終端裘置㈣為第 槽時…頻率部分通訊 其會破配置成用以提供有 於电 移時間/頻率部分诵印 於-實施財,該㈣ 料^通訊。 领旱。卩分可能包含時間/頻率 76 201012157 〇 貫施例令,由該第一判斷電路23 j ι — 無線電通麟«置是^已經在—段預設 =第二 訊終端裝==間可能包含判斷該第二無線電通 預設數量的訊框及_訊框的至少其 中一者之中沒有改變其同步化傳送週期起始時㈤。具 ❸ ❹ 進-ΓΓΙ施例中’該第一無線電通訊終端裝置_可能 步包δ —第三判斷電路2314,其 兮坌一也括兩a 丹瓦m配置成用以判斷 二否二ΐ訊終端裝置2310的同步化傳送週期起始時 疋、!被設為該第二無線電通訊終端 送週期起始時間。 ㈣步化傳 =18(a)所不的係—實施例中的無線電通訊系統,其可 "*匕1 2 3至少—第—無線電通訊終端裝Α1 1851以及一笛 二無線電通訊終端震 第 ^ ^ ^ 舳裝置B1 1856。於一實施例中,該第一無 線電通訊終端裝置A1 1851可能會被配置成用 第 =電通訊終端裝置B1 1856是否已經在一段預設時間 改變其冋步化傳送週期起始時間。於-實施例中, =:線電通訊終端裝置A1 1851可能會被配置成用以 湘未無線電通訊終端裝置B1 1856的同步化傳送週 A _。於-實施财,該第—無線電通訊終端裝置 1 1851可能會被配置成用以在該第二無線電通訊終端裝 77 1 1856已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變其同步化傳送 2 週期起始時間時將該第一無線電通訊終端裝置AM”的 3 同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該H線電通訊終端裝置 201012157 B1觀的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 線電通訊系統係-特定無線電通訊系統 # ,該無 通訊系統中所包括的至少第一盔 、丹1,該無線電 無線電通訊終端裝置會係特綾通訊終端裝置與第二 於-實施例中,其中,:第、—線 削會進-步被配置成用以決定談第二電通轉端裝置Ai 置B1 1856的時脈週期。 X —…、線電通訊終端裝 於一實施例中,該第一無 © 會被配置成用以在該第1線雷s通訊终端裝i Ai 1851 經在一段預設時間中沒有改變其同步化端裝置B1 _已 時將一虛擬時脈(其可能传 、 送週期起始時間 v丹j戚係該第一無線電通 1851的一暫存器)設為該第二無 、、端裝置A1 fcAv 、、裏電通訊終端裝置的Bl? 於一實施例中,該同步化傳送週期起始時門^時脈。 信標週期起始時間。 巧。碍間可能係一 於一實施例中,马·筮_ A & 為第一類型的無後㈣ 通訊終端裝i B1 1856 提供有槽時間/頻率邱H 其會破配置成用以僅 分通訊。貝车^通訊’而沒有有槽偏移時間/頻率部 於f施例中,該第一無線電通訊終端裝 為第二類型的釭仏夏八!1851 供有槽時間/頻率Ar八、s -置成用以提 m〇 頻^分通訊以及有槽偏移時間/頻”㈣ 碼。於一實施例中,該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間/頻率 78 201012157 於一實施例中,由該第—盔 來判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置=終'裝置a"851 長預《c時間中沒有改變其同步化傳 ::已經在一 含判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置二:時間可能包 設數量的訊框及超訊框的至少其令一 疋否已經在預 步化傳送週期起始時間。 八一之_沒有改變其同 於-實施例中,該無線電通訊系 第三無線電通訊終端裝置A5 1855 b2t—步包含一 無線電通訊終端裝置A1 1851可、%例中,該第一 第一無線電通訊終端裝置配置成用以判斷該 時間是否已經被設為該第二:通=化傳送週期起始 的同步化傳送週期起始時間。於.B1 1856 電通訊終端裝X A5 185 彳中’㈣二無線 通訊终端穿置被配置成用以在該第-無線電 咬Μ第! 的同步化傳送週期起始時間已經被 ❹ 期St線電通訊終端…1 1856的同步化傳送週 該第三無線電通訊終端裝f Α5腕的同 送週期起始時間設為該第一無線電通訊終端裝置Μ 851的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 心1實施例中’該第三無線電通訊終端裝4 A5 1855 转二肖定無線電通訊終端裝置Al 1 85 1相同類型的 特疋無線電通訊終端裝置。 舍;實施例中’該第三無線電通訊終端裝置A5 1 855 :配置成用以在該第一無線電通訊終端裝置Μ Η”的 5 '傳送週期起始時間已經被設為該第二無線電通訊終 79 201012157 端裝置B1 1856的同步化傳送週期起始時間時將虛擬時脈 (其可能係該第三無線電通訊終端裝置A5 1855的一暫存器) 設為該第一無線電通訊終端裝置A 1 1 8 5 1的時脈。In the case of the surplus line, in step 2, the step 2 may include a step of determining the clock period of the device. For example, device A 185, 时 device B1 1856 clock cycle. Wireless == set Γ 2303 may include - if the first step: the step has not changed in a preset time... The specific no = time 'will be a virtual clock (which may be the [electric communication terminal device The register is set to the second specific to break the terminal. For example, if the shock Α 1185" 1856 has not changed more than 72 201012157 BPST in the preset number of super-sounds, the device A11851 It is possible to set a virtual clock (its buffer) to the clock of device B1 1856 so as to be synchronized to the device, in the embodiment, the synchronization transfer period starts:: period start time (BPST) ). In the case of ''L' week (four), (4) two no (four) communication terminal device type specific money and communication final set, with Wei _ Lu slotted time / frequency part of the communication, and there is no slot offset time for communication. Say 'the second specific radio communication terminal device B: system - according to view A [immediate radio transceiver end may only use the slotted time / frequency portion without offset to enter ~ and can not use slotted bias The TFC (TFC offset 〇, TFC ,, TFC offset 2) is used for communication. 1. In an embodiment, the specific radio communication terminal device of the first radio communication terminal type will be of the following type: Frequency part communication and slotted offset _ rate part pass = ° For example, refer to the example related to ® 18(4), device A = coffee to (10) is the second type (four) fixed radio communication terminal device, two =: fixed TFC ( TFC offset.) and higher slotted offset tfc (tfc offset 丨m TFC offset 2) both (four) line communication (TFC; ^ embodiment, the time / frequency part includes time / frequency code In an embodiment, determining that the second radio communication has been in a preset time There is a change in the time interval including the start of the cycle, and the first radio communication terminal device has not changed its synchronization transmission in at least one of the frame and the hyperframe of the preset number 73 201012157. Cycle start time. For example, referring to the figure, device A1 1851 may determine whether device B1 1856 has been in a preset number of hyperframes, for example, in the first six superframes, change its synchronization. The transmission cycle start time (for example, BPST). In an embodiment, the method is implemented by a specific radio communication terminal device. ^ J 1 1 further includes a step 2304 for determining the first specific Whether the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the radio communication terminal device has been set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the second specific radio communication terminal device. For example, referring to FIG. _, the device 1111 may determine the device Almi Has it been adjusted (4); 2 Alignment device B1 1856 BPST ° other device AU Α 5 1852 Main 1855 can be judged from the BPST of the Axi 1 1851 No has been adjusted ^ to align device mi856. ❹ If the ^ ^ ^, the method may further include step 2305 'false time has been set to the second specific synchronization transfer cycle start transfer cycle Guard time gate ^ Synchronization of the communication terminal device Synchronization transmission start time setting = first no = terminal device = set synchronization transmission cycle start time; two no: electrical communication * reference picture called) If the device is, for example, the synchronized transmission/disconnection device Α1 1851 of the magic 1851 has been set to the device Β"856 $ synchronization start time (for example, BPST), device Α 5 74 201012157 1855 It may be possible to take steps to synchronize the BPST of the device a"(5), for example, using the method proposed in the reference [4], which will be disclosed later in this application. Similarly, all other devices S A3 through A4 1 853 through 1854 may also be synchronized to | illusion 1851 after they have determined that device A1 1851 has been synchronized to device U56. In the embodiment, only if there is a slowest device in the beacon group that has not moved its BPST in a special number of previous hyperframes, the method in the towel J will be in the parent frame. Medium e ❹ continues to be used by a device. In one embodiment, the second pedestal first radio communication terminal device and the first radio communication terminal device are the same type of radio communication terminal device of the N class 1. For example, refer to g 圃 18(a) 'Devices A1 1851 and A1 1851, all other installations in the group Α3 to Α5 1853 to 1855 all transmit the same type of specific radio Through the ^ 糸 糸 逋 逋 逋 逋 terminal, they can use the slotted offset TFC to communicate. _ Figure 23(b) shows a first-radio communication terminal device 23 10 synchronized with a second radio communication terminal device (not shown) in a line communication system. The first radio communication terminal device 2310 includes a first determining circuit ^^, and 峪2311' is configured to determine that the first radio communication terminal device is .^ ^ ^ 疋 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已 已嗬 m m m m , , , 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电 无线电a judging circuit 2312, which is configured to determine a synchronization transmission period start time of the second radio communication terminal device. In the example, the second judging circuit 2312 is further configured to: The clock cycle of the radio communication terminal device. In one embodiment, the first radio communication terminal n3i 〇 edible step-by-step includes a synchronization circuit 2313 that is configured to be used at: Setting the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device ❹ =) to the second radio communication terminal device when the terminal device has not changed the i synchronization transmission cycle start time for a predetermined period of time Synchronization transfer cycle start time. The implementation step circuit 2313 is further configured to be "on the same level" for use in the second radio communication, the end device has been in the middle of the preset period of time It is expected that the virtual clock (which may be used to transmit the peripheral device) is temporarily stored as the radio communication terminal. In the case of the line communication terminal device, in the embodiment, the synchronization transmission period starts. The starting time of the tricky period is the beacon week type benefit line I: In the example, the second radio communication terminal device is the first class 1 radio communication terminal device, and the Qiaodi class time/frequency portion communicates without The second skin is configured to provide only slots in the embodiment, the first time/frequency portion of the communication. The second type of radio communication terminal device line = the terminal device (four) is the first slot... the frequency portion communication will break The setting is used to provide the time/frequency portion of the electromigration to be printed on the - implementation, the (four) material ^ communication. The drought may be included in the time / frequency 76 201012157 施 施 令 , , , , 23 j ι — radio tonglin «set is ^ is already in the paragraph preset = second terminal terminal == may contain at least one of the frame and the frame for determining the preset number of the second radio pass There is no change in the start of the synchronization transfer cycle (5). In the embodiment, the first radio communication terminal device _ possible step packet δ - the third judging circuit 2314, which also includes two a The Danwa m is configured to determine the start of the synchronization transmission cycle of the second terminal device 2310, !! It is set as the start time of the second radio communication terminal. (4) Step by step = 18 (a) is not the system - the radio communication system in the embodiment, which can be "*匕1 2 3 at least - the first radio communication terminal assembly 1 1851 and a flute two radio communication terminal ^ ^ ^ 舳 Device B1 1856. In one embodiment, the first radio communication terminal device A1 1851 may be configured to change its step-by-step transmission cycle start time with the = communication terminal device B1 1856 for a predetermined period of time. In the embodiment, =: the line communication terminal device A1 1851 may be configured to synchronize the transmission week A_ with the radio communication terminal device B1 1856. In the implementation, the first radio communication terminal device 1 1851 may be configured to not change the synchronization transmission 2 cycle start time in the second radio communication terminal 77 1 1856 for a predetermined period of time. The start time of the synchronization transmission cycle of the first radio communication terminal device AM" is set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the H-line communication terminal device 201012157 B1. Line communication system-specific radio communication System #, the at least first helmet, Dan 1, included in the non-communication system, the radio communication terminal device is a special communication terminal device and the second embodiment, wherein: the first line cutting The further step is configured to determine the clock period of the second electrical relay device Ai set B1 1856. X - ..., the line communication terminal is installed in an embodiment, the first no © will be configured to use In the first line of lightning s communication terminal installed i Ai 1851 has not changed its synchronization end device B1 _ has a virtual clock in a predetermined period of time (it may pass, send cycle start time v Dan j戚A temporary register of the first radio pass 1851 is set as the second no-end, the end device A1 fcAv, and the B1 of the radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the synchronization transmission cycle starts at the gate time. The start time of the beacon period. It may be that in one embodiment, Ma·筮_ A & provides the slot time/frequency for the first type of no-four (4) communication terminal installed i B1 1856 H will be configured to be used for communication only. Bayer ^ communication ' without slot offset time / frequency part in the f example, the first radio communication terminal is installed as the second type of Xia Ba! 1851 is provided with slot time/frequency Ar 八, s - set to improve m 〇 frequency communication and slotted offset time / frequency" (four) code. In an embodiment, the time/frequency portions may include time/frequency 78 201012157. In an embodiment, the second radio communication terminal device=final device a"851 long pre-c The synchronization transmission has not been changed in time:: at least one of the frame and the hyperframe that determines the number of possible time packets of the second radio communication terminal device 2: the time has elapsed since the pre-transmission transmission cycle Start time. In the embodiment, the radio communication system third radio communication terminal device A5 1855 b2t-step comprises a radio communication terminal device A1 1851, in the example, the first first radio communication The terminal device is configured to determine whether the time has been set to the second: the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the start of the transmission cycle. The .B1 1856 electric communication terminal is equipped with X A5 185. The '(four) two wireless communication terminal is configured to be used for the start of the synchronous transmission cycle of the first radio bite! Synchronization transmission week of the communication terminal...1 1856 The co-transmission cycle start time of the third radio communication terminal is set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device 851. In the embodiment of the core 1, the third radio communication terminal is equipped with the same type of radio communication terminal device as the A1 1855. In the embodiment, the third radio communication terminal device A5 1 855 is configured to be set to the second radio communication end at the 5 'transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device Μ 79 201012157 The synchronization transmission period start time of the end device B1 1856 sets the virtual clock (which may be a register of the third radio communication terminal device A5 1855) as the first radio communication terminal device A 1 1 8 5 1 clock.

6.1増強难BP交換IE 由於傳播環境、移動能力、或是其它效應的改變的關 係,利用二或多個未對齊BPST的裝置可能會相互接觸。這 可能會導致重疊的超訊框。所收到之具有表示一 BPST並未 對齊某一裝置本身之BPST之合法標頭檢查序列(HCS, Header Check Sequence)及訊框檢查序列(FCS,Frame Check Sequence)的信標稱為異型信標。由一異型信標中的BPST 與BP長度所定義的BP則稱為異型BP。 於一實施例中,會提供一增強型BP交換IE,用以表示 一裝置將改變其BPST以便對齊一異型BP。 圖24所示的係本文提出的增強型BP交換IE 2400的格 式。6.1 Reluctance to BP Exchange IE Devices that utilize two or more unaligned BPSTs may come into contact with each other due to changes in the propagation environment, mobility, or other effects. This can result in overlapping hyperframes. The received beacon with a legal header header sequence (HCS, Header Check Sequence) and a frame check sequence (FCS) indicating that a BPST is not aligned with a BPST of the device itself is called a heterogeneous beacon. . The BP defined by BPST and BP length in a heterogeneous beacon is called a heterogeneous BP. In one embodiment, an enhanced BP switching IE is provided to indicate that a device will change its BPST to align a heterogeneous BP. Figure 24 shows the format of the Enhanced BP Switched IE 2400 proposed herein.

從圖中可以看出,該增強型BP交換IE 2400可能包含 一要件ID攔位240 1,用以表示該資訊要件的類型。該增強 型BP交換IE 2400可能進一步包含一長度欄位2402,用以 表示該IE的酬載的長度。於一實施例中,該增強型BP交 換IE 2400可能進一步包含一 BP移動向下計數欄位2403。 於一實施例中,該增強型BP交換IE 2400可能進一步包含 一信標槽偏移欄位2404。於一實施例中,該增強型BP交換 IE 2400可能進一步包含一時脈週期偏移欄位2405。於一實 施例中,該增強型BP交換IE 2400可能進一步包含一 BPST 201012157 偏移欄位2406。 於—實施例中’ BP移動向下計數欄位24〇3可能會被設 為在該裝置調整其BPST以便對齊其BPST和另一裝置之 PST之刖的超訊框數量。於一實施例中,假如Bp移動向 下計數為零,下—個信標訊框便會在此1£所指定的時間處 被傳送。 只卿例T ^耳两秒襴叫首攸汉馮一正 數,讓該裝置在改變其BPST時藉以調整其信標槽編號;或 者會被設為零’用以表示該裝置將㈣ecma⑴規格中所 給定的正常BP加入規則來加入該異型Bp。 時脈週期偏移欄位24G5會被設為該異型裝置的時脈週 月要大於該裝置之虛擬時脈要與之同步化的該裝置之信 :中最慢裝置之目前時脈週期的正時間數額,其係以^ ^秒為單位^PST偏移欄位繼會被設為 其抑ST的正時間數額,其係以奈秒為單位。要^ 圖25(相不的係用於在—無線電通訊系統巾同步化第 複數個無線電通訊終端粜 端裝H置和第—複油無線電通訊終 _ 、實施例令,該方法可能包含於該等第 〜複數個無線電通訊終端裝 ψ ^ 中的…、線電通訊終端裝置 中實行步驟25〇1,用以也々斗妨祕 响展置 跑桂 决定該等第一複數個無線電通訊故 線電通矾終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起& 時間。於-實施例令“ 疋㈣起始 無结带該方法可能包含於該等第二複數個 稞線電通訊終端裝置中 後數個 驟25n7 ra 中的该無線電通訊終端裝置中實行步 碎2502,用以開始推 ,只α歹 仃下面處理:將該等第二複數個無線 81 201012157 電通訊終端驶 週期起始時間電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送 的該無線電= 個無線電通訊終端裝置中 時間。於經決定的时化傳送週期起始 益線電通^ 該方法可能包含於該等第二複數個 驟2則,。用=置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置中實行步 個無線電通1故 步化訊息,其包含和該等第一複數 定的同步化錢置之經決 化傳送週期起始時間有關的資訊。於— ❹ 等第—複數個無線電龍終端裝置和該等第二複數 健線電通訊終端裝置皆係—料無線電通訊系統中的特 疋無線電通訊終端裝置。As can be seen from the figure, the enhanced BP exchange IE 2400 may contain a requirement ID block 240 1 to indicate the type of the information element. The enhanced BP exchange IE 2400 may further include a length field 2402 to indicate the length of the payload of the IE. In an embodiment, the enhanced BP exchange IE 2400 may further include a BP move down count field 2403. In an embodiment, the enhanced BP switching IE 2400 may further include a beacon slot offset field 2404. In an embodiment, the enhanced BP switching IE 2400 may further include a clock period offset field 2405. In one embodiment, the enhanced BP exchange IE 2400 may further include a BPST 201012157 offset field 2406. In the embodiment, the BP move down count field 24〇3 may be set to the number of hyperframes after the device adjusts its BPST to align its BPST with the PST of another device. In one embodiment, if the Bp movement counts down to zero, the next beacon frame will be transmitted at the time specified by this £1. Only the case of T ^ ear two seconds screamed the first Han Feng a positive number, so that the device can adjust its beacon slot number when changing its BPST; or will be set to zero 'to indicate that the device will (4) ecma (1) specifications A given normal BP join rule is added to join the heteromorphic Bp. The clock cycle offset field 24G5 is set to be the time of the device of the profiled device to be greater than the time of the device to which the virtual clock of the device is to be synchronized: the current clock cycle of the slowest device in the middle The amount of time, which is in units of ^^ seconds ^PST offset field will be set to the positive time amount of ST, which is in nanoseconds. Figure 25 (The phase is used to synchronize the radio communication system, the number of radio communication terminals, the H-position and the first-re-oil radio communication terminal _, the embodiment order, the method may be included in In the first to the plurality of radio communication terminals, the ..., the line communication terminal device is implemented in step 25〇1, and is used to determine the first plurality of radio communication lines. The synchronization transmission period of the terminal device is from & time. In the embodiment, "疋(四) starts the no-banding. The method may be included in the second plurality of twisted-wire communication terminals, and the subsequent steps 25n7 The radio communication terminal device in ra performs a step 2502 for starting the push, and only the following processing: synchronizing the second plurality of wireless 81 201012157 electric communication terminal driving cycle start time communication terminal device Transmitting the radio = time in the radio communication terminal device. Starting at the determined timed transmission period, the method may be included in the second plurality of steps 2, = The radio communication terminal device that is centered implements a step radio communication 1 step-by-step message, which includes information relating to the start time of the first plurality of synchronized memory sets of the determined transmission period. ❹ The first plurality of radio dragon terminal devices and the second plurality of health line communication terminal devices are all special radio communication terminal devices in the radio communication system.

換言之,舉例來說,參考圖18(a),通訊裝置A1 1851 可能會從裝置A4 1854處皆收-信標並且判斷來自A4 1854 的該信標係—異型信標,這代表裝置A4 1854的BPST並未 對齊裝置A1的BPST。於此範例中,假設該等第—複數個 裝置A3至A4(1853與1854)的BPST並未對齊該等第-福 數個裝置_A5(則與1855)的刪[根據一 的方法,舉例來說,裝置A1 1851可能會以來自A4 1854 的異型信標的接收時間為基礎來決定裝置A4 1854的同步 化傳送週期起始時間(舉例來說,BpST)。於此範例中假設 裝置A1 1851會以由裝置A1 1851所決定之裝置A4 1854 的BPST為基礎判斷出裝置a! 1851快於裝置A4 1854。接 著’裝置A1 1851必須採取步驟來調整其bpst,以便對齊 裝置A4 1854的BPST,俾使裝置A1 1851會同步於裝置A4 82 201012157 1854。換今夕 、、 裝置A1 1851可能會將裝置A1 1851的同步 化傳送週期起始時間(舉例來說,BPST)設為裝置A4 1854 、、的同步化傳送週期起始時間(BPST)。設定裝置A1 1851 之 β·ρςτ_^ , “ 的方式可能係經由設定一虛擬時脈來進行, :後會在本申請案中作說明。進-步言之,裝I: Α1 1851 可能會產生—同步化訊息,其包含和裝置Α4 1854之經決 疋的同步化傳送週期起始時間有關的資訊。舉例來說參 考圖24,該同步化訊息可能包括圖24中所提出的增強型 ΒΡ父換ΙΕ要件24〇〇。該增強型Βρ交換ΙΕ要件中的 移動向下計數襴位24〇3會被用來表示該裝置Al ΐ85ι要開 始調整其BPST以對齊裝置A4 1854之BPST的時間。於一 實施例中,該增強型BP交換IE要件24〇〇會被併入一特定 應用資訊要件(ASIE)之中並且會被裝置A1 1851在其信標 之中發送。舉例來說,可以根據圖8中所提出的格式來編 碼該ASIE。 於一實施例中,步驟2501可能進一步包括於該等第二 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉 例來說,裝置A1 185丨)中實行:決定該等第一複數個無線 電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝 置A4 1854)的時脈週期。 於一實施例中’步驟2504可能進一步包括於該等第一 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉 例來說,裝置A1 1851)中實行.將虛擬時脈(其可能係該等 第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝 83 201012157 置(舉例來說,裝置A1 1851)的一暫存器)設為該等第—複數 個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例 說,裝置A4 1854)的時脈。 來 於一實施例中,步驟2503可能進一步包括於該等第二 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置 例來說’裝置A1 1851)中實行:產生一同步化訊息,其包 含和該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電= 訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置A4 1854)之經決定的時 有關的資訊。 Θ 於一實施例中,該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 為第一類型,而該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裳置=第 二類型。於一實施例中,該等第一類型的無線電通訊终端 裝置會被配置成用以僅提供有槽時心頻率部分通訊而不提 供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。於—實施例中,該等第二 類型的無線電通訊終端裝置會被配置成用以提供有槽時^ 頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。舉例來說, ❹ 該等第_減個無、㈣通料端裝置可㈣減此财⑴ 標準。該等第二複數個益始+ - 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置則可能能夠使 用有槽偏移時間/頻率部分來進行通訊。 於一實施例中,該同牛儿^ ώ ^ 步化訊息包含一根據可由第二類 型無線電通訊終端裝罾央缺m μ 置來解碼之第二通訊協定格式被編碼 的特定應用資訊要件。 於一實施例中,該方、土 该方去可能進一步包含於該等第二複 數個無線電通訊終端奘署 置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置中實 84 201012157 行步驟2504,用以傳送該同步化訊息給該等第二複數個無 線電通訊終端裝置令的至少一其它無線電通訊終端裝置。 換言之,舉例來說,第二類型的裝置A1 1851可能會傳送 包含增強型BP交換IE要件2400的八幻£給該等第二複數 個無線電通訊終端裝置中的A5 1855。 於-實施例中,該等第-複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 為第一無線電通訊終端裝置群中的成員。於一實施例中,In other words, for example, referring to FIG. 18(a), the communication device A1 1851 may receive a beacon from the device A4 1854 and determine the beacon system-shaped beacon from A4 1854, which represents the device A4 1854. BPST does not align BPST of device A1. In this example, it is assumed that the BPSTs of the first plurality of devices A3 to A4 (1853 and 1854) are not aligned with the deletion of the first-fourth devices _A5 (then and 1855). In other words, device A1 1851 may determine the synchronization transfer cycle start time (for example, BpST) of device A4 1854 based on the reception time of the alien beacon from A4 1854. In this example, it is assumed that the device A1 1851 determines that the device a! 1851 is faster than the device A4 1854 based on the BPST of the device A4 1854 determined by the device A1 1851. Next, the device A1 1851 must take steps to adjust its bpst to align the BPST of the device A4 1854 so that the device A1 1851 is synchronized to the device A4 82 201012157 1854. For the current day, device A1 1851 may set the synchronization transfer cycle start time (for example, BPST) of device A1 1851 to the synchronization transfer cycle start time (BPST) of device A4 1854. Setting the β·ρςτ_^ of the device A1 1851, “The method may be performed by setting a virtual clock. This will be explained later in this application. In the first step, I: Α1 1851 may be generated— Synchronizing the message, which includes information relating to the determined synchronization transmission cycle start time of the device 。 4 1854. For example, referring to FIG. 24, the synchronization message may include the enhanced ΒΡ parent modification proposed in FIG. The moving down count position 24〇3 in the enhanced ΙΕ ΙΕ ΙΕ 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会 会In an embodiment, the enhanced BP exchange IE element 24 will be incorporated into a specific application information element (ASIE) and sent by the device A1 1851 among its beacons. For example, according to Figure 8 The format proposed in the encoding the ASIE. In an embodiment, the step 2501 may further comprise the radio communication terminal device (for example, the device A1 185A) in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices. Implementing: determining a clock cycle of the radio communication terminal device (for example, device A4 1854) in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices. In an embodiment, 'step 2504 may be further included in the first The radio communication terminal device (for example, device A1 1851) in a plurality of radio communication terminal devices is implemented in a virtual clock (which may be the radio communication terminal in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices) A register of 2010 20101157 (for example, a register of device A1 1851) is set as the clock of the radio communication terminal device (for example, device A4 1854) in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices. In an embodiment, step 2503 may be further included in the radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices, for example, 'device A1 1851': generating a synchronization message, including The execution of the radio = terminal device (for example, device A4 1854) in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices Information relating to the time. In an embodiment, the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices are of a first type, and the second plurality of radio communication terminals are of a second type. In an embodiment The first type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide only slotted heart frequency portion communication without providing slot offset time/frequency portion communication. In an embodiment, the second type The radio communication terminal device is configured to provide a frequency portion communication and a slot offset time/frequency portion communication when there is a slot. For example, ❹ the first _ minus one, (four) the hopper device can be (4) Reduce this fiscal (1) standard. The second plurality of benefits + - a plurality of radio communication terminal devices may be able to communicate using the slotted offset time/frequency portion. In one embodiment, the same message includes a specific application information element encoded according to a second protocol format that can be decoded by the second type of radio communication terminal. In an embodiment, the party and the party may further include the radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of radio communication terminals, in step 2044, in order to transmit the synchronization. The message is to at least one other radio communication terminal device of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices. In other words, for example, the second type of device A1 1851 may transmit an octave containing the enhanced BP exchange IE element 2400 to the A5 1855 of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices. In an embodiment, the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices are members of the first radio communication terminal device group. In an embodiment,

該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第二無線電通訊終 端農置群中的成員。 曰實施射,該等無線電通訊終端裝置群可能為或 疋可能包含無線電通訊終端裝置信標群。 H週#實施例中’該同步化傳送週期起始時間可能包含 7週期起始時間和信標週期起始時間偏移中至少其中一 必項1851所表示的起始時間可能係裝置A1 1⑸ 移整其_以便對齊裝置A4咖之BPST的時間偏 於一實施例中 碼。 該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間/頻率 於一實施例中,兮古 數個無線電通訊終端i置包含於該等第二複 端裝置中實行步驟25G5 —其它無線電通訊終 施例中,該方法可能進―用以接收該同步化訊息。於一實 通訊終端裝置中的 含於該等第二複數個無線電 行步驟2506, 二二1它無線電通訊終端裝置中實 • I等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裴置 85 201012157 中的S亥至少—其它無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期 起始時間設為該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裴置中的該 無線電通訊終端裝置之經推知的同步化傳送週期起始時 間。換S之,舉例來說,參考圖18(a),在裝置A1 1851送 出ASIE之後,其它裝置(舉例來說,裝置A5 1855)便會接 收且解碼該來自裝置A1 185丨的asie。進一步言之,裝置 A5 1855可能還會設定用以調整其BpsT以便和裝置μ 1851 —致的時間(其暗喻和裝置α4 ι854 一致)。The second plurality of radio communication terminal devices are members of the second radio communication terminal farm group.曰 The implementation of the radio communication terminal device group may or may include a radio communication terminal device beacon group. In the H week # embodiment, the synchronization transmission cycle start time may include a start time represented by at least one of the mandatory start time and the beacon period start time offset, which may be caused by the device A1 1(5) The time to align the BPST of the device A4 is biased to the code in an embodiment. The time/frequency portions may include time/frequency. In an embodiment, a plurality of radio communication terminals i are included in the second duplex devices to perform step 25G5 - other radio communication terminations, the method May enter to receive the synchronization message. The second plurality of radio line steps 2506 are included in the second communication terminal device, and the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices in the radio communication terminal device are at least 80 in the 2010-12157 - The synchronization transmission period start time of the other radio communication terminal device is set to the inferred synchronization transmission cycle start time of the radio communication terminal device in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices. For example, referring to Fig. 18(a), after the device A1 1851 sends the ASIE, other devices (for example, the device A5 1855) will receive and decode the asie from the device A1 185A. Further, device A5 1855 may also be set to adjust its BpsT to coincide with device μ 1851 (the metaphor and device α4 ι854 are identical).

於一實施例中,步驟25〇6可能進一步包括於該等第二 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少—其它無線電通訊 終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置Α5 1855)中實行:將虛擬時脈(其 可月匕係該等第^複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少一 其=無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置A5 UK)的—暫 存為)-又為该等第-複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該益線 電通訊終«置(舉例來說,裝置Α4 1854)㈣脈。·,、、 圖25(b)所不的係在—無線電通訊系統中用以同步於 第一無線電通訊終端農置(其位於第二複數個無線電通訊 端裝置之中)的第-無線電通訊終端裝置hi G(其位於第 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置之中)。於-實施例中,該等 一複數個無線電通料端裝置與料第二複數個無線電 ⑽端裝置皆為-特定無線電通訊系統㈣特^無 訊終端裝置。In an embodiment, step 25〇6 may further comprise performing in the at least one other radio communication terminal device (for example, device 15 1855) of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices: the virtual clock (the calendar may be the at least one of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices (for example, the device A5 UK) temporarily stored) - and the first plurality The line communication in the radio communication terminal device is set (for example, device Α 4 1854) (four) pulse. The second radio communication terminal is used in the radio communication system to synchronize with the first radio communication terminal (which is located in the second plurality of radio communication devices). The device hi G (which is located in the plurality of radio communication terminal devices). In an embodiment, the plurality of radio transceiver devices and the second plurality of radio (10) devices are all - a radio communication system (4).

於-實施例中’該第—無線電通訊終端農置2別可能 包含-判斷電路2511 ’其會被配置成用以決定該第二無線 86 201012157 電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間— 中,該第一無線電通訊終端裝置2510可铲勺二—實施例 路如,其會被配置成用以將該第一無線^通;^化電 25H)的同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該 電裝置 端裝置之經決定的时化傳送週期起始相。、、、線電通訊終 於:實施例中,判斷電路2511會被配置成心 等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中 、 ❿ 終端裝置的時脈週期。 ㈣第二無線電通訊 於一實施例中,該时化電路2512會被配 虛擬時脈(其可能係該卜無線電通轉端裝置的 設為该第二無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈。 ) 於一實施例中,該等第-複數個無線電通訊 為第—類型’豸等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第置 類型。於-實施例中’料第—類型的無線電通訊終端裝 置會被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移 時間/頻率部分通訊’而該等第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝 置則會被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提 供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 於一實施例中,該第-無線電通訊終端裝置251〇可能 包含一產生電路2513,其會被配置成用以產生—同步化訊 息’其包含和該等第-複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該 第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間有關 的資訊。 於一實施例中,該同步化訊息包含和該第二無線電通 87 201012157 机終端裝置 -'州'^用负丨呵列貝甜* 〇 於實施例中,胃$步化訊息包含一根據可由第二類 型無線電通訊終端裝詈决姑戌 哀置來解碼之第二通訊協定格式被編碼 的特定應用資訊要件。 '實施例中,该第—無線電通訊終端裝置25 10可能 傳送電路25 14 ’其會被配置成用以將該同步化訊息 該等第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的至少一其 它無線電通訊終端裝置。 少其 於一實施例中,該笨笛 ...^ 7 A 一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 為第一無線電通訊終端裝置 衣直 該等第n 装置群中的成員。於-實施例中, -複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 端裝置群中的成員。 無踝電通甙終 於一實施例中,該等無線電通訊 通訊終端裝置信標群。 、鳊裝置群為無線電 信標週期起始時間 者 於一實施例中,該同步化傳送週期起始時間可能包含 信標週期起始時間偏移中至少其中: 實施例中 於 〇 於 包括第 ,該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間/頻率 實施例中,本發明描板 複數個I 6 八一種無線電通訊系統,其 ' 歿數個無線電通訊終端奘番再 通訊終端裝置。一 和第二複數個無線電 〜A % 一實施例中,該盔妯咖= 疋無線電通訊系統,其中,…‘.,、線電通訊系統係-特 端裝置和料第:複數個複數個無線電通訊終 無線電通鱗端裝置㈣特定無 88 201012157 線電通訊終端裝置。圖18(a)便圖解一種根據一實施例的無 線電通訊系統1800。 ;實施例中’該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 中的一無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置Λ1 1851)會被 置成用以決定該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的 —無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置A4 1854)的同步化 參 鲁 =it期起始時間。於—實施例中’該無線電通訊終端裝 851還會被配置成用以實行將裝置A1 1851的同步化 送週期起始時間設為該等第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝 置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置A4 1854)之 =定的同步化傳送週期起始時間。於—實施例中,該無 :電通訊終端裝置A1 1851還會被配置成用以實行產生一 5女 心其包含和该經決定的同步化傳送週期起始時 = 於一實施W步化訊息包含-根據 訊=置A:個無線電通訊終端裝置中的-無線電通 定庳=1855料H訊Μ格缝編碼的特 疋應用資訊要件。 t的一實施例中’该等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 配置成用、2通訊終端/置(舉例來說,裝置A11851)會被 置中的^ π ·&該等第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝 中的該無線電通訊级端装署f奧 時脈週期。社、裝置(舉例來說,裝置A4 1854)的 中的-無f該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置A11851)會被 89 201012157 用以實行:將虛擬時脈(其可能係該等第 線電通訊終端裝置中的一無線電通訊終端 =,、 裝置Aimi)的-暫存器)設為該等第__複數個 終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置(舉線電通= 1854)的時脈。 衣置A4 於一實施例中,該同步化訊息包含和該等第 無線電通訊終端裝置巾的該無線電通料端裝置之經 的時脈週期有關的資訊。 、 於-實施例中,該等第—複數個無線電通訊終端装置 為第,,而該等第二複數個無線電通訊终端裝 一類型。於一實施例中,該等第一類型 ‘、、、 F W ^ s? ® 〇' m 、,、、電通訊終端 :會被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提 供有槽偏移時…頻率部分通訊,而該等第二__ 通訊終端裝置則會被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通 訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 於一實施例中,該同步化訊息包含一根據可由第 2㈣通訊終端裝置來解碼之^通訊心格式被編碼 的特足應用資訊要件。 於一實施例中,無線電通訊終端裝置Α1 1851還會被 配置成用以傳送該同步化訊息給該等第二複數個無線電通 訊終端裝置中的至少m線電通訊終端裝置( 說’裝置A5 1855)。 於一實施例中,該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 為第一特定無線電通訊終端裝置群中的成員。於一實施例 201012157 中,該等第二複數❹線電通訊終端裝置為第 電通訊終端裝置群中的成員。 …、綠 於—實施例中,該等特定無魏雷、s μ μ ,^ θ 又熟線電通訊終端裝置群可能 為或疋可能包含特定無線電通訊終端裝置信桿群。 於—實施例中,該同步化傳送週期起ϋ間可能包含 #標週期起始時間和信標週期起始時間偏移中至少其中一 於一實施例中’該等時間/頻率部分可能包含時間/頻率 於-實施例中,該至少-其它無線電通訊終端裝置(舉 例來說’裝置Α5 1855)會被配置成用以實行:接收該同步 化訊息。於一實施例中’該至少一其它無線電通訊終端裝 ,(舉例來說,裝置Α5 1855)會被配置成用以將該至少—其 它無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間設為經 推知的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 ‘、'、In the embodiment, the first radio communication terminal 2 may include - determination circuit 2511 'which is configured to determine the start time of the synchronization transmission cycle of the second wireless 86 201012157 telecommunication terminal device - The first radio communication terminal device 2510 can be configured to set the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first wireless communication device 25H to be set. The determined timing of the electrical device end device is the beginning phase of the transmission cycle. The line communication is terminated in the embodiment: the determination circuit 2511 is configured to be a clock cycle of the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices and the terminal device. (4) Second Radio Communication In an embodiment, the timing circuit 2512 is assigned a virtual clock (which may be the clock of the radio communication terminal device set to the second radio communication terminal device). In an embodiment, the first plurality of radio communications are of a first type of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices of the first type. In the embodiment, the 'type-of-type radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication' and the second type of radio communication terminal The device will then be configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In an embodiment, the first radio communication terminal device 251A may include a generating circuit 2513 configured to generate a synchronization message 'which includes and is included in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices The first radio communication terminal device synchronizes the information about the start time of the transmission cycle. In an embodiment, the synchronization message includes and the second radio pass 87 201012157 machine terminal device - 'state' ^ with negative 丨 列 贝 甜 甜 甜 * 实施 实施 实施 实施 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃 胃The second type of radio communication terminal is configured to determine the specific application information element to be encoded in the decoded second communication protocol format. In an embodiment, the first radio communication terminal device 25 10 may transmit a circuit 25 14 'which may be configured to use the synchronization message to address at least one other of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices Device. In less than one embodiment, the plurality of radio communication terminal devices are members of the nth device group in the first radio communication terminal device. In an embodiment, - a plurality of members of the group of radio communication terminal device devices. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device beacon group. And the device group is a radio beacon period start time. In an embodiment, the synchronization transmission cycle start time may include at least one of a beacon period start time offset: in the embodiment, The time/frequency portions may include time/frequency embodiments. The present invention depicts a plurality of I 6 eight radio communication systems, which employ a plurality of radio communication terminals to communicate with the communication terminal device. One and a second plurality of radios ~A % In one embodiment, the helmet is a radio communication system, wherein ...',, the line communication system is a special device and a material: a plurality of radios Communication terminal radio channel scale device (4) specific no 88 201012157 line communication terminal device. Figure 18 (a) illustrates a radio communication system 1800 in accordance with an embodiment. In the embodiment, a radio communication terminal device (for example, device 11 1851) of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is configured to determine the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices - Synchronization of the radio communication terminal device (for example, device A4 1854) refers to the start time of the itit period. In the embodiment, the radio communication terminal assembly 851 is further configured to perform the synchronization transmission period start time of the device A1 1851 as the radio communication terminal in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices. The device (for example, device A4 1854) = the determined synchronization transfer cycle start time. In the embodiment, the non-electrical communication terminal device A1 1851 is further configured to perform the generation of a female heart and its determined synchronization transmission cycle start = an implementation of the W step message includes - According to the signal = set A: a radio communication terminal device - radio pass 庳 = 1855 material H signal Μ grid coding special application information requirements. In an embodiment of t, 'the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices are configured to use, 2 communication terminals/set (for example, device A11851) to be centered ^ π · & the first plurality The radio communication terminal installed in the radio communication terminal is equipped with a clock cycle. The second plurality of radio communication terminal devices (for example, device A11851) of the device, device (for example, device A4 1854) will be implemented by 89 201012157: The clock (which may be a radio communication terminal of the first line communication terminal device, - the device Aimi) is set to be the radio communication terminal device of the plurality of terminal devices The clock (wired line = 1854). The clothing A4 is in an embodiment, the synchronization message containing information relating to the clock cycle of the radio communication device of the first radio communication terminal device. In the embodiment, the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices are the first, and the second plurality of radio communication terminals are of a type. In an embodiment, the first type ', , , FW ^ s? ® 〇 ' m , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , , When the slot is offset, the frequency portion is communicated, and the second __ communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. In one embodiment, the synchronization message includes a special application information element encoded according to a communication core format that can be decoded by the second (four) communication terminal device. In an embodiment, the radio communication terminal device Α1 1851 is further configured to transmit the synchronization message to at least one of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices (said 'device A5 1855 ). In one embodiment, the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices are members of the first particular group of radio communication terminal devices. In an embodiment 201012157, the second plurality of wireless communication terminal devices are members of the first communication terminal device group. ..., green - In the embodiment, the specific Weiwei, s μ μ , ^ θ and cooked line communication terminal device groups may or may contain a specific radio communication terminal device beacon group. In an embodiment, the synchronization transmission period may include at least one of a #标 period start time and a beacon period start time offset in the embodiment, where the time/frequency portion may include time/ In the embodiment, the at least-other radio communication terminal device (for example 'device 1 5 1855') is configured to perform: receiving the synchronization message. In one embodiment, the at least one other radio communication terminal, for example, device 15 1855, is configured to set the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the at least other radio communication terminal devices to The inferred synchronization transfer cycle start time. ‘,’,

於-實施例中’該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 中的該至少一其它無線電通訊終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置Α5 1 8 5 5)會被配置成用以實行·’將虛擬時脈(其可能係該等第_ 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少一立 八匕無線電通訊 終端裝置(舉例來說,裝置Α5 1855)的一暫存器)設為該等第 一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置 (舉例來說,裝置Α4 1854)之經推知的時脈。 6.2 ΒΡ對齊· 同步化問題可能會造成快速裝置的信標看似為異型信 91 201012157 標。假如- BPST和一裝置本身的BPST的差異小於預設的-時間週期長度(舉例來說,mGuardTime(12ns)),μ,該裝置 便可能會S忍為該BPST對齊本身的BPST。假如一裝置的 BPST落在-異型Bp的裡面或是該異型BpsT落在該震置 本身的BP裡面,則’該裝置便可能會認為該異型Bp重疊 其本身的BP。假如一裝置在前一個超訊框中收到一異型信 標之後的mMaxLostBeacons個超訊框中都沒有收到異型信 標,該裝置可以使用最近收到的信標中所含的資訊,就如 同該異型信標係在目前超訊框内的相同偏移處被收到般。❿ 舉例來說,mMaxLostBeacons的數值可能為3。於一實施例 中,假如一能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中的裝置遇到一來 自相同賣方且能夠操作在有槽偏移TFC之中的異型裝置的 話(舉例來說,從圖8中所示的ASIE及圖7中所示的特定 應用控制攔位中推知)並且假如該異型裝置已經在四個(或 疋大於四的固定數值)超訊框中沒有移動其BPST,該裝置便 可以採取和BP對齊有關的步驟下面會作說明。假如一能夠 操作在有槽偏移TFC之中的裝置遇到一為ECMA[1;J指定裝 © 置的異型裝置或疋遇到一並未在前面四個超訊框中保持其 BPST不動的裝置’該裝置便可以遵守ecmA[1]規格中所提 出的BP對齊規則。In the embodiment, the at least one other radio communication terminal device (for example, device Α5 1 8 5 5) of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is configured to perform a virtual time a pulse (which may be a first register of the at least one of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices (for example, a device Α5 1855) of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices) The inferred clock of the radio communication terminal device (for example, device 1 4 1854) in the radio communication terminal device. 6.2 ΒΡ Alignment · Synchronization issues may cause the beacon of a fast device to appear to be a heterogeneous letter 91 201012157. If - BPST differs from the BPST of a device itself by a preset - time period length (for example, mGuardTime (12 ns)), μ, the device may endure that the BPST is aligned with its own BPST. If the BPST of a device falls within the -type Bp or the profiled BpsT falls within the BP of the set itself, then the device may consider the alien Bp to overlap its own BP. If a device does not receive an alien beacon in the mMaxLostBeacons superframe after receiving a special beacon in the previous hyperframe, the device can use the information contained in the recently received beacon, just like The alien beacon is received at the same offset within the current hyperframe. ❿ For example, the value of mMaxLostBeacons might be 3. In one embodiment, if a device capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC encounters a heterogeneous device from the same vendor and capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC (for example, from FIG. 8 The ASIE shown and the specific application control block shown in Figure 7 are inferred) and if the alien device has not moved its BPST in four (or a fixed value greater than four) hyperframe, the device can The steps involved in aligning with BP are explained below. If a device capable of operating in a slotted offset TFC encounters an alien device that is ECMA[1;J specified, or encounters a BPST that does not remain in the first four superframes. Device 'The device can comply with the BP alignment rules proposed in the ecmA [1] specification.

H.1重辱的BP 於一實施例中,假如一裝置的BPST落在一異型Bp裡 面或是一異型BPST落在一裝置的Bp裡面,該裝置則會進 行下面動作: 92 201012157 該裝置會利用在章節6.3」」中提出的相鄰裝置 期預估程序來判斷其是否快過該異型裝置。該裝置可能會 將該異型裝置視為-相鄰裝i ’以便達到利用在章節 6·3.1·1中所提出之相鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序來預估該 異型裝置之時脈週期的目的。假如該裝置快過該異型裝置 的話:H.1 Insulting BP In one embodiment, if a device's BPST falls within a shaped Bp or a shaped BPST falls within a device's Bp, the device performs the following actions: 92 201012157 The device will Use the adjacent device period estimation procedure presented in Section 6.3" to determine if it is faster than the alien device. The device may treat the alien device as an adjacent device to estimate the clock cycle of the heterogeneous device using the clock cycle estimation procedure of the neighboring device proposed in Section 6.3.1. the goal of. If the device is faster than the shaped device:

該裝置會於下面提出的規則i⑻的規範下,在接續的 2xmBPMerge WaitTime個超訊框内藉由重新安置其信標、依 照該異型BPST來重新安置其BpST、以及設定其虛擬時 脈’利用在章節6H.2中提出的同步化演算法來同步於該 異型裝置。該裝置可能會將該異型裝置視為最慢的相鄰裝 置以便達到利用在S冑6.3」2中所提出之程序來同步於 該異型裝置的目的。於本文中,該可 能為3 2超訊框。 假如於該異型BP中收到的信標包含一增強型Bp交換 IE,該裝置便不會依照該異型Bp來重新安置。 假如該裝置慢過該異型裝置,該裝置便不會重新安置 其信標。 假如該裝置移動過其BPST,該裝置會調整其信標槽編 號,俾使其新的信標槽編號為舊的信標槽編號加一,加上 於該異型BP中收到的任何信標所表示之被佔用的最高信標 槽編號,扣除mSignaiSiotC〇unt。於本文中,該 mSignalSlotCount可能代表兩個信標槽。或者,其可以遵循 在ECMA[1]規格中所規定的正常Bp加入規則用以依照該 93 201012157 異型BPST來重新安置其信標。 該裝置不會在其先前的BP中發送進一步的信標。 在改變其BPST之後,假如該裝置必須在一發信槽之中 發送一信標’該裝置在該發信槽之中發送信標之前會先等 待隨機數量的超訊框。該裝置會在從零到在依照該異型BP 來重新安置之前於其最後信標中所宣告的BP長度之間的範 圍中以等機率的方式選出該隨機數。 6.2.2不#春的rp 假如一裝置偵測到一在時間中並未與其本身的Bp發生 © 重疊的異型BP,則根據一實施例,其可以根據下面的規則 來合併BP。 該裝置會於其信標中併入一 DRp IE(舉例來說參見圖 I3)’其保留類型會針對該異型BP而被設為異型Bp。因為 MAS邊界可能並未對齊,所以,該裝置可能必須在該保留 作業中併入一額外的MAS,以便完全涵蓋該異型BP。假如 該裝置已從該異型BP處收到多個信標,其可能會在該保留 Ο 作業中併入最大回報, 長度所用到的所有MAS。假如被該 異型BP佔用的MAS隨荖b# 并傲 _ ^ 逭者時間改變,該装置則可能會據以 更新該DRP IE。 該裝置可以藉由利用在章 » ^ , 旱郎m.1中所提出之相鄰裝 置的時脈週期預估程序來判 M w ^ ^ j斷其疋否快過該異型裝置。該 瑕置可月b會將該異型揲罟 在章節63 Η : 相鄰裳置,以便達到利用 在草卽6.3.1.1中所提出之相 8 rn ^ m 鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序來 預估該異型裝置之時脈週期 水 的目的。假如該裝置快過該異 94 201012157 型裝置的話: 該裝置會於下面提出的規則2⑻的規範下,在接 2xmBPMergeWaitTime個超訊框内藉由重新安置其信標、依 照該異型BPST來重新安置其BpST、以及設定其虛擬 脈’利用在章節中提出的同步化演算法來同步於該 異型裝置。該裝置可能會將該異型裝置視為最慢的相鄰裝 置,以便達到利用在章節6.3.h2中所提出之程序來同步於 該異型裝置的目的》 假如於該異型BP中收到的信標包含一增強型Bp交換 IE,該裝置便不會依照該異型Bp來重新安置。 假如該裝置慢過該異型裝置,該裝置便不會重新安置 其信標。 於其本身的BP之中傳送或接收一含有保留類型被設 為異型BP之DRPIE的信標的裝置會遵守下面規則: 在偵測到衝突之前,該裝置不應該改變信標槽。 〇 在該保留中所表示的MAS期間,該裝置必須聆聽信標。 L2.3信襌番_卑胥 假如裝置開始或已經開始進行信標重新安置處理且 接收一異型信標,根據一實施例,其可能會遵守下面的規 則: 饭如該裝置在其最後信標中沒有包含增強型交換 IE而且沒有從其相鄰裝置處收到—含有增強型Bp交換ie 的信標,其可能會在後面的超訊框中於其信標之中併入一 增強型Bp交換IE,欄位的設定如下: 95 201012157 A1.該裝置可能會將BP移動向下計數欄位2403(參見 圖24)設為等於mBPMergeWaitTime的數值。 A2.該裝置可能會將BPST偏移欄位2406(參見圖24) 設為介於該異型BPST與該裝置的BPST之間以奈秒為單位 的正數差異值。也就是,該攔位含有該裝置必須延遲其本 身的BPST以對齊該異型BPST的奈秒數。假如收到多個異 型信標,該裝置則可能會將該BPST偏移欄位設為經算出的 最大數值。 A3.該裝置可能會將時脈週期偏移攔位2405(參見圖 24)設為以0.01飛秒為單位的正數差異值,其為該異型裝置 的時脈週期和該裝置的信標群之中該裝置的虛擬時脈要與 其進行同步化的最慢裝置的時脈週期的差異。 A4.該裝置可能會將信標槽偏移欄位2404(參見圖24) 設為 . 一加上於該異型BP中收到的任何信標所表示之被佔用 的最高信標槽編號,以信標槽編號攔位和信標週期佔用 IE(BPOIE,Beacon Period Occupancy IE)為基礎,再加上其 舊的信標槽編號再扣除mSignalSlotCount ;或是 零,用以表示該裝置要利用在ECMA規格中所規定的 正常加入規則來加入該異型B P。 假如該裝置在其最後信標中已併入一增強型BP交換 IE而沒有從其相鄰裝置處收到一含有增強型BP交換IE的 信標,其可能會依照下面方式在後面的超訊框中修正該增 強型BP交換IE : 96 201012157 該裝置可能會如A2中所述般地設定該BPST偏移攔 位。該裝置可能會如A3中所述般地設定該時脈週期偏移欄 位2405(參見圖24)。假如信標槽偏移攔位中的數值要增 加’該裝置可能會如A4中所述般地設定該欄位;否則,便 使其維持不變。該裝置可能會將BP移動向下計數攔位 2403(參見圖24)設為比其最後信標中所用到的數值少一。 假如一裝置接收一含有增強型BP交換IE的相鄰裝置 的信標,則,根據一實施例,該裝置可能會遵守下面規則: 假如該裝置在其最後信標中沒有包含增強型BP交換 ΪΕ,該裝置可能會在後面的超訊框中於其信標之中併入一增 強型BP交換ιέ,欄位的設定如下: C1 ·該裝置可能會將BP移動向下計數欄位2403設為 該相鄰裝置的增強型BP交換IE的BP移動向下計數欄位。 C2.該裝置可能會將Bpst偏移欄位2406設為該相鄰 裂置的信標中所含的相同攔位的數值。 φ C3·該裝置可能會將時脈週期偏移欄位2405設為該相 鄰裝置的信標中所含的相同攔位的數值。 C4.該裝置可能會將信標槽偏移攔位24〇4設為: 下面較大者:一加上於由該相鄰裝置的Bp交換ιέ所 確s忍的異型BP中收到的任何異型信標所表示之最高被佔用 的信標槽的數量,以信標槽編號攔位和Bp〇IE為基礎,再 加上其舊的信標槽編號再扣除mSignalsl〇tC〇unt;或是該相 鄰裝置的信標中所含的信標槽偏移欄位;或是 零’用卩表示該裝置要利用丨常加入規則來加入該異 97 201012157 型BP。 假如該裝置在其最後信標中已併入一增強型Bp交換 IE ’其可能會依照下面方式來修正該Bp交換IE : 假如該相鄰裝置的信標中所含的時脈週期偏移欄位 2405大於該裝置的時脈週期偏移欄位,該裝置可能會分別 如上面在C1、C2、C3、以及C4中所述般地設定該Bp移動 向下計數欄位2403、BPST偏移欄位24〇6、時脈週期偏移 欄位2405、以及信標槽偏移攔位2404。The device will relocate its beacon, relocate its BpST according to the alien BPST, and set its virtual clock in the succeeding 2xmBPMerge WaitTime hyperframe under the rule i(8) proposed below. The synchronization algorithm proposed in Section 6H.2 is synchronized to the alien device. The device may consider the profiled device to be the slowest adjacent device in order to achieve the purpose of synchronizing with the profiled device using the procedure set forth in S胄 6.3”2. In this article, this may be a 3 2 hyperframe. If the beacon received in the alien BP contains an enhanced Bp exchange IE, the device will not be relocated according to the alien Bp. If the device is slower than the profiled device, the device will not relocate its beacon. If the device moves past its BPST, the device will adjust its beacon slot number so that its new beacon slot number is the old beacon slot number plus one, plus any beacons received in the alien BP. The highest beacon slot number indicated, minus mSignaiSiotC〇unt. In this paper, the mSignalSlotCount may represent two beacon slots. Alternatively, it may follow the normal Bp join rules specified in the ECMA [1] specification for relocating its beacon in accordance with the 93 201012157 heterotypic BPST. The device will not send further beacons in its previous BP. After changing its BPST, if the device has to send a beacon in a telecommunications box, the device will wait for a random number of hyperframes before transmitting the beacon in the telecommunications slot. The device will select the random number in an equal probability range from zero to the length of the BP declared in its last beacon before being relocated according to the alien BP. 6.2.2 Non-spring rp If a device detects a heterogeneous BP that does not occur with its own Bp in time, then according to an embodiment, it may merge BP according to the following rules. The device will incorporate a DRp IE (see, for example, Figure I3) in its beacon. Its retention type will be set to the alien Bp for the heterogeneous BP. Since the MAS boundaries may not be aligned, the device may have to incorporate an additional MAS in the reservation to fully cover the alien BP. If the device has received multiple beacons from the alien BP, it may incorporate the maximum return, all MASs used in the length, in the reserved job. If the MAS occupied by the heterogeneous BP changes with the time of the #b#, the device may update the DRP IE accordingly. The apparatus can determine whether M w ^ ^ j is faster than the profiled device by utilizing the clock cycle estimation procedure of the adjacent device proposed in Chapter » ^ , lang lang m. The device can diverge the profile in section 63 Η : adjacent skirts to achieve the clock cycle estimation procedure using the 8 rn ^ m neighboring device proposed in the grasshopper 6.3.1.1. The purpose of the clock cycle water of the shaped device is estimated. If the device is faster than the device of the type 94 201012157: the device will relocate it in the 2xmBPMergeWaitTime hyperframe by relocating its beacon according to the rule 2(8) proposed below, according to the alien BPST. BpST, and set its virtual veins' are synchronized to the alien device using the synchronization algorithm proposed in the chapter. The device may treat the alien device as the slowest adjacent device in order to achieve the purpose of synchronizing with the profiled device using the procedure set forth in Section 6.3.h2, if the beacon received in the alien BP Including an enhanced Bp exchange IE, the device will not be relocated according to the alien Bp. If the device is slower than the profiled device, the device will not relocate its beacon. A device that transmits or receives a beacon containing a DRPIE with a reserved type set to a heteromorphous BP among its own BPs will abide by the following rules: The device should not change the beacon slot until a collision is detected.该 During the MAS indicated in this reservation, the device must listen to the beacon. L2.3 信襌 胥 胥 If the device starts or has begun to perform beacon relocation processing and receives a heterogeneous beacon, according to an embodiment, it may comply with the following rules: rice as the device is at its last beacon The enhanced switching IE is not included and is not received from its neighbors - the beacon containing the enhanced Bp exchange ie, which may incorporate an enhanced Bp in its beacon in the subsequent hyperframe To exchange IE, the field settings are as follows: 95 201012157 A1. The device may set the BP Move Down Count field 2403 (see Figure 24) to a value equal to mBPMergeWaitTime. A2. The device may set the BPST Offset field 2406 (see Figure 24) to a positive difference value in nanoseconds between the Shape BPST and the BPST of the device. That is, the block contains the number of nanoseconds that the device must delay its own BPST to align the alien BPST. If multiple odd beacons are received, the device may set the BPST offset field to the calculated maximum value. A3. The device may set the clock cycle offset block 2405 (see FIG. 24) to a positive difference value in units of 0.01 femtoseconds, which is the clock period of the alien device and the beacon group of the device. The difference in the clock cycle of the slowest device with which the virtual clock of the device is synchronized. A4. The device may set the beacon slot offset field 2404 (see Figure 24) to be the same as the highest beacon slot number represented by any beacon received in the alien BP. Beacon slot numbering and beacon period occupancy based on IE (BPOIE, Beacon Period Occupancy IE), plus its old beacon slot number minus mSignalSlotCount; or zero to indicate that the device is to be used in ECMA specifications The normal joining rules specified in the paragraph are added to join the heterogeneous BP. If the device has incorporated an enhanced BP switching IE in its last beacon without receiving a beacon containing an enhanced BP switching IE from its neighbor, it may follow the following in the following way. The enhanced BP switching IE is modified in the box: 96 201012157 The device may set the BPST offset block as described in A2. The device may set the clock cycle offset field 2405 as described in A3 (see Figure 24). If the value in the beacon slot offset block is to be increased, the device may set the field as described in A4; otherwise, it will remain unchanged. The device may set the BP Move Down Count Block 2403 (see Figure 24) to one less than the value used in its last beacon. If a device receives a beacon of a neighboring device containing an enhanced BP switching IE, then according to an embodiment, the device may comply with the following rules: If the device does not include an enhanced BP switching in its last beacon The device may incorporate an enhanced BP exchange ιέ in its beacon in the following hypertext frame. The field settings are as follows: C1 • The device may set the BP move down count field 2403 to The BP of the Enhanced BP Switching IE of the neighboring device moves down the field. C2. The device may set the Bpst offset field 2406 to the value of the same block contained in the beacon of the adjacent split. φ C3· The device may set the clock period offset field 2405 to the value of the same block contained in the beacon of the adjacent device. C4. The device may set the beacon slot offset block 24〇4 to: The larger one: one plus any received in the alien BP that is tolerated by the Bp exchange of the neighboring device The number of the highest occupied beacon slots indicated by the alien beacon, based on the beacon slot number and Bp〇IE, plus the old beacon slot number minus mSignalsl〇tC〇unt; or The beacon slot offset field contained in the beacon of the neighboring device; or zero' indicates that the device is to use the regular join rule to join the different type 97 201012157 BP. If the device has incorporated an enhanced Bp exchange IE in its last beacon, it may modify the Bp exchange IE in the following manner: if the clock cycle offset column contained in the beacon of the adjacent device Bit 2405 is greater than the clock period offset field of the device, and the device may set the Bp move down count field 2403, BPST offset column as described above in C1, C2, C3, and C4, respectively. Bit 24〇6, clock cycle offset field 2405, and beacon slot offset block 2404.

假如該相鄰裝置的信標中所含的時脈週期偏移棚位 2405小於或等於該裝置的時脈週期偏移欄位,該裝置可能 會將BP移動向下計數欄位設為比其最後信標中所用到的數 值少-’而讓其BPST偏移攔位、時脈週期偏移欄位、以及 信標槽偏移攔位保持和該信標的前一個超訊框相同。 假如一裝置在其信標中併入一增強型Bp交換ie,則根 據-實施例’在其完成或停止該重新安置處理之前,其可 能會繼續保持。 'If the clock cycle offset bin 2405 contained in the beacon of the adjacent device is less than or equal to the clock cycle offset field of the device, the device may set the BP move down count field to be The value used in the last beacon is less - 'and its BPST offset block, clock cycle offset field, and beacon slot offset block remain the same as the previous hyperframe of the beacon. If a device incorporates an enhanced Bp exchange IE in its beacon, it may continue to be maintained before it completes or stops the relocation process. '

於-實施例中,假如一裝置接收一表示重新安置早於 其所計畫之重新安置的信標,該裝置可能會停止該重新安 置處理。 於-實施例中,假如一相鄰裝置停止該重新安置 理,該裝置便可能會停止該重新安置處理。 為停止該重新安置處理,於一實施例中,一裝置可 會於其信標中併入一增強型BP交換IE 2400(參見圖24) BPST偏移欄位2406會被設為65 535,時脈週期偏移棚 98 201012157 os會被认為零,信標槽偏移攔位24〇4會被設為零,而 BP移動向下計數攔位24〇3則會被設為 mBPMergeWaitTime。在下面的超訊框中,該裝置可能會遵 守上面的規則。 於實施例中,在該超訊框的結束處(一裝置會於該處 包含一 BP移動向下計數欄位24〇3等於零的增強型Bp交換 IE 2400),該裝置可能會以其移欄位為基礎來調整 φ 其BPST。該裝置可能會在新的BPST處將其虛擬時脈計數 設為零。該裝置可能會藉由下面在章節6 3 12中所提出的 程序來更新其虛擬時脈,以便讓其虛擬時脈同步於週期為 該時脈週期偏移攔位加上在調整其BpST之前於該超訊框 中的舊BP之中其前一個最慢相鄰裝置之時脈週期的時脈。 為達到在調整其BPST之後且在實施如章節6 3 l i中所提 出的任何相鄰裝置時脈週期預估程序之前保持虛擬時脈計 數的目的,該裝置可能會在新的Bp之中認為其最慢相鄰裝 ❹ 置的時脈的時脈週期為該時脈週期偏移欄位的數值加上在 調整其BPST之前於該超訊框中的舊Bp之中該裝置的前一 個最匱相鄰裝置的時脈週期。於一實施例中,該裝置可能 會在該超訊框之中傳送一信標,或是延遲一超訊框以便在 其新的BP之中開始進行信標傳送。在依照該異型Bp重新 安置其信標之後,該裝置在其信標之中可能既不包含該增 強型BP交換也不包含該異型Bp DRp IE。假如該信標槽 偏移欄位2404為非零,該裝置便可能會在編號等於其前一 個信標槽編號加上信標槽偏移攔位中之數值的信標槽之中 99 201012157 傳送-信標。假如該信標槽編號大於等於顺乂帆邮h,. 該裝置便可能會遵守ECMA⑴規格中所述的正常Bp加入 規則來依照該異型BP重新安置其信標。於本文中, mMaxBPLength 如[1]之中所述。 6.3裝置的同击代 在下文中會摘要說明參考文件[3]中所揭示的方法如何 讓一特定無線電通訊終端裝置同步於另一特定無線電通訊 終端裝置;該些方法可以施行在各種實施例中。 每個裝置皆可能會保留一信標週期起始時間鲁 (BPST)每冑裝置可能還會保留一虛擬時脈(其可能係一 暫存器)。 ' ” 每_ «置皆可能會和其最慢相鄰裝置保持超訊框同 步化。在本文中,冑慢相鄰裝置可能係指其物理時脈訊號 落後該信標群中所有其它裝置的物理時脈訊號。換言之, 舉例來說4最慢相鄰I置的物理時脈週期可能長過該信 b群中所有其它裝置的物理時脈週期。後面會在章節 中說明一裝置藉以使其虛擬時脈保持同步於其最慢相冑裝 © 置的程序。每一個裝置皆可能會以目前的BPST和該虛擬時 脈來推知用以和其相鄰裝置進行通訊的所有時間。在一裝 置同v於任何其匕裝置之前,該裝置的虛擬時脈可被内定 設為該裝置的物理時脈。每一個裝置皆可能會在最近 mMaxL〇StBeacons個超訊框(包含目前的超訊框在内)之中 儲存或保存每-個相鄰裝置之至少最近瘦址㈣咖刪 個連續BPST的歷史資料。 100 201012157 當一裝置從一相鄰裝置處接收一信標時,該裝置可能 會判斷該信標的真實接收時間和預期接收時間之間的差 異。該信標的真實接收時間為該信標前置符的起點抵達該 装置之天線的時間的預估值。預期接收時間則係經由該被 接收信標的信標槽編號欄位及該裝置的bpst來決定。假如 兩個裝置的虛擬時脈如章節6.31.2中假定般的達到一個時 脈週期的同步標準(因為它們的物理時脈可能會漂移)且它 Φ們& BPSMmGuardTime内彼此對齊,則便可以說它們彼 此同步。 於實施例中,在一目前的超訊框之中,假如一能夠 操作有槽偏移TFC之中的裝置具有一較慢的相鄰裝置(從今 相鄰裝置的BPST數值的歷史資料中推知)的話而且假如該 較k相鄰裝置在刚面六個(或是大於六的固定數值: ^並沒有移動過其BPST,該裝置便會遵守下面和同步^ 有關的規則。否則,該裝置便會在下_個超訊框之 Ο 在ecma[i]規格中所提出的同步化演算法。 6.3.1同步化轻序 =始進行同步化程序的裝置可能會利用在章節 每^個相鄰所裝提置出ΓΓ裝置的時脈週期預估程序來預估其 ,鄰裝置重複進行在章節㈣提㈣ : 脈週期預估程序來決定最慢的相鄰裝置。 =置的時 利用在章節6.3.1>2中所提出 “ X可能還會 置。 、序來同步於該最慢相鄰裝 101 201012157 時脈週期葙仕 在裝置開始進行相鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序以預估 -相鄰裝置之時脈週期之前’該裝置可能會在最近 mMaxL〇stBeacons個超訊框(包含目前的超訊框在内)之中 具有該相鄰裝置之至少最近mMaxLGstBeae(ms個連續BPST 的數值。假如該裝置在最近mMaxL補⑽w個超訊框(包 含目前的超訊框在内)之中僅具有該相鄰裝置之「χ」個連續 BPST ’ #中’ x<mMaxL〇stBeac〇ns,那麼該裝置便可能會 等待足夠的時間用以接收另夕卜「—。n"」個 ❹ BPST,以便’進行該相鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序。該 裝置可以從最近mMaxLostBeacons個超訊框(包含目前的超 訊框在内)之中該相鄰裝置的最近三個連續BpsT之中判斷 出該相鄰裝置是否已經在最近兩個超訊框(包含目前的超訊 框在内)之中移動過λ BPST。假如在前一個超訊框中該相鄰 裝置的BPST和目前超訊框中該相鄰裝置的BpsT之間的流 逝時間不同於在該前一個超訊框前面的超訊框令該相鄰裝 置的BPST和該前-個超訊框中該相鄰裝置的BpsT之間的 流逝時間,便會推斷該相鄰裝置在最近兩個超訊框(包含目 前的超訊框在内)之中已經移動過其BpST。該裝置僅會在該 相鄰裝置及該裝置在各自的最近兩個超訊框(包含目前的超 訊框在内)之中皆沒有移動過個別的BpST時才可能會開始 進行該相鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序。假如其推斷出該裝 置或該相鄰裝置在最近兩個超訊框之中有移動過其BpsT, 該裝置便可能會等待至少兩個另外的超訊框,以便開始進 102 201012157 行該相鄰裝置的時脈週期預估程序。 假如該裝置在目前的超訊框之巾開始進㈣相鄰裝置 的時脈週期預估程序,其可能會進行下面作業。 舉例來說,假設裝置A11mU4(如圖\中所干)已 經進入或加入相同的信標群之中。以“為物理(硬In an embodiment, if a device receives a beacon indicating a relocation prior to its relocation, the device may stop the relocation process. In the embodiment, if an adjacent device stops the re-arrangement, the device may stop the resetting process. To stop the relocation process, in one embodiment, a device may incorporate an enhanced BP switch IE 2400 in its beacon (see Figure 24). The BPST offset field 2406 will be set to 65 535. The pulse period offset shed 98 201012157 os will be considered zero, the beacon slot offset block 24 〇 4 will be set to zero, and the BP move down count block 24 〇 3 will be set to mBPMergeWaitTime. In the Ultrasound box below, the device may follow the above rules. In an embodiment, at the end of the hyperframe (a device will include an enhanced Bp exchange IE 2400 with a BP move down count field 24〇3 equal to zero), the device may move with it Bit based to adjust φ its BPST. The device may set its virtual clock count to zero at the new BPST. The device may update its virtual clock by the procedure set forth in Section 63 3 below, so that its virtual clock is synchronized to the period for the clock period offset block plus before adjusting its BpST. The clock of the clock cycle of the previous slowest neighbor in the old BP in the superframe. In order to achieve the purpose of maintaining a virtual clock count after adjusting its BPST and before implementing any adjacent device clock cycle estimation procedure as proposed in Section 63, the device may consider it among new Bps. The clock period of the clock of the slowest adjacent device is the value of the clock period offset field plus the last one of the device among the old Bp in the frame before adjusting its BPST The clock cycle of adjacent devices. In one embodiment, the device may transmit a beacon in the hyperframe or delay a hyperframe to begin beacon transmission in its new BP. After relocating its beacon in accordance with the alien Bp, the device may contain neither the enhanced BP exchange nor the heteromorphic Bp DRp IE in its beacon. If the beacon slot offset field 2404 is non-zero, the device may transmit in the beacon slot whose number is equal to the value of its previous beacon slot number plus the beacon slot offset block 99 201012157 - Beacons. If the beacon slot number is greater than or equal to the shuttle number h, the device may follow the normal Bp join rules described in the ECMA (1) specification to relocate its beacon in accordance with the alien BP. In this paper, mMaxBPLength is as described in [1]. 6.3 A similar stimulator of the device In the following, a summary of how the method disclosed in reference [3] can synchronize a particular radio communication terminal device to another particular radio communication terminal device; the methods can be implemented in various embodiments. Each device may retain a beacon period start time (BPST). Each device may also retain a virtual clock (which may be a scratchpad). ' ― Each _ « may be synchronized with its slowest neighbors. In this paper, a slow neighbor may refer to the physical clock signal behind all other devices in the beacon group. Physical clock signal. In other words, for example, the physical slow clock period of the 4th slowest neighbor I may be longer than the physical clock period of all other devices in the group b. A device will be described in the following section. The virtual clock keeps synchronized with its slowest phased device. Each device may use the current BPST and the virtual clock to infer all the time used to communicate with its neighbors. Before v is in any other device, the virtual clock of the device can be set to the physical clock of the device. Each device may be in the most recent mMaxL〇StBeacons hyperframe (including the current hyperframe Storing or storing at least the most recent thin address of each adjacent device (4), deleting the historical data of consecutive BPSTs. 100 201012157 When a device receives a beacon from an adjacent device, the device may judge The The difference between the true reception time of the target and the expected reception time. The true reception time of the beacon is an estimated value of the time at which the start point of the beacon preamble arrives at the antenna of the device. The expected reception time is via the received signal. The target beacon slot number field and the device's bpst are determined. If the virtual clocks of the two devices reach the synchronization criteria of a clock cycle as assumed in Section 6.31.2 (because their physical clock may drift) And it can be said that they are synchronized with each other, and in the embodiment, in a current hyperframe, if a device capable of operating the slot offset TFC has one Slower neighbors (inferred from the historical data of BPST values of neighboring devices) and if the k-adjacent devices are six in the face (or a fixed value greater than six: ^ has not moved BPST, the device will abide by the following rules related to synchronization ^. Otherwise, the device will be in the next _ superframe 同步 in the ecma[i] specification proposed synchronization algorithm. 6.3.1 synchronization The light sequence = the device that starts the synchronization process may use the clock cycle estimation program of each device installed in the chapter to estimate it, and the neighbor device repeats in chapter (4) (4): The period estimation procedure is used to determine the slowest neighboring device. = The time is set to be used in Section 6.3.1 > 2 "X may also be set. The sequence is synchronized to the slowest adjacent device 101 201012157 clock The cycle begins when the device begins the clock cycle estimation procedure of the neighboring device to estimate the clock period of the adjacent device. 'The device may be in the nearest mMaxL〇stBeacons hyperframe (including the current hyperframe) Among them, there is at least the nearest mMaxLGstBeae of the neighboring device (the value of ms consecutive BPST). If the device has only "continuous" BPST '#中' x<mMaxL〇stBeac〇ns of the neighboring device in the recent mMaxL supplement (10) w hyperframe (including the current hyperframe), then The device may wait for enough time to receive another "-.n"" BPST to perform the clock cycle estimation procedure for the neighbor. The device may determine whether the neighboring device has been in the last two super-frames among the last three consecutive BpsTs of the neighboring devices among the recent mMaxLostBeacons hyperframes (including the current hyperframe). Moving through λ BPST, including the current superframe. If the elapsed time between the BPST of the adjacent device in the previous hyperframe and the BpsT of the adjacent device in the current superframe is different from the hyperframe in front of the previous hyperframe, the adjacent device The elapsed time between the BPST and the BpsT of the neighboring device in the previous hyperframe, it is inferred that the neighboring device has been in the last two hyperframes (including the current hyperframe) Moved over its BpST. The device may only start the neighboring device if the adjacent device and the device have not moved through the individual BpST in each of the two nearest hyperframes (including the current hyperframe) The clock cycle estimation program. If it is inferred that the device or the adjacent device has moved its BpsT among the last two hyperframes, the device may wait for at least two additional hyperframes to start entering the adjacent row 2010 201012157 The clock cycle estimation procedure for the device. If the device starts the clock cycle estimation procedure of the adjacent device in the current frame of the hyperframe, it may perform the following operations. For example, assume that device A11mU4 (as shown in Figure \) has entered or joined the same beacon group. Take "for physics (hard

脈(目前ECMA[1]的PHY時脈為528MHz)。如圖%中所示, 假定BA 26〇1為裝置A i i丨的BPST,& 26〇2為從裝置a丄u 的觀點所產生的裝置D 114的BPST,Ca 26〇3為裝置A ui 的時脈週期(假設A U1的時脈週期為1/Puk;假設A ^ 的時脈為 528MHz(PCl〇CkFrequency),所以,A lu 的時脈 週期(pClockPeriod)為1/528微秒),而Cd為從裝置A m 的觀點所產生的D 114的時脈週期。假定a丨丨丨所看見的D 114的信標槽為ηι,其為一已知量。假定m=TbpxPcik為一信 標槽持續長度中的時脈循環數 (pNumberofClockCyclesperBeaconSlot),其中,Tbp 為每一 個信標槽的時間持續長度。對目前的ecma[i]指定裝置來 *兑’ Tbp=85 " s 而 Pcik=528MHz。所以,m=85x528。在一裝 置所看見的每一個信標槽之中’相同裝置的物理時脈會計 數m個循環。假定Y2610為在A 111處D 114的信標的真 實接收時間(傳導時間不算在内),Z 2611為在A 111處d 1 14的信標的預估接收時間。 假設在目前的(第一)超訊框(超訊框N 2620)結束時沒 有任何裝置移動其BPST。在下一個超訊框(超訊框N+1 2621) 中,裝置A 111與D 114沒有移動它們的BPST。假定Y’ 2612 103 201012157 和Z,2613分別為在超訊框N+1 2621中在a⑴處β ιι4 的真實接㈣間與預估接收時間。假定h為在超訊框N+i 2621中D 114的信標的信標槽編號。假定ρ=τ^χρ^為一超 Λ框持續長度中的時脈循環數 (pNumberofClockCyclesperSuperframe),其中,Tsf 為其中一 個超訊框的時間持續長度。對目前的ECMA[1]指定裝置來 說,Tsf=65536 # s,所以,ρ=65536χ528。在每一個超訊框 中,相同裝置的物理時脈會計數p個循環。請注意,可相 依於個別的施行方式以不同的方式來選擇Pe丨k。舉例來說,❹ 還可以66MHz時脈為基礎來選擇Puk。於此情況中,a丨i i 的時脈週期為1/66毫秒,而m=85x66且p=65536x66。於一 實施例中Pcik可被選為以裝置A 1 11所使用的物理時脈晶 體的頻率F Hz為基礎。據此,裝置A i丨丨的時脈週期便會 係1/F秒。 現在,在裝置A 111處相對於一固定參考時間(其可能 係 A 111 的 BPST,BA 2601)的 Y 2610、Z 2611、γ,2612、Pulse (current ECMA [1] PHY clock is 528MHz). As shown in the figure %, it is assumed that BA 26〇1 is the BPST of the device A ii , and 26 〇 2 is the BPST of the device D 114 generated from the viewpoint of the device a丄u, and the Ca 26 〇 3 is the device A ui The clock cycle (assuming that the clock period of A U1 is 1/Puk; assuming that the clock of A ^ is 528MHz (PCl〇CkFrequency), so the clock period of A lu (pClockPeriod) is 1/528 microseconds), And Cd is the clock period of D 114 generated from the viewpoint of the device A m . It is assumed that the beacon slot of D 114 seen by a is ηι, which is a known amount. Assume that m = TbpxPcik is the number of clock cycles in the duration of a beacon slot (pNumber of ClockCyclesperBeaconSlot), where Tbp is the duration of time for each beacon slot. For the current ecma[i], specify the device to *t'Tbp=85 " s and Pcik=528MHz. Therefore, m = 85x528. The physical clock count of the same device is m cycles in each beacon slot seen by a device. Assuming Y2610 is the true reception time of the beacon of D 114 at A 111 (transmission time is not counted), Z 2611 is the estimated reception time of the beacon of d 1 14 at A 111. Assume that no device moves its BPST at the end of the current (first) hyperframe (the hyperframe N 2620). In the next hyperframe (superframe N+1 2621), devices A 111 and D 114 do not move their BPST. It is assumed that Y' 2612 103 201012157 and Z, 2613 are respectively the actual connection (4) of β ιι4 at a(1) in the hyperframe N+1 2621 and the estimated reception time. Let h be the beacon slot number of the beacon of D 114 in hyperframe N+i 2621. It is assumed that ρ = τ ^ χ ρ ^ is the number of clock cycles in the duration of a superframe (pNumberofClockCyclesperSuperframe), where Tsf is the duration of time of one of the hyperframes. For the current ECMA [1] designation device, Tsf = 65536 # s, so ρ = 65536 528. In each hyperframe, the physical clock of the same device counts p cycles. Please note that Pe丨k can be selected in different ways depending on the individual implementation. For example, ❹ can also choose Puk based on the 66MHz clock. In this case, the clock period of a丨i i is 1/66 milliseconds, and m=85x66 and p=65536x66. In one embodiment, Picik can be selected based on the frequency F Hz of the physical clock crystal used by device A 1 11 . Accordingly, the clock period of the device A i丨丨 is 1/F second. Now, Y 2610, Z 2611, γ, 2612 at device A 111 relative to a fixed reference time (which may be BPST of A 111, BA 2601)

以及Z’ 2613皆為已知。從下面的四個關係式中, Z=Ba +(n!-l)CAm (1) Y=BD +(ni_i)cDm (2) Z,=Ba +pCA+(n2-l)CAm (3) Y,=Bd +pCD+(n2-l)CDm (4) 其中 ’ m=TbpxPclk=85x528 ’ p=TsfxPclk=65536x528 可以取得兩個超訊框中BD和CD的預估值: CD=(Y,-Y)/(p+m(n2-ii1)) (5) 104 201012157And Z' 2613 are known. From the following four relations, Z=Ba +(n!-l)CAm (1) Y=BD +(ni_i)cDm (2) Z,=Ba +pCA+(n2-l)CAm (3) Y ,=Bd +pCD+(n2-l)CDm (4) where ' m=TbpxPclk=85x528 ' p=TsfxPclk=65536x528 You can get the estimated values of BD and CD in two super frames: CD=(Y,-Y )/(p+m(n2-ii1)) (5) 104 201012157

ni-l)(Y,-Y)m/(P+m(n2_ni))⑹ 裝置A m便會慢於相鄰裝置D 相鄰裝置D Π4便會慢於裝置ANi-l)(Y,-Y)m/(P+m(n2_ni))(6) Device A m will be slower than adjacent device D. Adjacent device D Π4 will be slower than device A

於此範例中,假設裝置A⑴㈣相鄰裝置β u 二超訊框中,裝置Alll可能會將其BpsT =的则T(其會經由知仏+^及該固定參考時^ 侍知)並且將其虛擬時脈計數重置為零。裝置A I"在 以奈秒為單位的時脈週期時可能會保持至少八個小數 至第八個小數)的解析度。當預估相鄰裝置的 時’裝置A m可能會保持至少一個奈秒的解析度。 於最慢相鄰裝罟 又In this example, assuming that device A(1)(4) is adjacent to the device β u in the super-frame, device Alll may have its BpsT = then T (which will be known via the knowledge +^ and the fixed reference) and The virtual clock count is reset to zero. The device A I" may maintain a resolution of at least eight decimal places to an eighth decimal number in a clock cycle in nanoseconds. The device A m may maintain a resolution of at least one nanosecond when estimating the neighboring device. At the slowest adjacent frame

BD=Y-(n1-l)CDm=Y-( 假如cD<cA,那麼, 114。假如Cd>Ca,那麼, 1 1 1 〇 假如裝置A U1利用章節63丨」中提出的程序而在目 二。訊框中擁有最慢相鄰裝置D 114的時脈週期和咖 、置A1U可能會將其则丁對齊於該最慢相鄰裝置D 的BPST並且在下一個超訊框中於該最慢相鄰裝置〇 的BPST處將A111的虛擬時脈計數重置為零。在目前 :訊框中預估最慢相鄰裝置的時脈之後的任何時間處皆可 仃㈣T的調整;不過,可能要在目前超訊框結束之前完 ° s亥裝置可能還會遵守下面規則。 飯定^為D 114之超訊框持續長度(其為A 111已知者) 月間A⑴的物理時脈循環的數量,而pD為D "4之相同 二超訊框持續長度中D 114的物理時脈循環的數量。從中 可以看出,PD=p=65536x528(pNumberofcl〇ekCydesperSu_a_ ^ 105 201012157 假士裝置A 111從第二超訊框處保持虛擬時脈循環之計數 的方式係每隔其 Fl〇or[pA/(pA_pD)]或是 R〇und[pA/(pA_PD)] 個物理時脈循環便藉由從其物理時脈循環的計數處扣除一 個,脈循環而從其物理時脈循環的計數處取得其虛擬時脈 循環的計數,A 111的虛擬時脈便能夠依照一時脈週期位準 同步於D 1 14的物理時脈。於一實施例中,該虛擬時脈可 旎會表明該虛擬時脈與該物理時脈之間的時間偏移。由虛 擬時脈所計算的時脈循環可能t對應⑨由物s時脈所計算 的時脈循環的數量或是與其相關。舉例來說,虛擬時脈可^ 能會每隔Fl00r[PA/(PA_pD)]或是個物理 時脈循環便略過一個時脈循環。 在上文中,函數Fl〇or[x]表示不大於數值「χ」的最大 整數;而R〇Und[x]則表示最接近Γχ」的整數。 5假如pA-pD=〇’則,虛擬時脈便會被設為和物理時脈相 同從上面可以看出,僅需要用到前面兩個超訊框來 時脈週期及建立虛擬時脈。 下面提出兩個範例來解釋上面所提出的技術。 _ 範例1 假設 nl=n2=n=5 且 Pcik=528MHz,Ca=i/52^ $ 測仵為342.595 # s ’ Y’經測得為65882 595 // s,接著利 可以預估心為1 894〇5ns,而利用公式(6)可以預二 d ’、、、2·5752 " s。在D 114的超訊框持續長度卜中, 1U的時脈會計算PCd/Ca〜346〇5〇28個循環。不過,d A 的時脈仍會計算p=65536x528 = 346G3刪個循環。每隔A 4 106 201012157 的 17 131(=34605028/(34605028-34603008))個物理時脈循環 便扣除1個時脈循環便會得到A 111的虛擬時脈。 範例2 假設 nl=n2=n=5 且 Pclk=66MHz,Ca=1/66/i s,Y 經測 得為342.595 // s,Y,經測得為65882·595 /ζ s,接著,利用公 式(5)可以預估Cd為l5.152ns,而利用公式(6)可以預估Bd 為2.584y s。在d 114的超訊框持續長度(=pCd)中’ a m 鬱 的時脈會計算PCD/CA〜4325514個循環。不過,D 1M的時 脈仍會計算p=65536x66=4325376個循環。每隔A的 31344(〜4325514/(4325514-4325376))個物理時脈循環便扣 除1個時脈循環便會得到A 111的虛擬時脈。 圖 27 所示的係 pci〇ckFrequency、pci〇ckPeri〇d、 pNumberofClockCyclesperSuperframe 、 以 及 pNumberofClockCyclesperBeaconSlot 等參數的可能數值。 應該注意的係,本發明的各實施例並不受限於ECMA φ 通訊標準,舉例來說,亦能夠套用至提供固定(舉例來說, 事先定義)跳頻樣式的任何行動無線電通訊技術並且因而可 以允許進行TFC有槽偏移通訊。舉例來說,本發明的各實 施例皆可套用至CWPAN通訊標準。 雖然本文已經參考特定實施例特別顯示與說明過本發 明,不過,熟習本技術的人士便應該瞭解,可以對其中的 形式2細節進行各種變更,其並不會脫離隨附申請專利範 圍所定義之本發明的精神與範蜂。因此,本發明的 由隨附的申請專利範圍來表明,且本發明因而希望涵蓋落 107 201012157 在該等申請專利範圍之等效意義與範圍内的所有變更。 在本案件中引述到下面案件: [1] 2007年12月提出的ecmA-368標準,高速超寬頻 PHY 和 MAC 標準(High Rate Ultra Wideband PHY and MAC Standard) [2] WO 2009/038545 A1 [3] WO 2009/054812 A1 [4] WO 2009/088364 A1 [5] WO 2008/123834 A1 【圖式簡單說明】 在圖式中,所有不同圖中的相同元件符號大體上代表 相同的部件。該等圖式並未依照比例繪製,其重點大體上 係在於圖解各種實施例的原理。在上面的說明中,已經參 考下面的圖式說明過各種實施例,其中: 圖1所示的係根據一實施例在一特定無線電通訊裝置 群内的特定無線電通訊終端裝置之間的特定無線電通訊; 圖2所示的係根據一實施例用以傳送〇Fdm符號的方 法; 圖3所示的係根據一實施例的超訊框的結構; 圖4所示的係根據一實施例的特定應用資訊要件 ie 的格式; 圖5所示的係根據一實施例的特定應用命令/控制訊框 的酬栽的格式; 圖6所不的係根據一實施例的特定應用探測資訊要件 201012157 的格式; 圖7所示的係根據一 式; 實施例的特定應用控制攔位的格 圖8所示的係根據一實施例的人81£的特定應 位的範例格式; ’' 用資料欄 圖9(a)所示的係根據一實施例的asie的特定應 欄位的特定應用辨識符欄位的格式; 用資料BD=Y-(n1-l)CDm=Y-(if cD<cA, then, 114. If Cd>Ca, then 1 1 1 〇If the device A U1 uses the procedure proposed in Section 63丨) 2. The frame has the clock cycle of the slowest adjacent device D 114, and the A1U may align its latitude to the BPST of the slowest neighbor D and the slowest in the next superframe. The virtual clock count of A111 is reset to zero at the BPST of the adjacent device 。. At any time after the current: frame of the slowest neighboring device is estimated, the adjustment of (4)T can be performed; however, it is possible To complete the current super-frame before the end of the frame, the following rules may also be observed. The setting of the super-frame of D 114 (which is known as A 111) The number of physical clock cycles of the month A (1) And pD is the number of physical clock cycles of D 114 in the duration of the same two hyperframes of D "4. It can be seen that PD=p=65536x528 (pNumberofcl〇ekCydesperSu_a_^105 201012157 Wig device A 111 from The way to keep the count of the virtual clock cycle at the second hyperframe is every Fl〇or[pA/(pA_pD)] R〇und[pA/(pA_PD)] physical clock cycles are obtained by subtracting one of their physical clock cycles from the count of their physical clock cycles and taking their virtual clock cycles from the count of their physical clock cycles. Counting, the virtual clock of A 111 can be synchronized to the physical clock of D 1 14 according to a clock cycle level. In an embodiment, the virtual clock can indicate the virtual clock and the physical clock. Time offset between the time. The clock cycle calculated by the virtual clock may correspond to or be related to the number of clock cycles calculated by the object s clock. For example, the virtual clock can be In the above, Fl00r[PA/(PA_pD)] or a physical clock cycle skips a clock cycle. In the above, the function Fl〇or[x] represents the largest integer not greater than the value "χ"; and R〇Und[ x] is the integer closest to Γχ. 5 If pA-pD=〇', the virtual clock will be set to be the same as the physical clock. As you can see from the above, you only need to use the first two super frames. Come to the clock cycle and establish a virtual clock. Here are two examples to explain the technique proposed above. _ Example 1 Suppose nl=n2=n=5 and Pcik=528MHz, Ca=i/52^ $ 仵 is 342.595 # s ' Y' is measured as 65882 595 // s, then the profit can be estimated 1 894 〇 5 ns, and using formula (6) can pre-d'd, ', 2. 5572 " s. In the duration of the super-frame of D 114, the 1U clock will calculate PCd/Ca~346〇 5 〇 28 cycles. However, the clock of d A will still calculate p=65536x528 = 346G3 to delete the loop. A virtual clock of A 111 is obtained by deducting one clock cycle every 17 131 (=34605028/(34605028-34603008)) physical clock cycles of A 4 106 201012157. Example 2 Suppose nl=n2=n=5 and Pclk=66MHz, Ca=1/66/is, Y is measured as 342.595 // s, Y, measured as 65882·595 /ζ s, then, using the formula (5) It can be estimated that Cd is 15.15 ns, and formula (6) can be used to estimate Bd of 2.584 ys. In the superframe duration (=pCd) of d 114, the clock of ' a m suffy will calculate PCD/CA~4325514 cycles. However, the D 1M clock will still calculate p = 65536x66 = 4325376 cycles. A virtual clock of A 111 is obtained by deducting one clock cycle every 31344 (~4325514/(4325514-4325376)) physical clock cycles of A. Figure 27 shows the possible values for parameters such as pci〇ckFrequency, pci〇ckPeri〇d, pNumberofClockCyclesperSuperframe, and pNumberofClockCyclesperBeaconSlot. It should be noted that embodiments of the present invention are not limited to the ECMA φ communication standard and, for example, can be applied to any mobile radio communication technology that provides a fixed (for example, predefined) frequency hopping pattern and thus TFC slotted offset communication can be allowed. For example, embodiments of the present invention can be applied to the CWPAN communication standard. While the invention has been particularly shown and described with reference to the specific embodiments of the invention, it will be understood by those skilled in the art that various modifications of the details of the form 2 can be made without departing from the scope of the appended claims. The spirit of the present invention and Van Bee. Therefore, the invention is intended to be limited by the scope of the appended claims. In this case, the following cases are cited: [1] The ecmA-368 standard proposed in December 2007, High Rate Ultra Wideband PHY and MAC Standard [2] WO 2009/038545 A1 [3] WO 2009/054812 A1 [4] WO 2009/088364 A1 [5] WO 2008/123834 A1 [Brief Description of the Drawings] In the drawings, like reference numerals refer to the The figures are not drawn to scale, and the emphasis is generally on the principles of the various embodiments. In the above description, various embodiments have been described with reference to the following drawings, in which: Figure 1 shows a specific radio communication between specific radio communication terminal devices within a particular radio communication device group in accordance with an embodiment. 2 is a method for transmitting a 〇Fdm symbol according to an embodiment; FIG. 3 is a structure of a super frame according to an embodiment; FIG. 4 is a specific application according to an embodiment. The format of the information element ie; FIG. 5 is a format of a specific application command/control frame according to an embodiment; FIG. 6 is a format of a specific application detection information element 201012157 according to an embodiment; Figure 7 is based on a formula; the specific application control block of the embodiment is shown in Figure 8 as a specific format of a person's 81-bit according to an embodiment; '' using the data bar Figure 9 (a Is shown in the format of a specific application identifier field of a specific field of the asie according to an embodiment;

圖9(b)所示的係根據一 的欄位資訊位元組的格式; 實施例的特定應用辨識符欄位 α圖9(c)所不的係具有根據一實施例之要件類型的棚位 k訊位元組中的攔位類型的數值對應關係; 圖10(a)所示的係根據一實施例的控制要件的格式; 圖10(b)所示的係根據一實施例的控制要件中的控制要 件資訊位元組的格式; 圖11 (a)所示的係根據一實施例的命令要件的格式;Figure 9(b) shows the format of the field information byte according to one; the specific application identifier field of the embodiment α is not shown in Figure 9(c). The numerical correspondence of the type of the bit in the bit k bit group; Figure 10 (a) shows the format of the control element according to an embodiment; Figure 10 (b) shows the control according to an embodiment The format of the control element information byte in the element; Figure 11 (a) shows the format of the command element according to an embodiment;

圖11 (b)所示的係根據一實施例的命令要件中的命令要 件資訊位元組的格式; 圖12(a)所示的係根據一實施例的查詢資訊攔位的格 式; 圖12(b)所示的係根據一實施例的查詢資訊欄位中的查 詢控制位元組的格式; 圖13(a)至(c)所示的係根據一實施例的修正型分散式 保留協定(DRP)的細節; 圖14(a)至(c)所示的係根據一實施例所提議之修正型 109 201012157 優先化通道存取(PCA)可利用性ιέ ; 圖15(a)至(c)所示的係根據一實施例所提議之修正型 撤回請求IE ; 圖16(a)至(b)所示的係根據一實施例所提議之修正型 PHY能力IE ; 圖17(a)至(c)所示的係根據一實施例所提議之增強型 DRP可利用性IE ; 圖1 8(a)所不的係根據一實施例的特定無線電通訊系 統; ❿ 圖1 8(b)所示的係根據一實施例用於保留無線電資源的 方法; 圖1 8(c)所示的係根據一實施例用於保留無線電資源的 方法; 圖18(d)所示的係根據一實施例的特定無線電通訊終端 裝置; 圖18(e)所示的係根據一實施例的特定無線電通訊終端 裝置; ❿ 圖19所示的係根據一實施例的計數回退模組與協定; 圖20(a)所示的係根據一實施例的鏈路回授命令訊框的 酬載的格式; 圖20(b)所示的係根據一實施例的鏈路回授命令訊框的 酬載的格式; 圖20⑷所示的係一實施例中的鍵路回授控制棚位的格 式, 110 201012157 圖21(a)所不的係根據一實施例的鏈路資訊攔位的替 格式; 圖21(b)所示的係一實施例中的裝置清單欄位的格式; 圖22(a)所tf的係根據一實施例的命令或控制訊框的酬 栽的格式; 圖22(b)所示的係根據一實施例的鏈路回授控制位元組 的格式; 魯 圖22(c)所示的係根據一實施例的鍵路回授控制位元組 的替代格式; 圈23(a)所示的係根據一實施例的同步化方法; 圖23(b)所示的係根據一實施例的特定無線電通訊終端 I置; 圖24所示的係根據一實施例的增強型BP交換iE的格 式; 圖25(a)所示的係根據一實施例的同步化方法; Ο 圖25〇>)所示的係根據一實施例的特定無線電通訊終端 裝置; 、 圖26所示的係根據一實施例的同步化方法;以及 圖27所示的係在該同步化方法中所使用的某些參數的 可能數值。 【主要元件符號說明】 100 特定無線電通訊群 101 特定圓形線 102 特定圓形線 111 201012157 103 特定圓 形 線 111 特定裝 置 A 112 特定裝 置 B 113 特定裝 置 C 114 特定裝 置 D 115 特定裝 置 E 116 特定裝 置 F 117 特定裝 置 G 118 特定裝 置 Η 201 頻帶群 202 OFDM 符 號 時 間 203 OFDM 符 號 時 間 204 OFDM 符 號 時 間 205 OFDM 符號 時 間 206 OFDM 符 號 時 間 207 OFDM 符 號 時 間 211 頻帶 221 頻帶 231 頻帶 241- 246 灰色框 體 251- 256 灰色框 體 261- 266 灰色框體 301 信標週期 302 資料週期Figure 11 (b) shows the format of the command element information bit in the command element according to an embodiment; Figure 12 (a) shows the format of the query information block according to an embodiment; (b) shows the format of the query control byte in the query information field according to an embodiment; Figure 13 (a) to (c) shows a modified distributed reservation protocol according to an embodiment. Details of (DRP); Figures 14(a) to (c) are modified according to an embodiment 109 201012157 Prioritized Channel Access (PCA) availability ι ; Figure 15 (a) to ( c) shows a modified withdrawal request IE proposed according to an embodiment; Figures 16(a) to (b) show modified PHY capability IE according to an embodiment; Fig. 17(a) To (c) is an enhanced DRP availability IE proposed according to an embodiment; Figure 18 (a) is not a specific radio communication system according to an embodiment; ❿ Figure 18 (b) Shown is a method for preserving radio resources according to an embodiment; FIG. 18(c) is a method for preserving radio resources according to an embodiment; FIG. 8(d) shows a specific radio communication terminal device according to an embodiment; FIG. 18(e) shows a specific radio communication terminal device according to an embodiment; ❿ FIG. 19 shows an embodiment according to an embodiment The counting back-off module and the agreement; FIG. 20(a) shows the format of the payload of the link feedback command frame according to an embodiment; FIG. 20(b) shows the embodiment according to an embodiment. The format of the payload of the link feedback command frame; the format of the key feedback control booth in the embodiment shown in FIG. 20(4), 110 201012157, FIG. 21(a) is not according to an embodiment. The format of the link information interception; Figure 21 (b) shows the format of the device list field in an embodiment; Figure 22 (a) shows the tf according to an embodiment of the command or control frame Figure 22(b) shows the format of the link feedback control byte according to an embodiment; Figure 22(c) shows the key feedback control according to an embodiment. An alternative format for the byte; circle 23(a) is a synchronization method according to an embodiment; FIG. 23(b) is a special embodiment according to an embodiment The radio communication terminal I is placed; FIG. 24 is a format of an enhanced BP exchange iE according to an embodiment; FIG. 25(a) is a synchronization method according to an embodiment; Ο FIG. 25〇> a specific radio communication terminal device according to an embodiment; a synchronization method according to an embodiment shown in FIG. 26; and some of the systems used in the synchronization method shown in FIG. Possible values for the parameter. [Main component symbol description] 100 specific radio communication group 101 specific circular line 102 specific circular line 111 201012157 103 specific circular line 111 specific device A 112 specific device B 113 specific device C 114 specific device D 115 specific device E 116 specific Apparatus F 117 Specific apparatus G 118 Specific apparatus Η 201 Band group 202 OFDM Symbol time 203 OFDM Symbol time 204 OFDM Symbol time 205 OFDM Symbol time 206 OFDM Symbol time 207 OFDM Symbol time 211 Band 221 Band 231 Band 241- 246 Gray frame 251 - 256 gray frame 261- 266 gray frame 301 beacon period 302 data cycle

112 201012157 303 媒體存取槽(MAS) 304 OFDM符號傳送持續長度(OSTD) 305 媒體存取槽(MAS)起點 310 超訊框 400 特定應用資訊要件(ASIE)格式 401 要件ID欄位 402 長度欄位 403 特定應用資訊要件(ASIE)指定符ID攔位112 201012157 303 Media Access Slot (MAS) 304 OFDM Symbol Transfer Duration (OSTD) 305 Media Access Slot (MAS) Start Point 310 Hyperframe 400 Application Specific Information Element (ASIE) Format 401 Attribute ID Field 402 Length Field 403 Application Specific Information Element (ASIE) Specifier ID Block

404 特定應用資料欄位 500 特定應用命令/控制訊框酬載格式 501 指定符ID攔位 502 特定應用資料欄位 600 特定應用探測資訊要件格式 601 要件ID攔位 602 長度攔位 603 目標裝置位址欄位404 Specific Application Data Field 500 Specific Application Command/Control Frame Reload Format 501 Specifier ID Block 502 Specific Application Data Field 600 Specific Application Probing Information Element Format 601 Requisition ID Block 602 Length Block 603 Target Device Address Field

604 特定應用資訊要件(ASIE)指定符ID欄位 605 特定應用請求資訊欄位 700 特定應用控制欄位 701 位元0至位元2 702 位元3至位元7/位元1 5 800 資料爛位格式 801 特定應用指定符欄位 802 連續資訊集 113 201012157 901 攔位資訊欄位 902 要件數量/位元組數量攔位 903 位元4至位元7 904 位元0至位元3 1001 控制要件 1002 控制要件資訊攔位 1003 控制要件長度欄位 1004 控制要件酬載欄位 1005 位元0至位元3 1006 位元4至位元7/位元 15 1101 命令要件 1102 命令要件資訊欄位 1103 命令要件長度欄位 1104 命令要件酬載攔位 1105 位元0至位元3 1106 位元4至位元7/位元 15 1201 查詢資訊欄位 1202 查詢控制攔位 1203 查詢長度欄位 1204 特定查詢資料 1205 位元0至位元3 1206 位元4至位元6 1207 位元7 1301 修正型DRP IE格式604 Specific Application Information Element (ASIE) Specifier ID Field 605 Specific Application Request Information Field 700 Specific Application Control Field 701 Bit 0 to Bit 2 702 Bit 3 to Bit 7/Bit 1 5 800 Bad Bit format 801 Specific application specification field 802 Continuous information set 113 201012157 901 Block information field 902 Number of elements / Number of bytes Block 903 Bit 4 to Bit 7 904 Bit 0 to Bit 3 1001 Control requirements 1002 Control element information block 1003 Control element length field 1004 Control element payload field 1005 bit 0 to bit 3 1006 bit 4 to bit 7/bit 15 1101 Command requirement 1102 Command requirement information field 1103 command Requirement Length Field 1104 Command Requirement Reminder 1105 Bit 0 to Bit 3 1106 Bit 4 to Bit 7/Bit 15 1201 Query Information Field 1202 Query Control Block 1203 Query Length Field 1204 Specific Query Data 1205 bit 0 to bit 3 1206 bit 4 to bit 6 1207 bit 7 1301 modified DRP IE format

114 201012157 1302 DRP控制攔位格式 1303 表 1401 格式 1402 格式 1403 表114 201012157 1302 DRP Control Intercept Format 1303 Table 1401 Format 1402 Format 1403 Table

1501 修正型撤回請求IE 1502 撤回請求IE的撤回請求控制欄位格式 1503 表1501 Modified Revocation Request IE 1502 Revocation Request IE Revocation Request Control Field Format 1503 Table

1601 修正型PHY能力IE 1602 PHY能力IE的TFC偏移控制欄位 1701 增強型DRP可利用性IE格式 1702 增強型DRP可利用性IE的解釋攔位 1703 表 1800 擴大型信標群 1830 無線電通訊終端裝置1601 Modified PHY Capability IE 1602 TF Capability Control Field IE TFC Offset Control Field 1701 Enhanced DRP Availability IE Format 1702 Enhanced DRP Availability IE Interpretation Block 1703 Table 1800 Extended Beacon Group 1830 Radio Communication Terminal Device

1831 第一產生器 1832 第一編碼器 1833 第二產生器 1834 第二編碼器 1835 第一傳送器 1836 保留電路 1837 第三產生器 1838 第三編碼器 1839 第二傳送器 115 201012157 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 2001 2010 2011 2012 2013 2020 2021 2022 無線電通訊終端裝置 第一判斷電路 第二判斷電路 第一傳送器 保留電路 產生器 編碼器 第二傳送器 裝置A1 裝置A2 裝置A3 裝置A4 裝置A5 裝置B1 裝置B2 裝置B3 格式 鏈路回授控制欄位 裝置清單欄位 鍵路資訊搁位 LQI欄位 位元12至位元1 5 位元8至位元11 位元4至位元7 116 2010121571831 first generator 1832 first encoder 1833 second generator 1834 second encoder 1835 first transmitter 1836 reserved circuit 1837 third generator 1838 third encoder 1839 second transmitter 115 201012157 1840 1841 1842 1843 1844 1845 1846 1847 1851 1852 1853 1854 1855 1856 1857 1858 2001 2010 2011 2012 2013 2020 2021 2022 Radio communication terminal device first judgment circuit second judgment circuit first transmitter reservation circuit generator encoder second transmitter device A1 device A2 device A3 device A4 device A5 device B1 device B2 device B3 format link feedback control field device list field key information information shelf LQI field bit 12 to bit 1 5 bit 8 to bit 11 bit 4 to Bit 7 116 201012157

2023 位元3 2024 位元2 2025 位元1 2026 位元0 2030 接收者訊框遺失計數攔位 2031 接收者訊框錯誤計數欄位 2032 接收者訊框計數攔位 2033 來源訊框計數欄位 2034 測量視窗大小欄位 2101 接收者訊框遺失率欄位 2102 接收者訊框錯誤率攔位 2103 測量視窗大小攔位 2110 裝置位址欄位 2201 位元組 2202 位元組 2203 位元組 2204 位元組 2205 位元組 2206 位元組 2207 位元組 2208 位元2至位元7 2209 位元1 2210 命令/控制訊框 2211 位元0 117 201012157 22 1 2 位元3至位元7 2213 位元2 2214 位元1 2215 位元〇 2220 格式 2230 格式 2310 第一無線電通訊終端裝置 2311 第一判斷電路2023 Bit 3 2024 Bit 2 2025 Bit 1 2026 Bit 0 2030 Receiver Frame Loss Count Block 2031 Receiver Frame Error Count Field 2032 Receiver Frame Count Block 2033 Source Frame Count Field 2034 Measurement window size field 2101 Receiver frame loss rate field 2102 Receiver frame error rate block 2103 Measurement window size block 2110 Device address field 2201 byte 2202 byte 2203 byte 2204 bit Group 2205 Byte 2206 Byte 2207 Byte 2208 Bit 2 to Bit 7 2209 Bit 1 2210 Command / Control Frame 2211 Bit 0 117 201012157 22 1 2 Bit 3 to Bit 7 2213 Bit 2 2214 bit 1 2215 bit 〇 2220 format 2230 format 2310 first radio communication terminal device 2311 first judgment circuit

2312 第二判斷電路 2313 同步化電路 2314 第三判斷電路 2400 增強型BP交換IE格式 2401 要件ID欄位 2402 長度攔位 2403 BP移動向下計數欄位 2404 信標槽偏移欄位2312 Second Judgment Circuit 2313 Synchronization Circuit 2314 Third Judgment Circuit 2400 Enhanced BP Interchange IE Format 2401 Requirement ID Field 2402 Length Intercept 2403 BP Move Down Count Field 2404 Beacon Slot Offset

2405 時脈週期偏移欄位 2406 BPST偏移攔位 2510 第一無線電通訊終端裝置 2511 判斷電路 2512 同步化電路 2513 產生電路 2514 傳送電路 1182405 Clock cycle offset field 2406 BPST offset block 2510 First radio communication terminal device 2511 Judgment circuit 2512 Synchronization circuit 2513 Generation circuit 2514 Transmission circuit 118

Claims (1)

201012157 七、申請專利範圍: 1.一種用於在無線電通訊系統中請求無線電資源的方 法,該方法包括: 產生與編碼包含複數個有槽時間/頻率部分的無線電資 源的一第一請求訊息,其中,該第一請求訊息包含一根據 可由第-類型無線電通訊終端裝置及第二類型無線電通訊 終端裝置來解碼之第-通訊協定格式被編碼的資訊要件, #中’該第-類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以 僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻 率部分通訊,而該第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置則係被 配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/ 頻率部分通訊; 請求訊息所請求的無線電資源無法利用 假如該第 〜抑外电頁琢熬沄利用, 則產生與編瑪包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的無線電 資源的一第二請求訊息,其中,該第二請求訊息包含一根 ❹,可由第二類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之第二通訊協 定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件。 2.如申請專利範圍第}項之方法其中,該無線電通訊 係-特定無線電通訊系統,而該第—類型無線電通訊 _ 及該第一類型無線電通訊終端裝置皆為特定無線 電通訊終端裝置。 3. 如争請專利範圍第 率部分包括時間/頻率碼。 4. 如申請專利範圍第 1項之方法,其中,該等時間/頻 1項之方法,其令,該第一請求訊 119 201012157 息包含一用以請求一媒體存取槽的資訊要件,該媒體存取 槽包括作為内定有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的複數個有槽時間 /頻率部分。 5.如申請專利範圍第2項之方法,其係由一特定無線電 通訊終端裝置來實行。 6·如申請專利範圍第5項之方法,其進一步包括:傳送 該第-請求訊息給另-特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另一201012157 VII. Patent Application Range: 1. A method for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system, the method comprising: generating and encoding a first request message comprising radio resources comprising a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions, wherein The first request message includes an information element encoded according to a first communication protocol format that can be decoded by the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device, #中' the first type of radio communication terminal The device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication, and the second type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time /frequency part communication and slotted offset time/frequency part communication; the radio resource requested by the request message cannot be used. If the first and the external power page are used, the generation and the arranging include a plurality of slotted offset times/ a second request message of the radio resource of the frequency portion, wherein the second request message Comprising a ❹, type radio communication by the second terminal of the second communication apparatus to decode encoded format agreement information specific application requirements. 2. The method of claim 5, wherein the radio communication system is a specific radio communication system, and the first type of radio communication device and the first type of radio communication terminal device are specific radio communication terminal devices. 3. If the content of the patent scope is part of the scope, the time/frequency code is included. 4. The method of claim 1, wherein the method of time/frequency 1 causes the first request message 119 201012157 to include an information element for requesting a media access slot, The media access slot includes a plurality of slotted time/frequency portions as part of the slot offset time/frequency. 5. The method of claim 2, which is carried out by a specific radio communication terminal device. 6. The method of claim 5, further comprising: transmitting the first request message to another specific radio communication terminal device, the other 特定無線電通訊終端裝置係位於和該特定無線電通訊終端 裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群之中。 …7.如申請專利範圍第6項之方法,其中,該特定無線電 通訊群係一特定無線電通訊信標群。 “申請專利範圍第Μ之方法,其進一步包括:假如 求訊息所請求的無線電資源可以利用,則保留該 專被凊求的無線電資源。 =請專利範圍第丨項之方法,其進一步包括:假如The particular radio communication terminal device is located in the same specific radio communication group as the particular radio communication terminal device. The method of claim 6, wherein the particular radio communication group is a specific radio communication beacon group. The method of applying for the scope of the patent scope further includes: if the radio resource requested by the message is available, retaining the radio resource that is specifically requested. = The method of claim 3, further comprising: :碼訊心所請求的無線電資源無法利用,則產生、 置= -資源保留訊息給另-無線電通訊終端裝 端裝L目訊終端裝置係位於和該無線電通訊終 細装置相同的無線電通訊群之中。 …申請專利範圍第9項之方法,其中,該資源保留 格二二特定應用資訊要件’其係根據該第二通訊協定 資源的方用:在無線電通訊系統中決定可利用的無線電 貝尿的方法,該方法包括: 120 201012157 判斷包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的需 電資源是否可以利用; ‘'''線 假如該等需要的無線電資源無法利用,則利用該等無 線電資源的-請求訊息來判斷包含不同複數個有槽偏移時 間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是否可以利用,其中,咳 請求訊息包含-根據可由某種類型無線電通訊終端裝置= 解碼之通訊協定格式被編碼的特定應用資訊要件,其中, 該類型的無線電通訊終總奘要#、^ 艰机,、峒褒置係被配置成用以提 _率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊/、 12·如申請專利範圍第11項之方法,其中,該無線電通 訊系統係-種特定無線電通訊系統,而該被 供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部= =無線電通訊終端裝置類㈣-種特定线電通訊終端裝 罝0 13.如申請專利範圍第丨丨項之方法,里中,該 的無線電資源是否可以利用 ^ J斷需要 請求訊息來判斷必要無線電資源是否可以利用,^兮 凊求祝息包括根據可由某種類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解 碼之通訊協定格式被編碼的資訊要件,其令,該 :線:通Γ終:裝置係被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部 刀通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 14·如申請專利範圍第13項之 ° 用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率 ’其中’該被配置成 /頻率部分通訊的無線通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間 的無線電通訊終端裝置類型係一種特定無線 121 201012157 電通訊終端裝置。 丨5·如申請專利範圍第u項之方法 頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼。 、該等 時間/ 16. 如申請專利範圍第11項之方法,其由 包含-用以請求—包括複數個有槽偏、相該請求訊息 體存取槽的特定應用資訊要件。 s頻率部分之媒 17. 如申請專利範圍第12項之方法 電通訊終端裝置來實行。 田特定無線 ❹ 如申請專利範圍第17項之方法, 送該請求訊息給另一特定無線電通訊終端裝=包括、傳 定無線電通訊終端裝置係位於和該特定 置相同的特定無"通訊群之巾。 電通I終端裝 19.如申請專利範圍第18項之方 電通訊群係-特定無線電通訊信標群。八’該特定無線 申請專利範圍第13項之方法,其進一步包括:假 如該清求sfL息所請求的無结雷杳、雇 要的無線電資源無線電資源可以利用則保留該等需 21.如申請專利範圍第17項之方法,其進一步包括:假 如該等需要的無線電資源無法利用則產生、編碼、以及傳 送-資源保留訊息給另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另 一特定無線電通訊終端裝置係位於和該特定無線電通訊終 端裝置相同的特定無線電通訊群之中。 22·如申請專利範圍第21項之方法,其中,該資源保留 訊息包含-特定應用資訊要件’其係根據該第二通訊協定 122 201012157 格式被編碼。 23.—種用於在無線電通訊系 成备文h 尔玩中请求無線電資源的盔 線電通訊終端裝置,該無狳雪福— "’、 透黑線電通訊終端裝置包括: 一第一產生器與一第一編碼器 w盗’其係被配置成用以逢 生與編碼包含複數個有槽時間/頻 用平。Ρ分的無線電資源的一 第一請求訊息,其中,該第一請灰 衣訊息包含一根據可由第 -類型無線電通訊終端裝置及第二類型無線電通訊終端裝 ❹ 置來解碼之第一通訊協定格式被編碼的資訊要件,盆中,、 該第-類型的無線電通訊終端褒置係被配置成用以僅提供 有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分 通訊,而該第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置則係被配置成 用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有槽偏移時間/頻率部 分通訊; 一第二產生器與一第二編碼器,其係被配置成用以在 該第一請求訊息所請求的無線電資源無法利用時產生與編 碼包含複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的無線電資源的一第 二請求訊息’其中,該第二請求訊息包含一根據可由第二 類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之第二通訊協定格式被編 碼的特定應用資訊要件。 24.如申請專利範圍第23項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 係一用於在一特定無線電通訊系統中請求無線電資源的一 特定無線電通訊終端裝置’其中,該第一類型無線電通訊 終端裝置及該第二類型無線電通訊終端裝置皆為特定無線 電通訊終端裝置。 123 201012157 25.如中請專利範圍第23項之無線電通 中,該等時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻㈣。 置,其 26·如中4專㈣圍第23項之無線電通 要件’該媒*存取待包括作為内定有槽偏移時二二訊 的複數個有槽時間/頻率部分。 鴻年4分: If the radio resource requested by the code message is not available, then generate, set the resource reservation message to the other radio communication terminal, and install the L-message terminal device in the same radio communication group as the radio communication terminal device. in. ... the method of claim 9, wherein the resource retains a specific application information element 'based on the second communication protocol resource: a method of determining available radio shellfish in a radio communication system The method includes: 120 201012157 determining whether a power resource including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions is available; '''' line if the required radio resources are unavailable, and utilizing the radio resources - Requesting a message to determine whether a required radio resource containing a different plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions is available, wherein the cough request message includes - encoded according to a protocol format that can be decoded by a type of radio communication terminal device = decoding Specific application information requirements, where the type of radio communication is always awkward, and the device is configured to provide _ rate partial communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication/, 12 The method of claim 11, wherein the radio communication system is a specific radio communication system System, and the slotted time/frequency part communication and slotted offset time/frequency part ==radio communication terminal device type (4)-special line communication terminal assembly 0 13. If the patent application scope item In the method, whether the radio resource can utilize the request message to determine whether the necessary radio resources are available, and the request for interest includes a protocol format that can be decoded by a certain type of radio communication terminal device. The encoded information element, which: line: overnight: the device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency knife communication without providing slot offset time/frequency portion communication. 14· As for the scope of patent application, item 13 is used to provide only the slotted time/frequency 'where' the type of radio communication device that is configured to communicate with the frequency portion without providing slotted offset time Specific wireless 121 201012157 Electrical communication terminal device.丨5· The method of applying the patent scope item u The frequency part includes the time/frequency code. Such time / 16. The method of claim 11 of the patent application, comprising - for requesting - includes a plurality of slot-specific, specific application information elements of the request message access slot. The medium of the s frequency portion 17. The method of claim 12 of the patent scope is implemented by an electric communication terminal device. Field-specific wireless ❹ If the method of claim 17 is applied, the request message is sent to another specific radio communication terminal. Included, the radio communication terminal device is located in the same specific " communication group as the specific towel. Dentsu I terminal installation 19. If the patent application scope of item 18 of the telecommunications group - a specific radio communication beacon group. VIII. The method of claim 13 of the specific wireless application patent, further comprising: if the unresolved thunder requested by the sfL request, the radio resource of the radio resource available for employment is retained, the requirement is retained. The method of clause 17 further comprising: generating, encoding, and transmitting a resource reservation message to another particular radio communication terminal device if the required radio resources are not available, the other specific radio communication terminal device Located in the same specific radio communication group as the particular radio communication terminal device. 22. The method of claim 21, wherein the resource reservation message comprises a specific application information element' which is encoded according to the second communication protocol 122 201012157 format. 23. A helmet line communication terminal device for requesting radio resources in a radio communication system, the innocent Xuefu-", the black-wired communication terminal device comprises: a first The generator and the first encoder are configured to include a plurality of slotted time/frequency levels for each of the codes and codes. a first request message of the allocated radio resource, wherein the first request gray message comprises a first protocol format decoded according to the first type of radio communication terminal device and the second type of radio communication terminal device The encoded information element, the basin, the first type of radio communication terminal is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slot offset time/frequency portion communication, and The second type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication; a second generator and a second encoder configured Generating a second request message for encoding a radio resource including a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions when the radio resource requested by the first request message is unavailable, wherein the second request message includes a A specific application information element encoded according to a second protocol format that can be decoded by the second type of radio communication terminal device. 24. The radio communication terminal device of claim 23, which is a specific radio communication terminal device for requesting radio resources in a specific radio communication system, wherein the first type of radio communication terminal device and the The second type of radio communication terminal devices are all specific radio communication terminal devices. 123 201012157 25. In the radiocommunication of claim 23, the time/frequency portion includes time/frequency (4). The radio pass element of the 23rd item of the 4th (4th) section of the medium 4 access to the plurality of slotted time/frequency portions to be included as the 2nd bit of the slot offset. 4 years of the year “2:.::請專利範圍第24項之無線電通訊終端襄置,其 :一:包括二一傳送器’其係被配置成用以傳送該第—t: U另-特定無線電通訊終端裝置肖另月 電通訊終端裝置係位於和該㈣無線電通訊終端裝= 的特定無線電通訊群之中。 ϊ相R 认如申請專利範圍第27項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 中,該特定無線電通訊群係-特定無線電通訊信標群。 29.如申請專利範圍第23項之無線電通訊終端裝 進一步包括·一保留轉,其係被配置成用以在該第一請 求訊息所請求的無線電資源可 W"2:.:: The radio communication terminal device of claim 24 of the patent scope, wherein: a: a two-one transmitter is configured to transmit the first-t: U-specific radio communication terminal device The short-term communication terminal device of Xiao is located in the specific radio communication group of the (4) radio communication terminal. The phase R is recognized as the radio communication terminal device of claim 27, wherein the specific radio communication group - a specific radio communication beacon group. 29. The radio communication terminal of claim 23, further comprising: a reservation transfer, configured to be used for the radio resource requested by the first request message 求的無線電資源。 、㈣時’則保留該等被請 3〇·如申請專利範圍第27項之無線電通訊 進一步包括:―第三產生器、-第三編碼器、以及—第: 傳送器,它們係被配置成“在該第__請求訊息所請㈣ 無線電資源無法利用時,則產生、編碼、以及傳送一資源 保留訊息給另-特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另 線電通訊終端裝置係位於和該特定無㈣通訊㈣裝置相 同的特定無線電通訊群之中。 124 201012157 31. 如申请專利範圍第3〇項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 中,該資源保留訊息包含一特定應用資訊要件,其係根據 該第二通訊協定格式被編碼。 32. —種用於在無線電通訊系統中決定可利用的無線電 資源的無線電通訊終端裝置,該無線電通訊終端裝置包括: 第判斷電路,其係被配置成用以判斷包含複數個 有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的需要的無線電資源是否可以利 用;Request for radio resources. And (4) when the 'reservation of such a request is 3'. The radio communication as claimed in item 27 of the patent application further includes: - a third generator, a third encoder, and - a: transmitter, which are configured to "When the radio resource is unavailable, the radio resource is generated, encoded, and transmitted to the other specific radio communication terminal device, and the alternative radio communication terminal device is located at the specific (d) communications (4) among the same specific radio communication groups. 124 201012157 31. The radio communication terminal device of claim 3, wherein the resource reservation message includes a specific application information element, according to the second The communication protocol format is encoded. 32. A radio communication terminal device for determining available radio resources in a radio communication system, the radio communication terminal device comprising: a first determining circuit configured to determine that the plurality of bits are included Whether the required radio resources with slot offset time/frequency portion are available; ❹ 一判斷電路,其係被配置成用以在該等需要的無 線電資源無法利用時,則利用該等無線電資源的一請求訊 來判斷包3不同複數個有槽偏移時間/頻率部分的需要的 無線電資源是否可以利用H該請求訊息包含一根據 可由某種類型無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼之通訊協定格式 的特定應用資訊要件,其中,該類型的無線電通訊 係被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及有 槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 33.如申請專利範圍第32項之無線電通訊終 係一用於在一特定盔 資源的中決定可利用的無線電 '、、、定…、線電通訊終端裝置,其中,詨 提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊及偏以瓶 以 訊的盔始恭 令僧偏移時間/頻率部分通 I置無線電通訊終端裝置類型係-種特定無線電通訊終端 '申凊專利範圍第3 2項之盔娩带 ψ , ψ m 唄之…、線電通訊終端裝置,其 T这第-判斷電路係被配置直具 取用以利用該等無線電資源 125 201012157 的-請求訊息來邦斷需要的無線 中,該請求訊息包括根據可由某種類利用’其 置來解碼之通訊協定格式被編喝 要件電^終端裝 頻率;端裝置係被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/ 如申:Γ提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 中,二圍第34項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提a judging circuit configured to use the request signal of the radio resources to determine the need for a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions of the packet 3 when the required radio resources are unavailable Whether the radio resource can utilize H. The request message includes a specific application information element according to a protocol format that can be decoded by a type of radio communication terminal device, wherein the type of radio communication system is configured to provide slotted time. / Frequency part communication and slotted offset time / frequency part communication. 33. The radio communication terminal of claim 32 is for determining the available radio ', , , ..., line communication terminal device in a specific helmet resource, wherein the slot is provided with slot time/ The frequency part of the communication and the partial orientation of the bottle to the signal, the offset time/frequency part, the I set the type of the radio communication terminal device, the specific type of radio communication terminal, and the scope of the invention. , ψ m ... ..., the line communication terminal device, the T-threshold circuit is configured to take the request message using the radio resource 125 201012157 to intercept the required wireless, the request message Including the frequency of the terminal device being used according to a communication protocol format that can be decoded by a certain class; the terminal device is configured to provide only the slotted time / 申: Γ provides slot offset time / Frequency part communication. In the radio communication terminal device of No. 34 of the second division, it only provides slot time/frequency part communication without mentioning =:=:/頻率部分通訊的無線電通訊終端裝置2 、種特疋無線電通訊終端裝置。 二如申請專利範圍第32項之無線電通 令,該等時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼。 37:如申請專利範圍第33項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 中,該清求訊息包含一用以古圭击. 用吻求一包括複數個有槽偏移時 間/頻率部分之媒體存取槽的特定應用資訊要件。=:=:/The radio communication terminal device 2 for communication of the frequency part, the special radio communication terminal device. 2. For example, the radio frequency of claim 32, the time/frequency part includes the time/frequency code. 37: The radio communication terminal device of claim 33, wherein the request message comprises a message used for Gu Gue. Using a kiss to obtain a media access slot comprising a plurality of slotted offset time/frequency portions Specific application information elements. 、^如t請專利範圍第37項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 進-步包括第-傳送器,其係被配置成用以傳送該請 求訊息給另-特定無線電通訊終端裝置,該另—特定無^ 電通訊終端裝置係位於和該特定無線電通訊終端裝置相同 的特定無線電通訊群之中。 39.如申请專利範圍第38項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 中,該特定無線電通訊群係一特定無線電通訊信標群。、 4〇.如申清專利範圍第32項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 進一步包括:一保留電路,其係被配置成用以在該第—請 求訊息所請求的無線電資源可以利用時,則保留該等需要 126 201012157 的無線電資源。 、一 &申明專利範圍第38項之無線電通訊終端裝置,其 於步I括產生器、一編碼器、以及一傳送器,它們 係被配置成用以在該笨堂亜认&治& 需要的無線電資源無法利用時,則 產生、編碼、以及傳送一眘谓仅囪切6 通訊終端裝置,續息給另一特定無線電 該另一特定無線電通訊終端裝置係位於和 該特定無線電通訊終端裝w 中。 碼展置相冋的特定無線電通訊群之 42.如申請專利範圍第41 無線電通訊終端裝置,其 中,該資源保留訊息包含一特定處田& 嗲第-#定應用資訊要件,其係根據 °玄第一通訊協定格式被編碼。 43 _—種用於在無線電 讯系統中同步化至少一第一無 線電通訊終端裝置和一第二 無 該方法包括: ·,,、線電相終端裝置的方法, 判斷該第二無線電通訊 ❹ 時間中、、5古拎繳甘门 裝置是否已經在一段預設 時間中沒有改變其同步化傳送週期起始時間. 決定該第二無線電通訊終 始時間; 1的冋步化傳送週期起 假如該第二無線電通訊終端裝 中沒有改變其同步化傳送週期!在-段預設時間 通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始該第-無線電 電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始0 °又為该第二無線 44.如申請專利範圍第43項之方時間。 電通訊終端裝置及該第二無線 ,其中,該第一無線 、通訊終端裝置皆為一特定 127 201012157 無線電通訊系統中的特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 —如中請專利範圍第㈣之方法,其進—步包括、 疋該第—無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈週期。 ,、 46.如申請專㈣圍第43項之方法其進—步 二無線電通訊終端裝置已經在-段預設時間中心 -無線電通訊終端裝置的一暫存 = 終端裝置的時脈。 热踝電通訊 47_如申請專利範圍第43 . ^ _ 送週期起始時間為信標週期起始時間。’…同步化傳 48.如申請專利範圍第43 電通訊終端褒置為第’該第二無線 被配置成心僅提#有槽時通料端裝置,其係 偏移㈣頻率部/通有:。時間/頻率部分通訊*不提供有槽 ❹ 電通專利範圍第43項之方法,”,該第-無線 二::裝置為第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置,其係 -頻率部=有槽時間/頻率部分通訊以及 有槽偏移時 50.如申請專利範 時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻率;。項之方法,其中,該等 無線第43項之方法,其中,判斷該第二 其同步化傳送在:段預設時間中沒有改變 端裝置β °、 a匕括判斷該第二無線電通訊終 疋已經在預設數量的訊框及超訊框的至少其中一 128 201012157 者中沒有改變其同步化傳送週期起始時間。 5 2.如申請專利範圍第4 3項之方法,其係由一特定無線 電通訊終端裝置來實行。 …” 5 3.如申請專利範圍第43項之方法,其進一步包括· 判斷該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起 始時間疋否已經被設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步 化傳送週期起始時間; ’ ❹ 假如該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起 始時間已經被設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳 送週期起始時間,則將該第三無線電通訊終端裝置的同步 化傳送週期起始時間設為該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同 步化傳送週期起始時間。 54·如申請專利範圍第53項之方法,其中,該第三無線 電通訊終端裝置係和該第一無線電通訊終端裝置相同類型 的無線電通訊終端裝置。The radio communication terminal device of claim 37, further comprising a first transmitter configured to transmit the request message to another specific radio communication terminal device, the other specific The radio communication terminal device is located in the same specific radio communication group as the specific radio communication terminal device. 39. The radio communication terminal device of claim 38, wherein the particular radio communication group is a specific radio communication beacon group. 4. The radio communication terminal device of claim 32, further comprising: a reservation circuit configured to reserve when the radio resource requested by the first request message is available These require radio resources of 126 201012157. A radio communication terminal device of claim 38, which comprises a generator, an encoder, and a transmitter, which are configured to recognize &&& When the required radio resources are not available, then generate, encode, and transmit a caution that only the communication terminal device is switched on, and the other specific radio communication device is renewed to the specific radio communication terminal. Install w. 42. The specific radio communication group of the invention is 42. The patent reservation range 41th radio communication terminal device, wherein the resource reservation message includes a specific field &嗲第## application information element, which is based on The first communication protocol format is encoded. 43 _ - a method for synchronizing at least a first radio communication terminal device and a second no method in a radio system comprising: -,, a method of terminating a line phase terminal device, determining the second radio communication time Whether the middle and the 5th 拎Gan Ganmen device have not changed the start time of the synchronization transmission cycle for a predetermined period of time. Determine the second radio communication end time; 1 the pacing transmission period starts from the second The radio communication terminal has not changed its synchronization transmission cycle! In the synchronized transmission period of the communication terminal device at the preset time, the synchronization transmission period of the first radio communication terminal device starts 0° and is the second wireless unit. 44. time. The electronic communication terminal device and the second wireless device, wherein the first wireless communication terminal device is a specific radio communication terminal device in a specific 127 201012157 radio communication system. - The method of claim 4, wherein the method further comprises, ???the clock cycle of the first radio communication terminal device. , 46. If you apply for the special method (4), the method of step 43 is that the radio communication terminal device has been in the segment-preset time center - a temporary storage of the radio communication terminal device = the clock of the terminal device. Thermal communication 47_ If the scope of patent application is 43. ^ _ The start time of the transmission cycle is the start time of the beacon period. '...Synchronized transmission 48. If the patent application scope 43th communication terminal is set to the 'the second wireless is configured to only mention the # slotted material end device, which is offset (four) frequency portion / pass :. Time/Frequency Partial Communication* does not provide a method of slotting ❹ Patent No. 43 of the patent scope,", the first - wireless two:: the device is a second type of radio communication terminal device, the system-frequency portion = slotted time / Frequency portion communication and slotted offset 50. If the patent application time/frequency portion includes a time/frequency method, the wireless method of claim 43, wherein the second synchronous transmission is determined In the segment preset time, the end device is not changed, and the second radio communication terminal has not changed its synchronization in at least one of the preset number of frames and the frame of the superframe 128 201012157. The start time of the transmission cycle. 5 2. The method of claim 4, which is carried out by a specific radio communication terminal device. ... 5 5. The method of claim 43, further comprising Determining whether the synchronization transmission period start time of the first radio communication terminal device has been set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the second radio communication terminal device;同步 Synchronizing the third radio communication terminal device if the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device has been set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the second radio communication terminal device The transmission cycle start time is set to the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device. 54. The method of claim 53, wherein the third radio communication terminal device is the same type of radio communication terminal device as the first radio communication terminal device. 一裡用 、 7、隹無猓電通……〜,a y r —乐二無線電 通訊終端裝置的第—無線電通訊終《置,該第-無線電 通訊線她绽番右k ^ 通訊終端裝置包括: 一第一判斷電路,其係被配置成用以判斷該第二I 電通訊終端裝置是否已經在-段預設時間中沒有改變; 步化傳送週期起始時間 、 弟一刊斷電路,其係被配置 _ 、、队且力又用以决疋該第二無绩 電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間; — -同步化電路,其係被配置成用以在該第二無線電通 129 201012157 訊終端裝置已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變其同步化傳送 週期起始時間時將該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳 送週期起始時間設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化 傳送週期起始時間。 56‘如申凊專利範圍第55項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 置,其係一特定無線電通訊終端裝置,其中,該第二無線 電通訊終端裝置係—特定無線電通訊終端裝置,而該無線 電通λ系統係—特定無線電通訊系統。One-in-one, seven-in-one, no-in-one-in-one...~, ayr-le second radio communication terminal device--the radio communication terminal, the first-radio communication line a judging circuit configured to determine whether the second I telecommunications terminal device has not changed in the preset period of time; the step of the transmission period start time, the brother-discriminating circuit, The configuration _, the team and the force are used to determine the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the second non-volatile communication terminal device; - a synchronization circuit configured to be used in the second radio communication 129 201012157 The terminal device has set the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device to the synchronization of the second radio communication terminal device when the synchronization transmission cycle start time has not been changed for a preset period of time. The start time of the transfer cycle. 56' The first radio communication terminal device of claim 55, which is a specific radio communication terminal device, wherein the second radio communication terminal device is a specific radio communication terminal device, and the radio communication lambda system Department - a specific radio communication system. 7·士申請專利範圍第55項之第一無線電通訊終端襞 =其中,該第二判斷電路係進一步被配置成用以決定該 —無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈週期。 #申請專利範圍第56項之第-無線電通訊終端』 無绩:中,該同步化電路係進一步被配置成用以在該第: #線電通訊終端裝署 ^ . 步化值、,、 設時間中沒有改變其P 通訊終端Π起:時間時將一虛擬時脈(其係該第-無線, 的時脈。、#一暫存器)設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝j 置, 時間 59·如申請專利範圍第55項之第_ 其中,該同步化傳送週期起始時間 無線電通訊終端裝 係一信標週期起始The first radio communication terminal of the 55th patent application scope is wherein the second judging circuit is further configured to determine the clock period of the radio communication terminal device. #申请专利范围第56第第第通信终端』 No performance: The synchronization circuit is further configured to be installed in the #: line communication terminal ^. Step value,,, There is no change in the time when the P communication terminal is set up: when the time is a virtual clock (which is the time of the first wireless, the time slot, ##存存器) is set to the second radio communication terminal, time 59. If the scope of the patent application is 55, the start time of the synchronization transmission cycle is the start of a beacon period. |吻寸刊粑固第 55項之坌 _ 置,其中,哕笛一此, 項之第-無線電通訊終端裝 電通訊終端:置7其伟:裝置為第-類型的無線 部^…供"::=:=時_率 130 201012157 61.如申請專利範圍第η 置,其中,該第-無線電通訊終端電通訊終端農 電通訊終端裝置’其係被配置成 征、一類型的無線 分通訊以及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊'、有槽時間/頻率部 端裝㈣無線電通訊狄 63;^中,該等㈣、ς e ❹ 置二3.如申:專利範圍第55項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 裝置是否已經在一段預設時間中… 終端 期起始時間包括判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置是=週 在預設數量的訊框及超訊框的至 2 經 同步化傳送週期起始時間。 其中|中沒有改變其 64.如申請專利範圍第55項之篦一 置,其進-步包括:一第三判斷電通訊終端裝 判斷該第-無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳用以 送週期Sr為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳 65_—種無線電通訊系統,其包括 訊終:裝置和-第二無線電通訊終端裝二二—無線電通 二二:無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以判斷該第 變其同步化:終端裝置是否已經在一段預設時間中沒有改 ,化傳送週期起始時間; 二無i電電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以決定該第 電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間; 131 201012157 該第一無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以在該第二 無線電通訊終端裝置已經在一段預設時間中沒有改變其同 步化傳送週期起始時間時將該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的 同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置 的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 66.如申請專利範圍第65項之無線電通訊系統,其係一 特疋無線電通訊系统’其中,包括在該無線電通訊系統之 :的該至少第一無線電通訊終端裝置和第二無線電通訊終 端裝置皆為特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 _ 67·如申請專利範圍第65項之無線電通訊系統,其中, 該第一無線電通訊終端裝置係進一步被配置成用以決定該 第一無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈週期。 ▲ 68·如申請專利範圍第65項之無線電通訊系統,其中, 違第-無線電通訊終端裝置係㈣置成用以在該第二 電通訊終端獎罢ρ + …、綠 、裝置已絰在—段預設時間中沒有改變其同 起始時間時將虛擬時脈(其係該第一無線電通訊終 裝置的-暫存器)設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的時❹ 9.如申請專利範圍第Μ項之無線電通 也儿沾“· · _ 乃〜微外电m犰系、赛 …步化傳送週_始時間為信標週期起始時間— 該第-Γ %專利範31第65項之無線電通訊线,其中, Μ —無線電通訊終端裝置為第一類型的 裝置,其脑^的無線電通訊終端 僅提供有槽時間7頻率部Μ⑽ 杈供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 132 201012157 71·如申請專利範圍第&項 項之無線電通訊系統,其中, =第-無線電通訊終端裝置為第二類型的無線電通訊終端 J置’其係被配置成用以提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊以及 有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 72•如巾請專利範圍第70或71項之無線電通訊系統, 其中,該等時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼。 73. 如申請專利範圍第65項之無線電通訊系統,其中, ㈣第-無線電通訊終端裝置來判斷該第二無線電通訊終 端裝置是否已經在-段預設時間中沒有改變其同步化傳送 週期起始時間包括判斷該第二無線電通訊終端裝置是否已 經在預設數量的訊框及超訊框的至少其中一者中沒有改變 其同步化傳送週期起始時間。 74, 如申請專利範圍第65項之無線電通訊系統,其進一 步包括一第三無線電通訊終端裝置,其中, 該第一無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以判斷該第 ❹一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間是否已 經被設為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起 始時間; 該第三無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以在該第一 無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間已經被讯 為該第二無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起妒時門 時將該第三無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起如時 間設為該第一無線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起妒 133 201012157 75‘如中請㈣範圍第74項之無線電通㈣統,其中, 该第二無線電通訊終端裝置係和該第一無線電通訊終端裝 置相同類型的無線電通訊終端裝置。 76.如申請專利範圍第75項之無線電通訊系統,其中, 線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以在該第一無線 ^通:端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間已經被設為該 $二=線電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間時將 MM J 電通訊終端裝置的-暫存器) 設為該第-無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈。 線電於在無線電通訊系統中时化第-複數個無 》jζ f置和第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置的方 法,该方法包括: 於該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 通訊終端裝置中實行: 热蜾虿 決定該等第-複數個無線電通訊終 電通訊終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間/某無線 將該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 通訊終端裝置的同步介值j '宙#π + ^ π 直的Π步化傳送週期起始時間設為該 = 通讯終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置之經 決疋的同步化傳送週期起始時間;以及 、、 通二:ίΓΓ息,其包含和該等第-複數個無線電 二=LT無線電通訊終端裝置之經決定的同步 化傳送週期起始時間有關的資訊。 7 78.如申請專利範圍第77項之方法,其中,該等第-複 134 201012157 數個無線電通訊終端裝置及兮楚 衣直及該等第二複數個無線電通訊終 端裝置皆為一特定無線雷诵旬么, 、、'、 通訊系統中的特定無線電通訊終 端裝置。 79.如申請專利範圍第77項之士、+ ^ ^ ., 唄之方法,其進一步包括: 於該等第二複數個益繞 .、,'線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電 通訊終端裝置中實行: 決定該等第一複數個益線 .、,、線電通訊終端裝置中某一無線 Ο| Kiss 粑 粑 第 第 第 第 第 第 第 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 置 第 第 第 第 第 第 第;::=:=time _ rate 130 201012157 61. If the patent application scope is set to η, wherein the first-radio communication terminal electric communication terminal agricultural communication terminal device 'is configured to be a type, wireless type Communication and slotted offset time/frequency part communication', slotted time/frequency section end (4) radio communication Di 63; ^, these (4), ς e ❹ 2 2. Such as: patent scope 55 Whether the first radio communication terminal installation device has been in a preset time period... The terminal period start time includes determining that the second radio communication terminal device is = week in a preset number of frames and the hyperframe is synchronized to 2 The start time of the transfer cycle. Among them, there is no change in the 64. If the scope of the patent application is 55, the further step includes: a third judgment communication terminal is configured to determine the synchronization transmission period of the first radio communication terminal device. Sr is a synchronization transmission of the second radio communication terminal device, which comprises a terminal: a device and a second radio communication terminal, and a radio communication terminal device is configured to be configured For determining whether the first change is synchronized: whether the terminal device has not been changed in a predetermined period of time, and the start time of the transfer cycle; the second non-electrical communication terminal device is configured to determine the first communication terminal device Synchronization transmission cycle start time; 131 201012157 The first radio communication terminal device is configured to be used when the second radio communication terminal device has not changed its synchronization transmission cycle start time for a predetermined period of time Setting the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device to the second radio communication terminal device The step of transmitting period start time. 66. The radio communication system of claim 65, which is a special radio communication system, wherein the at least a first radio communication terminal device and the second radio communication terminal device are included in the radio communication system: For a specific radio communication terminal device. The radio communication system of claim 65, wherein the first radio communication terminal device is further configured to determine a clock cycle of the first radio communication terminal device. ▲ 68. For example, the radio communication system of claim 65, wherein the Violation-Telecom communication terminal device (4) is set to be used in the second telecommunications terminal to award ρ + ..., green, the device is present - The time when the virtual clock (which is the temporary register of the first radio communication terminal) is set to the second radio communication terminal device without changing the same starting time in the segment preset time. The radio pass of the range item 也 沾 “ · · 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 微 步 步 步 步 步 步 步 步 步 步 步 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ The radio communication line, wherein, the radio communication terminal device is the first type of device, and the radio communication terminal of the brain is only provided with the slot time 7 frequency portion 10 (10) 杈 for the slot offset time/frequency portion communication. 132 201012157 71. The radio communication system of claim 2, wherein the =-radio communication terminal device is a second type of radio communication terminal J is configured to provide slotted time/ Frequency part communication and slotted offset time/frequency part communication. 72• The radio communication system of the patent scope 70 or 71, wherein the time/frequency part includes the time/frequency code. The radio communication system of claim 65, wherein: (4) the first-radio communication terminal device determines whether the second radio communication terminal device has not changed its synchronization transmission period start time in the -stage preset time, including determining the first Whether the second radio communication terminal device has not changed its synchronization transmission period start time in at least one of the preset number of frames and the hyperframe. 74, as in the radio communication system of claim 65, Further comprising a third radio communication terminal device, wherein the first radio communication terminal device is configured to determine whether the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device has been set to the second Synchronization transmission cycle start time of the radio communication terminal device; the third radio communication terminal The end device is configured to use the third radio when the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the first radio communication terminal device has been received as the synchronization transmission cycle of the second radio communication terminal device The synchronization transmission period of the communication terminal device is set as the time is set to the synchronization transmission period of the first radio communication terminal device from 133 to 201012157 75', as in the fourth (fourth) range, the radio communication (four) system, wherein the second The radio communication terminal device is the same type of radio communication terminal device as the first radio communication terminal device. 76. The radio communication system of claim 75, wherein the line communication terminal device is configured to be used in the The first wireless communication channel: the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the terminal device has been set to the $2 = the synchronization transmission cycle start time of the line communication terminal device, and the MM J communication terminal device - the temporary register ) Set to the clock of the first-radio communication terminal device. A method of time-varying a plurality of radio communication terminal devices in a radio communication system, the method comprising: in the second plurality of radio communication terminal device communication terminal devices Execution: enthusiasm determines the synchronization transmission period start time of the first plurality of radio communication terminal communication terminal devices/the synchronization value of a communication terminal device of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices #π + ^ π The straight-paced transmission cycle start time is set to the = synchronization start cycle start time of the radio communication terminal device in the communication terminal device; and, And comprising information relating to the determined synchronization transmission period start times of the first plurality of radio two = LT radio communication terminal devices. 7 78. The method of claim 77, wherein the plurality of radio communication terminal devices and the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices are a specific wireless mine诵旬, , , ', a specific radio communication terminal device in the communication system. 79. The method of claim 77, the method of claim 3, further comprising: the second plurality of benefits, and the radio communication terminal device in the line communication terminal device Medium implementation: Decide on the first plurality of benefits of the first line, and, in a line communication terminal device 電通訊終端裝置的時脈週期。 8〇.如申請專利範圍第77項之方法,其進-步包括·· 於該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電 通dl終端裂置中實行: 將虛擬時脈(其係該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 中的該無線電通訊終端裝置的一 個無線電通訊終端裝署“暫存) 第一複數 ° 中的該無線電通訊終端裴置的時 脈0 J _申請專利範圍第7 7項 ·<►力法,其進一步包括· 於該等第二複數個無線電通訊 通訊終端裝置中實行: 、端裝置中的该無線電 其包含和該等第一複數個無線電 電通訊終端裝置之經決定的時脈 產生—同步化訊息, 通訊終端裝置中的該無線 週期有關的資訊。 ,其中,該等第一複 該等第二複數個無 該等第一類型的無 82.如’請專利範圍第77項之方法 數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第一類型, 線電通Λ終端裝置為第二類型,其中, 135 201012157 線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以僅提供有槽時間/頻1 分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊,而該等 類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以提供有槽— 頻率部分通訊以及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分通訊。 間/ :3.如申請專利範圍第82項之方法’其中:該同步㈣ 二r特定應用資訊要件,其係根據可由該第 的 無線電通訊終端裝置來解碼的第二通訊協定格式 '的 认如申請專利範圍第77項之方法其 送該同步化訊息給該等第二複數個包括·傳 的至少一其它無線電通訊終端裝置Γ線電通訊終端裝置中 85. 如申請專利範圍第77項之 數個無線電通訊終端裝置為、該等第一複 的成員;以及,其^該等第二端裝置群中 置為第二無線電通訊終端裝置群中的成員、線電通訊終端裝 86. 如申請專利範圍第85項之 通訊終端裝置群皆為 ,其中,該等無線電 87 , . ^、 線電通訊終端裝置俨桿群 87. 如申請專利範圍第77 Ϊ “不群。 送週期起始時間包括信根 &,其中,該同步化傳 間偏移中至少其中一 ‘ J ° <始時間和信標週期起始時 8.如申請專利範圍第82 頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼。方法,其中,該等時間/ 89.如申請專利範圍第84項之 於該等第二 法,其進一步包括: 其它無線電通==電通訊終端裝置中的該至少- 136 201012157 接收該同步化訊息; 將該等第二複數個無線電 終端裝置中的該至少一 其匕無線電通訊終端裝置的同 ^ Μ Μ - ^ ^ 化傳送週期起始時間設為 該等第複數個無線電通訊終端奘誉 裝中的該無線電通訊終 知裝置之經推知的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 90.如申請專利範圍第8 哨灸方法,其進一步包括: 於該等第二複數個無繞當、s 熬線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少一 m 其它無線電通訊終端裝置中: 將虛擬時脈(其係該等第-递 寻第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 中的該至>一其它無線電通訊 等第一複數個無線電通訊終端/置裝中2 一暫存器)設為該 裝置的時脈。 褒置中的該無線電通訊終端 91.-種第-複數個無線電通 補切故袖壯》 „ 、’衣夏的第一無線電 ;訊終端裝置,用以同步於-無線電通訊系統中之第-複 數個無線電通訊終端裝置中 之第一複 ^ 笫一無線電通訊線诚奘 置,該第一無線電通訊終端裝置包括: 、; 一判斷電路,其係被配置 & ^ ^ 风用以决疋該等第二複數個 無線電通訊終端裝置中的該笫_ 步介值、…一 線電通訊終端裝置的同 步化傳送週期起始時間; -同步化電路,其係被配置成用以將該第 訊終端裝置的同步化傳逆调 …、線電通 通™Μη : 起時間設為該第二無線電 通讯終端裝置之經決定的面丰& 疋的同步化傳送週期起始時間.以及 -產生電路,其係被配置成用以產生—同步化^自, 其包含和該第-無線電通訊終端裝置之經決定的同步㈣ 137 201012157 送週期起始時間有關的資訊。 92. 如申請專利範圍第μ 項之第一無線電通訊終端骏 置’其中,該等第一複數個I始恭 _ 致個無線電通訊終端裝置及該等第 二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 ^ ^ 衣直$為―特定無線電通訊系統 内的特定無線電通訊終端裝置。 93. 如申請專利範圍第91項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 置’其中’該判斷電路係被配置成用以決定該等第二複數 個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該第二無線電通訊終端 時脈週期。' 、 94. 如申請專利範圍第91項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 « 置,其中,該同步化電路係被配置成用以將虛擬時脈(其係 3亥第無線電通訊終端裝置的一暫存器)設為該第二無後 通訊終端裝置的時脈。 電 95. 如申請專利範圍第91項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 置,其中,該同步化訊息包含和該第一無線電通訊終端裝 置之經決定的時脈週期有關的資訊。 96. 如申請專利範圍第91項之第一無線電通訊終端裝 ❾ 置其中’該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第一類 型’該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第二類型,其 中’該等第一類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以 提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊以及有槽偏移時間/頻率部分 通訊,而該等第二類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成 用以僅提供有槽時間/頻率部分通訊而不提供有槽偏移時間 /頻率部分通訊。 138 201012157 97. 如申請專利範圍第91項之笛 置,其中,該同步化訊息包含一特定一無線電通訊終端裝 根據可由該第二類型的無線電通訊終 其係 通訊協定格式被編碼。 碼的第二 98. 如申請專利範圍第91項之笛 置,其進-步包括:-傳送電路;*無線電通訊終端裝 參 該同步化訊息給該等第一複數個無線:破配置成用以傳送 至少-其它無線電通訊終端裝置。、通訊終端裝置中的 99. 如申請專利範圍第98項之 置,其中,該等第-複數個無線線電通訊終端裝 線電通訊終端裝置群中的成員;以及其端裝置為第一無 數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第 第二複 的成員。 —、、、線電通訊終端裝置群中 100. 如申請專利範圍第99項坌 置,其中,钤笪&&& 第—無線電通訊终端驻 、中該等無線電通訊終端裝端敦 訊終端裝置信標群。 砰身為特疋無線電通 101. 如申請專利範圍第91項 置,其中,該同步化傳送週期起始=電通訊终端袭 時間和信標週期起始時間偏移中 :一信標遇期起始 1〇2.如申請專利範圍第96項之第者。 置,其中,該等時間/頻率部分包、、'線電通訊終端敦 机-種無線電通訊系統,其包==碼。 訊終端裝置和第二複數 錢個無線電通 該等第無線電通訊終端農置,其中. 等第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的一 夏甲的無線電通 139 201012157 訊終端裝置係被配置成用以實行: 決定料第-複數個無線電通訊終 電通訊終端裳置的同步化傳送週期起始時間;中的無線 :該等第_複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該益線電 :訊,、端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間設為該等第—複 數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝Ϊ之= 決疋的同步化傳送週期起始時間與時脈;以及 產生一同步化訊息,其包含和該等第一複數個無The clock cycle of the electrical communication terminal device. 8. The method of claim 77, wherein the step further comprises: performing the radio pass dl terminal split in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices: a radio communication terminal of the radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is "temporarily stored". The clock of the radio communication terminal in the first plurality of degrees is set to 0 J_ 7 7·<► force method, further comprising: performing in the second plurality of radio communication communication terminal devices: the radio in the end device and the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices The determined clock generates a synchronization message, the information related to the wireless period in the communication terminal device, wherein the first plurality of the second plurality of the first plurality without the first type is not 82. Please refer to the method of Article 77 of the patent range. The number of radio communication terminal devices is the first type, and the line communication terminal device is the second type, wherein 135 201012157 line communication ends The device is configured to provide only slotted time/frequency 1 minute communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication, and the types of radio communication terminal devices are configured to provide slotted-frequency Partial communication and slotted offset time/frequency part communication. / / 3. The method of claim 82, wherein: the synchronization (four) two specific application information requirements, which are based on the radio communication terminal The second communication protocol format of the device to decode the method of claim 77, which sends the synchronization message to the second plurality of other radio communication terminal devices including the transmission terminal 85. The plurality of radio communication terminal devices as claimed in claim 77 are, the first plurality of members; and the second terminal device group is placed in the second radio communication terminal device group The member and the line communication terminal are installed. 86. The communication terminal device group of claim 85 of the patent scope is all, wherein the radio 87, . ^, line communication terminal is installed 87. Yan rod cluster Patent Application range of 77 Ϊ "no group. The start period of the send cycle includes a root & wherein, at least one of the synchronized inter-transition offsets is 'J ° < the start time and the start of the beacon period. 8. The frequency portion of the patent application includes the time/ Frequency code. The method, wherein the time/89., as in the second method of claim 84, further comprising: the other radio pass == the at least 136 201012157 in the telecommunication terminal device receives the synchronization message And setting the start time of the same 匕 ^ - ^ 传送 transmission period of the at least one of the second plurality of radio terminal devices to the plurality of radio communication terminals The inferred synchronization transmission cycle start time of the radio communication terminal device. 90. The method of claim 8, wherein the method further comprises: in the at least one other radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of unwound, s-wired communication terminal devices: a pulse (which is the number of the first-to-find-number of radio communication terminal devices), a first plurality of radio communication terminals, etc. The clock. The radio communication terminal in the device 91. - the first - plurality of radio tones cut the sleeves " „, 'the first radio of the clothing summer; the terminal device for synchronizing with the - in the radio communication system - The first plurality of radio communication terminal devices of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices are disposed, the first radio communication terminal device comprises: a judgment circuit, which is configured to use the wind a synchronization start period of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices, a synchronization transmission cycle start time of the one-line electrical communication terminal device, and a synchronization circuit configured to use the first communication terminal The synchronization of the device is reversed, and the line-to-electricity TM Μ η: the time is set to the determined synchronization period start time of the second radio communication terminal device and the generation circuit. The system is configured to generate a synchronization, which includes information related to the determined synchronization (4) 137 201012157 of the first radio communication terminal device. For example, the first radio communication terminal of the application scope of the scope of the first item, wherein the first plurality of I, the first communication device, and the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices ^^ a particular radio communication terminal device within a particular radio communication system. 93. The first radio communication terminal device of claim 91, wherein the determination circuit is configured to determine the second plurality of radios a second radio communication terminal clock cycle in the communication terminal device. ', 94. The first radio communication terminal device of claim 91, wherein the synchronization circuit is configured to be virtualized The clock (which is a register of the 3H radio communication terminal device) is set as the clock of the second no-communication terminal device. Electricity 95. The first radio communication terminal device of claim 91, The synchronization message includes information related to the determined clock cycle of the first radio communication terminal device. The first radio communication terminal device of the 91st item, wherein the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices are of a first type, and the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices are of a second type, wherein the A type of radio communication terminal device is configured to provide slotted time/frequency portion communication and slotted offset time/frequency portion communication, and the second type of radio communication terminal device is configured to Provides slotted time/frequency portion communication without providing slotted offset time/frequency portion communication. 138 201012157 97. For the flute of claim 91, wherein the synchronization message contains a specific radio communication terminal It is encoded according to a communication protocol format that can be terminated by the second type of radio communication. The second 98 of the code. For the flute of claim 91, the further steps include: - a transmission circuit; * the radio communication terminal installs the synchronization message to the first plurality of wireless: broken configuration To transmit at least - other radio communication terminal devices. 99. In the communication terminal device, as set forth in claim 98, wherein the first plurality of wireless line communication terminals are members of the wired communication terminal device group; and the end device thereof is the first countless The radio communication terminal devices are members of the second complex. -,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,,, Terminal device beacon group.疋 疋 疋 疋 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 101 1〇2. If the patent application is the first of the 96th item. And wherein the time/frequency portion of the packet, the 'line communication terminal', and the type of radio communication system, the packet == code. The terminal device and the second plurality of radios are connected to the first radio communication terminal, wherein a radio terminal of the Hakka 139 201012157 in the plurality of radio communication terminal devices is configured to be used for Implementation: determining the start time of the synchronized transmission cycle in which the first plurality of radio communication terminal communication terminals are placed; the wireless in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices: the signal, the end device The synchronization transmission period start time is set to the synchronization transmission period start time and clock of the radio communication terminal installed in the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices; and generating a synchronization message , which contains and the first plurality of none 通訊终端裝置中㈣無線電通訊終端裝置之經衫的同步 化傳送週期起始時間有關的資訊。 104.如申4專利範圍第1〇3項之無線電通訊系統,其係 -特定無線電通訊系統’其中,料第—複數個無線電通 訊端裝置和該專第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置皆為特 定無線電通訊終端裝置。 105.如申請專利範圍第1〇3項之無線電通訊系統,其 中、荨第一複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通 訊終端裝置係被配置成用以實行:決定該等第一複數個無 線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈週 期0 106.如申請專利範圍第1〇3項之無線電通訊系統,其 中’該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通 訊終端裝置係被配置成用以實行:將虛擬時脈(其係該等第 二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置 的一暫存器)設為該等第一複數個無線電通訊終端装置中的 140 201012157 該無線電通訊終端裝置的時脈。 107.如申請專利範圍第 中,該同步…… 帛之無線電通訊系統,其 含和該等第一複數個無線電通訊狄端 裝置中的該無線電通訊終端裝置之 = 的資訊。 心町碍脈週期有關 =如申請專利範圍f 103項之無線電 二該等第-複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第—類型,: Φ 複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第二類型其中; 類型的無線電通訊終端裝置係以‘ 有槽時間/頻率部分诵邙& α 罝城用以僅提供 通訊,而該等第1型::槽偏移時間/頻率部分 用以提供有槽時間/頻率邱… 裝置係被配置成 部分通訊。革^刀通訊以及有槽偏移時間/頻率 中,Γ同如牛申請專利範圍第103項之無線電通訊系統,其 由Μ # I 3肖疋應用貧訊要件,其係根據可 :該第一類型的無線電通訊終端: 定格式被編碼。 肝㈣弟-通訊協 =如申請專利範圍帛103項之無線電通訊系統,其 傳送^線電通訊終端裝置係進-步被配置成用以實行:、 中的^步化訊息給該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 的至夕一其它無線電通訊終端裝置。 如申請專利範圍帛110項之無線電通訊系統,其 訊複數個無線電通訊終端裝置為第-無線電通 4裝置群中的成員;以及,其中,該等第二複數個無 141 201012157 線電通訊終端裝置為員。 第二無線電通訊 终端裝置 群中的成 如申請專利範圍第lu項之蛊 中,該等無線電it訊終端裝置群皆L相系統,其 裝置信標群。 、&無線電通訊終端 中,該同步化傳送週期起始時間:系統, 信標週期起始時間偏移中至少其中—者月起始時間 114. 如申請專利範圍第1〇3項之盔(4) Information about the start time of the synchronization transmission cycle of the shirt of the radio communication terminal device in the communication terminal device. 104. The radio communication system of claim 1, wherein the radio-communication system is a specific radio communication system, wherein the first plurality of radio communication devices and the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices are specific Radio communication terminal device. 105. The radio communication system of claim 1, wherein the radio communication terminal device of the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices is configured to: determine the first plurality of radios a radio communication system of the radio communication terminal device in the communication terminal device. The radio communication system of claim 1, wherein the radio communication terminal device of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices Is configured to: set a virtual clock (which is a register of the radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices) as the first plurality of radio communication terminal devices 140 201012157 The clock of the radio communication terminal device. 107. The scope of the patent application, the synchronization ... radio communication system, comprising information of the radio communication terminal device in the first plurality of radio communication terminals. The heart-to-heart cycle is related to the radio = two radio communication terminal devices of the patent application scope f 103 are of the first type: Φ a plurality of radio communication terminal devices are of the second type; The terminal device uses the 'slotted time/frequency portion 诵邙& alpha 用以 用以 to provide only communication, and the first type:: slot offset time/frequency portion is used to provide slotted time/frequency qi... It is configured for partial communication. In the knives communication and slotted offset time/frequency, the same as the radio communication system of the 103rd patent application scope, the I # I 3 疋 疋 application of the poor communication requirements, based on: Type of radio communication terminal: The format is encoded. Liver (four) brother-communication association = as in the radio communication system of claim 103, the transmission line communication terminal device is configured to perform: A plurality of radio communication terminal devices of the other radio communication terminal devices. For example, in the radio communication system of claim 110, the plurality of radio communication terminal devices are members of the first radio communication device group; and, wherein the second plurality of non-141 201012157 line communication terminal devices For the staff. In the second radio communication terminal device group, for example, in the scope of the patent application scope, the radio terminal device group is an L-phase system, and the device beacon group. , & radio communication terminal, the synchronization transmission cycle start time: at least one of the system, the beacon period start time offset, the start time of the month 114. The helmet of the first scope of claim 1 中,該等時間/頻率部分包括時間/頻率碼。相系統’ 115. 如申請專利範圍第11〇項之 中,該箄篦-$虹V 無線電通訊系統,: 第—複數個無線電通訊終端裝 它無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成心實行該至少d 接收該同步化訊息; 數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少 該ί第^ 終端裝置的同步化傳送週期起始時間設 端装…無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊 經推知的同步化傳送週期起始時間。 7如申請專利範圍第110項之無線電通訊系統,其 ,該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該至少一其 它無線電通訊終端裝置係被配置成用以實行: 將虛擬時脈(其係該等第二複數個無線電通訊終端裝置 中的該至少& 、匕無線電通訊終端裝置的一暫存器)設為該 等第一、食叙 ^ 個無線電通訊終端裝置中的該無線電通訊終端 142 201012157 裝置之經推知的時脈八、圖式: (如次頁)The time/frequency portions include time/frequency codes. Phase system' 115. In the ninth aspect of the patent application, the 箄篦-$虹V radio communication system, the first plurality of radio communication terminals equipped with the radio communication terminal device are configured to implement the at least d Receiving the synchronization message; the synchronization transmission period start time of the at least the terminal device of the plurality of radio communication terminal devices is... the synchronized communication transmission period of the radio communication in the radio communication terminal device Start time. 7. The radio communication system of claim 110, wherein the at least one other of the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is configured to: perform a virtual clock (the system) The at least & a temporary register of the radio communication terminal device in the second plurality of radio communication terminal devices is set as the radio communication terminal 142 of the first, the first radio communication terminal devices 201012157 The inferred clock of the device, the pattern: (such as the next page)
TW098129179A 2008-08-28 2009-08-28 Methods and devices for requesting radio resources and/or synchronization within a radio communication system TW201012157A (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US9246708P 2008-08-28 2008-08-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201012157A true TW201012157A (en) 2010-03-16

Family

ID=41721746

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW098129179A TW201012157A (en) 2008-08-28 2009-08-28 Methods and devices for requesting radio resources and/or synchronization within a radio communication system

Country Status (3)

Country Link
CN (1) CN102132617A (en)
TW (1) TW201012157A (en)
WO (1) WO2010024784A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI562550B (en) * 2010-07-07 2016-12-11 Koninkl Philips Electronics Nv A method and system for enabling multiband transmission in wireless systems
EP2819466B1 (en) * 2012-02-20 2015-10-28 Panasonic Corporation Multi-layered wireless communication system
WO2018189726A1 (en) * 2017-04-13 2018-10-18 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Distributed scheduling algorithm for cpri over ethernet
CN108770015B (en) * 2018-05-29 2021-03-23 清华大学 Method and device for selecting transmission mode of communication system
CN111491354B (en) * 2019-01-25 2023-09-12 阿里巴巴集团控股有限公司 Node synchronization method and device in ad hoc network and ad hoc network system

Family Cites Families (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20050159106A1 (en) * 2003-12-30 2005-07-21 Arto Palin Method and system for assigning time-frequency codes
US20050176371A1 (en) * 2004-02-09 2005-08-11 Arto Palin Synchronization of time-frequency codes
JP5015958B2 (en) * 2006-01-11 2012-09-05 クゥアルコム・インコーポレイテッド Encoding of beacon signal providing ID in peer-to-peer communication
US20080056187A1 (en) * 2006-08-31 2008-03-06 Futurewei Technologies, Inc. System For Grouping Users To Share Time-Frequency Resources In A Wireless Communication System

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
WO2010024784A1 (en) 2010-03-04
CN102132617A (en) 2011-07-20

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
ES2427145T3 (en) High speed media access control and direct link protocol
ES2393104T3 (en) High speed media access control
TWI375418B (en) A system and method for dynamic adaptation of data rate and transmit power with a beaconing protocol
JP6174243B2 (en) Channel reservation in frequency multiplex communication in high density wireless environment
TWI375480B (en) Method and system for controlling access to a wireless communication medium
US20230071979A1 (en) Wireless communication method for saving power and wireless communication terminal using same
TWI466517B (en) High speed media access control
KR101644807B1 (en) Methods and arrangements to coordinate communications in a wireless network
TWI248770B (en) System topologies for optimum capacity transmission over wireless local area networks
US20100177718A1 (en) Use of network capacity
CN106465418A (en) Wireless communication method for simultaneous data transmission, and wireless communication terminal using same
TW201143334A (en) Scheduling with reverse direction grant in wireless communication systems
JP2011517142A (en) Method for communicating in a network comprising a set of coordinator nodes and leaf nodes
KR101122616B1 (en) Method to improve throughput and power consumption efficiency in wireless communication systems
WO2008119219A1 (en) Method, system, and wireless frame structure for supporting different mode of multiple access
TW201012157A (en) Methods and devices for requesting radio resources and/or synchronization within a radio communication system
Sharma Analysis of 802.11 b MAC: A QoS, fairness, and performance perspective
CN107079481A (en) Wireless communications method and wireless communication terminal
Hiertz et al. Multiband ofdm alliance-the next generation of wireless personal area networks
CN102123448B (en) Channel reservation method based on double busy tone mechanism in wireless self-organizing network
Broustis et al. Multiband media access control in impulse-based UWB ad hoc networks
KR101040290B1 (en) Wireless Network Systems with Priority Class Based Medium Access Control
Balkonis WIFI evolution “beyond WIFI 6”
KR100999039B1 (en) Wireless Network System of Multi tier and Communication Method and Apparatus thereof
Li et al. CRP-CMAC: A priority-differentiated cooperative MAC protocol with contention resolution for multihop wireless networks